You are on page 1of 262

instruction

book

TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S
Transponder System






Copyright 2007 Rockwell Collins, Inc. All rights reserved.

1/2
March 07, 2007
TO: HOLDERS OF ROCKWELL COLLINS

TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S
TRANSPONDER SYSTEM (CPN 523-0775652)
DESCRIPTION OF REVISION NO 1
This page shows all pages of the manual that are added, changed, or removed. Replace the
specified pages of the manual with the new pages supplied. Record the applicable data on the
Record of Revisions page.
All changed pages keep data necessary to do maintenance on all equipment models. Black bars
on the side of the page identify changes.
This revision does not include copies of service bulletins (SB) and service information letters
(SIL) applicable to this equipment. This manual includes all data from applicable SBs and SILs.
The front area of this manual contains a list of all released SBs and SILs. For this revision, move
the SBs and SILs from your manual to this manual. Discard all replaced pages.
PAGE NUMBER
DESCRIPTION OF REVISION
AND REASON FOR CHANGE
SERVICE
BULLETIN
EFFECTIVITY
RTR-1/RTR-2 Revised to reflect current revision. None
General Information
TOC, LEP, RR
Revised LEP entries. None
General Information
pages 1-2
Incorporated TR2 adding 622-9352-007
and 622-9210-007.
None
General Information
pages 1-11
Incorporated TR1 adding MMT-150
Mount for BA609 installations.
None
Theory of Operation
TOC, LEP, RR
Revised LEP entries. None
Maintenance TOC,
LEP, RR
Revised LEP entries. None



instruction book

Rockwell Collins, Inc.
Cedar Rapids, Iowa 52498












T-1
Printed in the United States of America
Copyright 2007 Rockwell Collins, Inc. All rights reserved.
523-0775652-12711A
(TDR-94/94D_IB_MAR_7/07)
7th Edition, June 15/1995
7th Edition, 1st Revision, March 7/2007
TDR-94/94D ATC/MODE S
Transponder System
This publication includes:
General Information 523-0775653
Operation 523-0775655
Theory of Operation 523-0775656
Maintenance 523-0775657








ROCKWELL COLLINS
INSTRUCTION BOOK
TDR-94/94D, PART NO 622-9352/622-9210
T-2
Mar 7/07

PROPRIETARY NOTICE

NOTICE: FREEDOM OF INFORMATION ACT (5 USC 552) AND DISCLOSURE OF
CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION GENERALLY (18 USC 1905)
This document and the information disclosed herein are proprietary data of Rockwell Collins, Inc.
Neither this document nor the information contained herein shall be used, reproduced, or disclosed
to others without the written authorization of Rockwell Collins, Inc., except to the extent required for
installation or maintenance of recipients equipment. This document is being furnished in
confidence by Rockwell Collins, Inc. The information disclosed herein falls within exemption (b) (4)
of 5 USC 552 and the prohibitions of 18 USC 1905.

SOFTWARE COPYRIGHT NOTICE

COPYRIGHT 1989 - 1995 ROCKWELL COLLINS, INC. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
All software resident in this equipment is protected by copyright.
We try to supply manuals that are free of errors, but some can occur. If a problem is found with this
manual, you can send the necessary data to Rockwell Collins. When you report a specified
problem, give short instructions. Include the manual part number, the paragraph or figure number,
and the page number.

To send data to Rockwell Collins about this manual:

Address: Rockwell Collins, Inc.
350 Collins Road NE, M/S 153-250
Cedar Rapids, IA 52498-0001

Email: techmanuals@Rockwellcollins.com

To get more manuals:

Address: Rockwell Collins, Inc.
Customer Response Center
400 Collins Road NE, M/S 133-100
Cedar Rapids, IA 52498-0001

TELEPHONE: 1.888.265.5467
INTERNATIONAL: 1.319.265.5467
FAX: 319.295.4941

Email: response@rockwellcollins.com


SPECIFIC ADVISORIES FOR THE <EQ TYPE>
Warni ng
Rockwel l I nternati onal does not take the responsi bi l i ty for certi cati on of the TDR-94/94D when used wi th
equi pment other than those covered by the Rockwel l I nternati onal Col l i ns Avi oni cs safety anal ysi s.
Warni ng
El ectroni c control systems, such as autopi l ots, engi ne control s, fuel control s, temperature sensors, etc, used
for ai rcraft control can be suscepti bl e to transmi ssi ons from communi cati ons transcei vers, DMEs, transpond-
ers, etc, that can i nterfere wi th ai rcraft operati ons. I f such a si tuati on occurs, di sconti nue transmi ssi on or
sel ect a di fferent frequency. I f necessary, turn off the radi o.
Warni ng
Servi ce personnel are to obey standard safety precauti ons, such as weari ng safety gl asses, to prevent personal
i njury whi l e i nstal l i ng or doi ng mai ntenance on thi s uni t.
Warni ng
Use care when usi ng seal ants, sol vents, and other chemi cal compounds. Do not expose to excessi ve heat or
open ame. Use adequate venti l ati on. Avoi d prol onged breathi ng of vapors and avoi d prol onged contact wi th
ski n. Observe al l cauti ons and warni ngs gi ven by the manufacturer.
Warni ng
Remove al l power to the uni t before di sassembl i ng i t. Di sassembl i ng the uni t wi th power connected i s
dangerous to l i fe and may cause vol tage transi ents that can damage the uni t.
Warni ng
Thi s uni t may have components that contai n materi al s (such as beryl l i um oxi de, aci ds, l i thi um, radi oacti ve
materi al , mercury, etc) that can be hazardous to your heal th. I f the component encl osure i s broken, handl e
the component i n accordance wi th OSHA requi rements 29CFR 1910.1000 or supersedi ng documents to prevent
personal contact wi th or i nhal ati on of hazardous materi al s. Si nce i t i s vi rtual l y i mpossi bl e to determi ne whi ch
components do or do not contai n such hazardous materi al s, do not open or di sassembl e components for any
reason.
Warni ng
Thi s uni t exhi bi ts a hi gh degree of functi onal rel i abi l i ty. Neverthel ess, users must know that i t i s not
practi cal to moni tor for al l concei vabl e system fai l ures and, however unl i kel y, i t i s possi bl e that erroneous
operati on coul d occur wi thout a faul t i ndi cati on. The pi l ot has the responsi bi l i ty to nd such an occurrence
by means of cross-checks wi th redundant or correl ated data avai l abl e i n the cockpi t.
Cauti on
Turn off power before di sconnecti ng any uni t from wi ri ng. Di sconnecti ng the uni t wi thout turni ng power off
may cause vol tage transi ents that can damage the uni t.
i
Cauti on
Thi s uni t contai ns el ectrostati c di scharge sensi ti ve (ESDS) components and ESDS assembl i es that can be
damaged by stati c vol tages. Al though most ESDS components contai n i nternal protecti on ci rcui ts, good
procedures di ctate careful handl i ng of al l ESDS components and ESDS assembl i es.
Obey the precauti ons gi ven bel ow when movi ng, touchi ng, or repai ri ng al l ESDS components and uni ts
contai ni ng ESDS components.
a. Deenergi ze or remove al l power, si gnal sources, and l oads used wi th the uni t.
b. Pl ace the uni t on a work surface that can conduct el ectri ci ty (i s grounded).
c. Ground the repai r operator through a conducti ve wri st strap or other devi ce usi ng a 470-kor 1-M seri es
resi stor to prevent operator i njury.
d. Ground any tool s (and sol deri ng equi pment) that wi l l contact the uni t. Contact wi th the operator s hand
i s a suffi ci ent ground for hand tool s that are el ectri cal l y i sol ated.
e. Al l ESDS repl acement components are shi pped i n conducti ve foam or tubes and must be stored i n thei r
shi ppi ng contai ners unti l i nstal l ed.
f. ESDS devi ces and assembl i es, that are removed from a uni t, must i mmedi atel y be put on the conducti ve
work surface or i n conducti ve contai ners.
g. Pl ace repai red or di sconnected ci rcui t cards i n al umi num foi l or i n pl asti c bags that have a l ayer of, or are
made wi th, conducti ve materi al .
h. Do not touch ESDS devi ces/assembl i es or remove them from thei r contai ners unti l they are needed.
Fai l ure to handl e ESDS devi ces as descri bed above can permanentl y damage them. Thi s damage can cause
i mmedi ate or premature devi ce fai l ure.
ii

RTR-1/RTR-2
Mar 7/07
ROCKWELL COLLINS
INSTRUCTION BOOK
TDR-94/94D, PART NO 622-9352/622-9210
RECORD OF TEMPORARY REVISIONS
TEMPORARY
REV NO
PAGE NUMBER
DATE
ISSUED
BY
DATE
REMOVED
BY
1 1-11 Aug 15/00 Rockwell Collins Mar 7/07 Rockwell Collins
2 1-2 Nov 22/02 Rockwell Collins Mar 7/07 Rockwell Collins





















523-0775653-006118
6th Edition, 15 June 1995
TDR-94/94D
ATC/Mode S
Transponder System
General Information
table of contents
Paragraph Page
1.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUPPLIED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1.4 RELATED PUBLICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.5 STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
1.6 RELATED SERVICE BULLETINS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-12
NOTICE: This section replaces fifth edition dated 5 May 1993.


Page No Issue
* Title ............................................7 Mar 07
* List of Effective Pages ...............7 Mar 07
1-1.............................................. 5 May 93
* 1-2...............................................7 Mar 07
1-3 thru 1-5 ............................... 5 May 93
1-6 thru 1-9 .............................. 15 Jun 95
1-10............................................ 5 May 93
* 1-11.............................................7 Mar 07
1-12 thru 1-13............................ 5 May 93
1-14 Blank................................. 5 May 93




Record of Revisions
RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF
REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV/
ED NO
REVISION
DATE
INSERTION
DATE/BY
SB NUMBER IN-
CLUDED
REV
NO
REVISION
DATE
INSERTION
DATE/BY
SB NUMBER IN-
CLUDED

0 / 1 4 Apr 89 None

0 / 2 4 Apr 90 None

0 / 3 29 Apr 91 None

0 / 4 6 Jan 92 None

0 / 5 5 May 93 See Table 1-6

0 / 6 15 Jun 95 See Table 1-6

1 / 6 7 Mar 07 See Table 1-6




List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.
section I
general information
1.1 INTRODUCTION
Thi s publ i cati on provi des al l the speci cati ons,
pri nci pl es of operati on, and i nformati on necessary
to test and troubl eshoot the TDR-94 and TDR-94D
Mode S Transponder System i n the ai rpl ane. The
i nformati on i ncl udes a bench testi ng procedure to
veri fy the performance capabi l i ty before i nstal l a-
ti on of a new or newl y repai red transponder.
Refer to tabl e 1-1 for a l i st of equi pment covered
TDR-94/ 94D ModeS Transponder
Figure1-1
i n thi s manual and tabl e 1-2 for the TDR-94/94D
speci cati ons. Tabl e 1-3 i s a l i sti ng of envi ron-
mental requi rements for DO-160B. Tabl e 1-4 i s a
l i sti ng of publ i cati ons rel ated to the TDR-94/94D.
Tabl e 1-6 i s a l i sti ng of Servi ce Bul l eti ns and Ser-
vi ce I nformati on Letters that have been rel eased
up to the date of thi s manual edi ti on. Fi gure 1-1
i s an overal l vi ew of the TDR-94/94D.
1.1.1 General Description
The TDR-94/94D Transponder i s a sol i d-state,
ai rborne, ai r traffi c control (ATC) transponder.
The TDR-94 or TDR-94D Transponder i s normal l y
mounted i n a MMT-150 Modul ar Mounti ng Tray
and control l ed by an ATC control l i ke the the
CTL-92/92A Control . Refer to the Pro Li ne I I
Comm/Nav/Pul se System I nstal l ati on Manual for
a l i sti ng of the vari ous CTL-92/92A, RTU-870A/T
and other control s avai l abl e for use wi th the TDR-
94/94D. The TDR-94D Transponder i s a Di versi ty
versi on; i .e., i t i s capabl e of transmi tti ng and re-
cei vi ng on ei ther of two antennas. The TDR-94 i s
a non-di versi ty model . The TDR-94D i s ful l y
compati bl e wi th TCAS I I system i nstal l ati ons re-
qui ri ng antenna di versi ty. Ei ther of two antenna
types can be used wi th the TDR-94/94D as shown
i n tabl e 1-1.
1.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT
The TDR-94/94D i s an i ntegral part of the Ai r
Traffi c Control Radar Beacon System (ATCRBS).
The TDR-94/94D operates i n mode A by respond-
i ng to normal beacon radar i nterrogati ons. Thi s
mode provi des i denti cati on of transponder-
equi pped ai rpl anes on the ground control l er s pl an
posi ti on i ndi cati on (PPI ). I f the i nstal l ati on i s
equi pped wi th a compati bl e al ti tude encoder, i t
can operate i n mode C and provi de al ti tude data
l ong wi th the normal repl y. I n the mode S
scheme, each ai rpl ane i s assi gned a uni que i denti -
cati on code whi ch al l ows automati c and uni que
i nterrogati on and di spl ay of a speci c ai rpl ane.
The ai rpl ane i denti cati on i s assi gned at i nstal l a-
ti on and i s based on the i denti cati on (tai l ) num-
ber. The uni que i denti er i s requi red i n TCAS
operati on. I n addi ti on, the TDR-94/94D can re-
cei ve and send data l i nk messages that are re-
qui red for ATC automati on. The added data l i nk
capabi l i ty al l ows the transponder to perform addi -
ti onal ai r traffi c control and ai rpl ane separati on
assurance (ASA) functi ons.
1.3 EQUIPMENT REQUIRED BUT NOT SUP-
PLIED
Tabl e 1-4 l i sts the equi pment requi red for proper
operati on of the TDR-94/94D but i s not suppl i ed
wi th the uni t. Equi val ent equi pment may be sub-
sti tuted.
5/ 5/ 1993 1-1
general information 523-0775653
7 March 2007 1-2
1.4 RELATED PUBLICATIONS
Table 1-5 lists publications related to TDR-94/94D
operation.

Table 1-1. Equipment Covered.
COLLINS
EQUIPMENT
DESCRIPTION
PART NUMBER
TDR-94
ANT-42
MMT-150
Mode A, C, and S ATC Transponder
L-band antenna for transponder or DME. Uses ac signal coupling to radiating
element.
Mounting Tray for TDR-94/94D

622-9352-003
622-6591-001

622-9672-003
FOR INSTALLATIONS USING CSDB TUNING
CTL-92

CTL-92T
Pro Line II, ATC Control (uses CSDB data format). Refer to Pro Line II
Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual for available options.
Transponder and TCAS Control, used in conjunction with CTL-92/92A to add TCAS
control functions. Refer to TCAS-94 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System
Installation Manual for available options.
622-6523-XXX

622-9614-XXX
FOR INSTALLATIONS USING ARING 429 TUNING
RTU-870A


RTU-870T
Remote Tuning Unit, gives centralized control and display of the frequency/ATC
code and modes of the Collins -4XX series of General Aviation equipment. Refer to
Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual for available options.
RTU-870T Remote Tuning Unit, same as RTU-870A except includes TCAS control
capability. Refer to Pro Line II Comm/NAV/Pulse Installation Manual for available
options.
622-9346-XXX


622-9856-XXX
ALTERNATE MODELS AVAILABLE
TDR-94D
TDR-94

TDR-94D


TDR-94

TDR-94D

TDR-94/94D

CTL-92A

237Z-1
TTC-920G
TDR-94D Same as TDR-94 except with diversity capability
The -007 version of the TDR-94 supports both Elementary and Enhanced Surveil-
lance requirements. Existing versions of the TDR-94 can be updated to Elementary
Enhanced Surveillance functionality by incorporating SB 13 and SB 501.
The -007 version of the TDR-94D supports both Elementary and Enhanced Sur-
veillance requirements. Existing versions of the TDR-94D can be updated to Ele-
mentary Enhanced Surveillance functionality by incorporating SB 13 and SB 501.
Same as TDR-94 -003 except without TCAS compatibility features. Can be used in
installations without TCAS and where diversity is not required.
Same as TDR-94D -003 except without TCAS compatibility features. Can be used in
installations without TCAS and where diversity is needed.
These models are no longer supported. All existing -001 units should be upgraded to
at least -002.
Same as CTL-92 except with enhanced display capability Refer to Pro Line II
Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual for available options.
Similar to ANT-42 except uses dc coupling to radiating element.
Transponder/TCAS Control. Dedicated control for TCAS and Mode S Transponder.
Refer to TCAS-94 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System Installation
Manual for available options.
622-9210-003
622-9352-007

622-9210-007


622-9352-002

622-9210-002

622-9352-001
622-9210-001
622-8740-XXX

522-2632-001
822-0078-XXX
general information 523-0775653
Table1-2. Equipment Specications.
CHARACTERI STI C SPECI FI CATI ON
Certi cati on
TSO
FAA TSO-C112, cl ass 2A
RTCA D0-181, D0-144
Software DO-178A, l evel 2
EUROCAE ED-12A
Deutsche Bundespost
FTZ
A44652010
I CAO Annex 10
Envi ronmental
FAA DO-160B, refer to tabl e 1-3 for addi ti onal i nformati on
EUROCAE ED-12A
Physi cal
Si ze
Hei ght 84.6 mm (3.33 i n)
Wi dth 124.5 mm (4.90 i n)
Length 317.5 mm (12.50 i n)
Wei ght 3.6 kg (8.5 l b)
Mounti ng MMT-150; 1/2 ATR, short, dwarf ( Refer to Pro Li ne I I Comm/NAV/Pul se I nstal l ati on
Manual for addi ti onal i nformati on.)
Mati ng Connector Thi nl i ne I I , qty 2, 60-pi n (Ki ts: CPN: 628-8661-001/002 or 628-8660-001/002) ( Refer to Pro
Li ne I I Comm/NAV/Pul se I nstal l ati on Manual for addi ti onal i nformati on.)
Ti me between overhaul On condi ti on of fai l ure or as requi red by Federal Regul ati ons (see bel ow)
Regul atory requi rement for
i ghtl i ne test
FAR 91.413 ATC TRANSPONDER TESTS AND I NSPECTI ONS.
"(a) No person may use an ATC transponder that i s speci ed i n Part 125 91.24 (a),
121.345, 127.123 (b), or 135.143 (c) of thi s chapter unl ess, wi thi n the precedi ng 24
cal endar months, that ATC transponder has been tested and i nspected and found to compl y
wi th Appendi x F of Part 43 of thi s chapter; and fol l owi ng any i nstal l ati on or mai ntenance on
an ATC transponder where data correspondence error coul d be i ntroduced, the i ntegrated
system has been tested, i nspected, and found to compl y wi th paragraph Appendi x E of Part
43 of thi s chapter."
Power requi rements 27.5 2.5 V dc at 28 watts nomi nal , 30 watts maxi mum
Transmi tter
Frequency 1090 MHz, 1 MHz
Power output 250 watts mi n, 625 watts maxi mum
Load i mpedance 50 nomi nal
VSWR 1.5:1 servi ce max., 3:1 survi val
5/ 5/ 1993 1-3
general information 523-0775653
Table1-2. Equipment Specications. (contd)
CHARACTERI STI C SPECI FI CATI ON
Recei ver
Frequency 1030 MHz nomi nal
I F 60 MHz
Sensi ti vi ty -77 dBm 3 dBm
Repl y modes ATCRBS mode A
ATCRBS mode C
ATCRBS mode A/Mode S Al l Cal l
ATCRBS mode C/Mode S Al l Cal l
ATCRBS mode A onl y Al l Cal l
ATCRBS mode C onl y Al l Cal l
Mode S, short (56-bi t)
Mode S, l ong (112-bi t)
Repl y rate
ATCRBS 500 15-pul se repl i es/sec
1200 15-pul se repl i es i n 100 ms
Mode S 34 short and 16 l ong repl i es i n 1 sec
12 short and 6 l ong repl i es i n 100 ms
4 short and 4 l ong repl i es i n 25 ms
2 short and 2 l ong i n 1.6 ms
ATCRBS si de l obe suppressi on
Max of 10%l repl i es and sl s
i ni ti ated
P1 pul se i s MTL + 3 dB to -21 dBm and
P2 equal to or greater than P1
Max of 10% repl i es and sl s
may be i ni ti ated
P1 pul se i s MTL to MTL + 3 dB and
P2 equal to or greater than P1
Mi ni mum of 90% repl i es
and no sl s
P1 pul se i s MTL +3 dB to -21 dBm, and
P1 pul se i s mi n 9 dB greater than P2
No P2 pul se occurs at 2.0 0.7 s after l eadi ng edge of P1, or
P2 pul se durati on i s l ess than 0.3 s
Mode S si de l obe suppressi on Max of 10%
El ectri cal
Pri mary power (P1-58) 27.5, 2.5, V dc (+), 28 watts nomi nal , 100 watts peak
Pri mary power common
(P1-60)
27.5 V dc (-)
5/ 5/ 1993 1-4
general information 523-0775653
Table1-2. Equipment Specications. (contd)
CHARACTERI STI C SPECI FI CATI ON
Data bus:
CSDB
Structure 8-bi ts/byte, 6-bytes/bl ock
Rate 12.5 Baud, 10-bl ock/sec nomi nal , 18 max
Data bl ocks (al l l abel s are i n hexadeci mal form)
A5: sync; i nput
A0: al ti tude data; i nput
1E: ATC code/al ti tude; i nput or output
1F: ATC data; output
F3: di agnosti c data; output
ARI NC 429
Structure 8-bi ts/byte, 4-bytes/word
Rate 5-words/sec mi n
Data l abel s (al l l abel s are i n octal form)
*013: TDR and TCAS control ; i nput/output
*015: Al ti tude sel ect l i mi ts, i nput/output
*016: Mode S control ; i nput/output
*031: ATC Transponder Control , i nput/output
*200: Gi l l ham al ti tude encoder data; i nput/output
*203: TDR al ti tude data to TCAS; i nput/output
204: TDR corrected barometri c al ti tude to TCAS; output
272: TCAS coordi nati on data, part 1; output
273: TCAS data for downl i nk message formats 16, 20, 21; i nput
274: TCAS coordi nati on data, part 2; output
274: TCAS data for downl i nk message formats 0 and 16; i nput
275: TCAS control , part 1; output
275: TCAS acknowl edge; i nput
276: TCAS control , part 2; output
277: TCAS acknowl edge; i nput
277: Di agnosti c data request; i nput
350: Mai ntenance data; output
371: Equi pment i dent; output
* These l abel s are normal l y echoed, and/or passed through to the TCAS, as recei ved
except for the SSM whi ch may be di fferent dependi ng on the state of the transponder.
Tuni ng i nputs Moni tored onl y i f Burst Mode (P2-59) i s not sel ected; i .e., P2-59 i s open
P2-31
P2-32
CSDB, A
CSDB, B
P2-17
P2-18
ARI NC 429, A (tune i nput port A)
ARI NC 429, B (tune i nput port A)
P2-13
P2-14
ARI NC 429, A (tune i nput port B)
ARI NC 429, B (tune i nput port B)
P2-21
P2-22
ARI NC 429, A (tune i nput port C)
ARI NC 429, B (tune i nput port C)
Al ti tude i nputs
P2-33
P2-34
CSDB, A (al ti tude i nput port A)
CSDB, B (al ti tude i nput port A)
P2-35
P3-36
CSDB, A (al ti tude i nput port B)
CSDB, B (al ti tude i nput port B)
5/ 5/ 1993 1-5
general information 523-0775653
Table1-2. Equipment Specications. (contd)
CHARACTERI STI C SPECI FI CATI ON
I nput/Output
Al ti tude i nputs (contd)
P2-25
P2-26
ARI NC 429/575, A (al ti tude i nput port A)
ARI NC 429/575, B (al ti tude i nput port A)
P2-29
P2-30
ARI NC 429/575, A (al ti tude i nput port B)
ARI NC 429/575, B (al ti tude i nput port B)
Data outputs
P2-23
P2-24
CSDB, A (Bus 1)
CSDB, B (Bus 1)
P2-27
P2-28
CSDB, A (Bus 2)
CSDB, B (Bus 2)
P2-15
P2-16
ARI NC 429, A (Port A)
ARI NC 429, B (Port A)
P2-19
P2-20
ARI NC 429, A (Port B)
ARI NC 429, B (Port B)
Peri pheral data
P2-1
P2-2
ARI NC 429, A (Comm A/B i nput)
ARI NC 429, B (Comm A/B i nput)
P2-3
P2-4
ARI NC 429, A (Comm A/B output)
ARI NC 429, B (Comm A/B output)
P2-5
P2-6
ARI NC 429, A (Comm C/D i nput)
ARI NC 429, B (Comm C/D i nput)
P2-7
P2-8
ARI NC 429, A (Comm C/D output)
ARI NC 429, B (Comm C/D output)
P2-9
P2-10
ARI NC 429, A (TCAS coord data i nput)
ARI NC 429, B (TCAS coord data i nput)
P2-11
P2-12
ARI NC 429, A (TCAS coord data output)
ARI NC 429, B (TCAS coord data output)
Di screte i nputs
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
P1-4
P1-5
P1-6
P1-7
P1-8
P1-9
P1-10
P1-11
P1-12
B4, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
B2, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
B1, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
A4, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
A2, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
A1, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
D4, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
D2, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
C4, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
C2, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
C1, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
Common, ARI NC 572 al ti tude i nput
Mode S address di scretes
P1-32
P1-33
P1-34
Common
B1
B2
6/ 15/ 1995 1-6
general information 523-0775653
Table1-2. Equipment Specications. (contd)
CHARACTERI STI C SPECI FI CATI ON
I nput/Output (conti nued)
Mode S address di scretes
(contd)
P1-35
P1-36
P1-37
P1-38
P1-39
P1-40
P1-41
P1-42
P1-43
P1-44
P1-45
P1-46
P1-47
P1-48
P1-49
P1-50
P1-51
P1-52
P1-53
P1-54
P1-55
P1-56
B3
B4
B5
B6
B7
B8
B9
B10
B11
B12
B13
B14
B15
B16
B17
B18
B19
B20
B21
B22
B23
B24
Si ngl e di screte straps
P2-51 Antenna, dual /si ngl e sel ect (gnd = si ngl e)
P2-56 CSDB/ARI NC 429 control sel ect (gnd = CSDB)
P2-60 ADLP i nstal l ed (gnd = ADLP i ncl uded i n i nstal l ati on)
P1-13 TCAS i nstal l ed (gnd = TCAS i ncl uded i n i nstal l ati on)
Note: There i s no provi si on for TCAS control i n CSDB. Therefore, the TDR-94D wi l l
not report TCAS capabi l i ty i n i ts repl i es to i nterrogati ons when CSDB i s enabl ed (P2-56
grounded) even i f TCAS i s sel ected (P1-13 grounded) and dual antenna enabl ed (P2-51
open).
Di screte I /O
P2-55 Standby di screte (gnd = i n standby)
P1-28 (-003) Automati c al ti tude sel ect (gnd = auto al t sel ect enabl ed)
P1-14 Control Al ti tude Sel ect (See Combi nati on Di scretes bel ow) (gnd = port A al ti tude data
suppl i ed on control port, port B same as open), (open = ports A and B al ti tude sel ectabl e vi a
al ti tude type sel ect di scretes, P2-41/42)
P2-53 Ai r/ground di screte (gnd = WOW)
P2-48 Reporti ng al ti tude port sel ect (gnd = port B)
P2-59 Burst tune enabl e (gnd = burst)
Note: I n Burst Tune mode the control port strappi ng (P2-57/58) i s i gnored. Burst tune
data i s accepted on ports A, B, and C as 30 ARI NC-429 words spaced over an i nterval
of 1.5 seconds wi th 500 msec dwel l ti me on each port and the dwel l ti me suspended
when data i s present. Conti nuous data i s al ways accepted i f avai l abl e.
6/ 15/ 1995 1-7
general information 523-0775653
Table1-2. Equipment Specications. (contd)
CHARACTERI STI C SPECI FI CATI ON
Di screte I /O (conti nued)
P1-15
P1-30
Cross-si de i nput (connected to opposi te TDR P1-30, gnd i nput = command to standby)
Cross-si de output (connected to opposi te TDR P1-15, gnd output = acti ve mode)
(These connecti ons are used i n dual burst-tune TDR i nstal l ati ons to ensure that onl y one
transponder i s operati ng at a ti me)
P1-31 Faul t moni tor output (28 V dc = val i d, 200 mA max)
P1-29 Suppressi on i nput/output (connected to al l other L-band equi pment)
P1-16 (-003) SPI (remote i dent) i nput
Mai ntenance speci c:
P2-38 Sel f-test i nhi bi t (gnd = i nhi bi ted) (for mai ntenance purposes onl y)
P2-54 Sel f-test di screte (gnd = sel f-test on) (for bench test/mai ntenance purposes onl y)
Combi nati on di screte
straps
P2-41, P2-42, and
P1-14
P1-14 P2-41 P2-42 Al ti tude Type Sel ected
open gnd gnd ARI NC 429 on ARI NC ports A and B
open open gnd CSDB on CSDB ports A and B
open gnd open ARI NC 575 on ARI NC ports A and B
open open open ARI NC 572 (Gi l l ham) on the Gi l l ham paral l el port
gnd gnd gnd Port A al ti tude on the sel ected control bus (ei ther ARI NC 429 or
CSDB) and port B al ti tude type ARI NC 429 on ARI NC port B.
gnd open gnd Port A al ti tude on the sel ected control bus (ei ther ARI NC 429 or
CSBB) and port B al ti tude type CSDB on CSDB port B.
gnd gnd open Port A al ti tude on the sel ected control bus (ei ther ARI NC 429 or
CSDB) and port B al ti tude type ARI NC 575 on ARI NC port B.
gnd open open Port A al ti tude on the sel ected control bus (ei ther ARI NC 429
or CSDB) and port B al ti tude type Gi l l ham on the Gi l l ham
paral l el port.
P2-43, P2-44, P2-45 Max ai rspeed programmi ng (gnd to P2-49)
P2-43 P2-44 P2-45 Deni ti on
open open open none sel ected
gnd open open 0 to 75 knots
open gnd open 75 to 150 knots
gnd gnd open 150 to 300 knots
open open gnd 300 to 600 knots
gnd open gnd 600 to 1200 knots
open gnd gnd more than 1200 knots
gnd gnd gnd (not dened)
P2-46, P2-47 SDI i nput (gnd to P2-50)
P2-46 P2-47 Deni ti on
open open (not used)
open gnd si de 1
gnd open si de 2
gnd gnd (not used)
6/ 15/ 1995 1-8
general information 523-0775653
Table1-2. Equipment Specications. (contd)
CHARACTERI STI C SPECI FI CATI ON
Di screte I /O (conti nued)
Combi nati on di screte
straps (conti nued)
P2-57, P2-58 Control port sel ect (gnd to P2-52)
P2-57 P2-58 Deni ti on
gnd open Port A sel ected
open open Port B sel ected
open gnd Port C sel ected
gnd gnd (not dened)
Table1-3. DO-160B Environmental Qualications.
CHARACTERI STI C
DO-160B
PARA NO QUALI FI CATI ON LEVEL
Temperature and Al ti tude
Low Operati ng Temp
Hi gh Operati ng Temp
Low Storage Temp
Hi gh Storage Temp
Al ti tude
4.0
4.5.1
4.5.3
4.5.1
4.5.2
4.6.1
Category F2:
-55 C (-67 F)
+70 C (+158 F)
-55 C (-67 F)
+85 C (+185 F)
Category A2: Certi ed for i nstal l ati on i n a control l ed temperature l ocati ons where
pressures are no l ower than an al ti tudes equi val ent to 4600 m
(15 000 ft) msl .
Category E1: Certi ed for i nstal l ati on i n a nonpressuri zed and noncontrol l ed tem-
perature l ocati ons i n an ai rpl ane that i s operated at al ti tudes up to 21
300 m (70 000 ft) msl .
Temperature Vari ati on 5.0 Category B: Certi ed for i nstal l ati on i n a control l ed or noncontrol l ed temperature
l ocati on i n the ai rpl ane.
Humi di ty 6.0 Category B: Certi ed for a Severe Humi di ty Envi ronment - Level I .
Shock
Operati onal
Crash Safety
7.0
7.2
7.3
Tested at 6 g peak
Tested at 15 g (11 ms durati on)
Vi brati on 8.0 Category J: Certi ed for fusel age mounti ng i n a xed wi ng turbojet or turbofan
ai rpl ane.
Category Y: Certi ed for fusel age mounti ng i n a pi ston or turbojet rotary wi ng
ai rpl ane.
Expl osi on Proofness 9.0 Category E1: Certi ed for i nstal l ati on i n a l ocati on where an expl osi ve atmosphere
may occur as a resul t of l eakage or spi l l age.
Waterproofness 10.0 Category X: No test requi red. Certi ed for i nstal l ati on i n l ocati ons not subject to
fal l i ng water (i ncl udi ng condensati on), rai n water, or sprayed water.
Fl ui ds Suscepti bi l i ty 11.0 Category X: No test requi red. Certi ed for i nstal l ati on i n l ocati ons not exposed to
ui d contami nati on from fuel , hydraul i c ui ds, oi l , sol vents, etc.
Sand and Dust 12.0 Category X: No test requi red. Certi ed for i nstal l ati on i n l ocati ons not subject to
bl owi ng sand and dust.
Fungus Resi stance 13.0 Category X: Fungus resi stance test not performed.
Sal t Spray 14.0 Category X: Sal t spray test not performed.
6/ 15/ 1995 1-9
general information 523-0775653
Tabl e 1-3. DO-160B Envi ronmental Qual i cati ons.
CHARACTERI STI C
DO-160B
PARA NO QUALI FI CATI ON LEVEL
Magneti c Effect 15.0 Category Z: Uni t causes a 1 deecti on of an uncompensated compass at a di s-
tance l ess than 0.3 m (1.0 ft).
Power I nput 16.0 Category Z: Certi ed for use on ai rpl ane el ectri cal systems not appl i cabl e to any
other category. For exampl e, a dc system from a vari abl e range
generator where a smal l capaci ty or no battery i s oati ng on the dc
bus.
Vol tage Spi ke 17.0 Category A: Certi ed for i nstal l ati on i n systems where a hi gh degree of vol tage
spi ke protecti on i s requi red.
Audi o Frequency
Suscepti bi l i ty
18.0 Category Z: Certi ed for use on ai rcraft el ectri cal systems not appl i cabl e to any
other category. For exampl e, a dc system from a vari abl e range
generator where a smal l capaci ty or no battery i s oati ng on the dc
bus.
I nduced Si gnal
Suscepti bi l i ty
19.0 Category Z: Certi ed for operati on i n systems where i nterference-free operati on i s
requi red.
RF Suscepti bi l i ty 20.0 Category Z: Certi ed for operati on i n systems where i nterference-free operati on i s
requi red.
Emi ssi on of RF Energy 21.0 Category Z: Certi ed for operati on i n systems where i nterference-free operati on i s
requi red.
Li ghtni ng 22.0 Category L: Long and short wave (750 vol ts)
Damped si nusoi dal wave (600 vol ts)
5/ 5/ 1993 1-10
general information 523-0775653
7 March 2007 1-11
Table 1-4. Equipment Required But Not Supplied.
EQUIPMENT TYPE OR DESCRIPTION QTY
**MMT-150 Mount 1/2 ATR, short, dwarf mount (CPN: 622-9672-003)
1/2 ATR, short, dwarf mount (CPN: 622-9672-004) for BA609 installations
1
**Connector Kit 60-pin, Thinline II connector, qty 2 each, (Kit CPN: 628-8661-001/002, or
628-8660-001/002 or 628-8660-003 for BA609 installations) (Refer to Pro Line II
Installation Manual, for additional details)
1-kit
**Crimp contacts **Crimp contacts For wires with:
up to 0.050 in. insulation dia (372-2514-110), or
0.050 to 0.080 in. insul dia (372-2514-180)
*105 used,
15 spares
L-band antenna Collins ANT-42, CPN: 622-6591-001, or
Collins 237Z-1, CPN: 522-2632-001; qty 1 for TDR-94, qty 2 for TDR-94D
AR
ATC Control CSDB data format:
Collins CTL-92/92A ATC Control, with Collins CTL-92T if TCAS is used,
ARINC 429 data format:
Collins RTU-870A Radio Tuning Unit, or
Collins RTU-870T TCAS/ATC Radio Tuning Unit, or
Collins TTC-920G TCAS/ATC Control, or
Gables model 816

Altitude data source Collins ADS-85 Air Data System (Refer to ADS-85 Air Data System Installation
Manual)

Air Data Link Message Processor TBA (not available at time of this publication)
Traffic Alert and Collision Avoid-
ance System
Collins TCAS-94 System (Refer to TCAS-94 Installation Manual)
*Quantity required for typical installation
**Refer to TDR-94/94D installation section in the Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System Installation Manual for additional mount and
mating connector information

Table 1-5. Related Publications
PUBLICATION ATA NUMBER
COLLINS PART
NUMBER
Collins Avionics Standard Shop Practices, Instruction Manual none 523-0768039
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder, Component Maintenance
Manual
34-50-91 523-0775997
Collins Pro Line II Comm/Nav/Pulse System, Installation Manual none 523-0772719
TCAS-94 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System, Installation
Manual
none 523-0775833
CTL-92T TCAS Control 34-40-84 523-0776595
RTU-870A/870T Radio Tuning Unit, Component Maintenance
Manual
23-80-80 523-0774068
CTL-X2/X2A Controls, Instruction Book (Repair Manual) 23-80-10 523-0772495
Collins TDR-94 Mode S Transponder, Pilots Guide none 523-0776370


general information 523-0775653
1.5 1.5 STORAGE STORAGE
The TDR-94/94D shoul d be stored i n i ts ori gi nal
packi ng materi al s and shi ppi ng contai ner. I f the
uni t i s to be stored for a l ong peri od of ti me, put
the uni t i n an ai rti ght pl asti c bag wi th suffi ci ent
desi ccant to absorb moi sture. At no ti me shoul d
the ambi ent temperature of the storage area fal l
bel ow -55 C (-67 F) or ri se above +85 C (+185
F). The rel ati ve humi di ty shoul d never exceed 95
percent. I f the uni t i s stored for an extended peri -
od of ti me, retest the uni t pri or to returni ng i t to
servi ce to ensure that possi bl e component degrada-
ti on has not affected performance.
1.6 1.6 RELA RELATED TED SER SERVICE VICE BULLETINS BULLETINS AND AND
SER SERVICE VICE INFORMA INFORMATION TION LETTERS LETTERS
Tabl e 1-6 i s a l i sti ng of the Servi ce Bul l eti ns and
Servi ce I nformti on Letters i ssued and appl i cabl e
to the TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder as of the
date of thi s manual . You wi l l noti ce that many of
these have di rect appl i cati on to uni t performance
i n the ai rpl ane. I t may be hel pful to revi ew thi s
l i sti ng whenever there i s a fai l ure report to deter-
mi ne whether a parti cul ar modi cati on may have
appl i cati on to the reported symptom. Thi s i m-
pl i es, of course, that you must determi ne the mod-
i cati on status of the uni t i n questi on.
5/ 5/ 1993 1-12
general information 523-0775653
Table1-6. Related ServiceBulletins.
SERVICE BULLETIN NUMBER, TITLE AND DESCRIPTION PUBLICATION DATE
SB 1: Convert TDR-94s and TDR-94Ds to -002status (Converts -001to -002status). The
modi cati ons i n thi s servi ce bul l eti n upgrade the TCAS i nterface performance. Thi s servi ce bul l eti n
adds al ti tude i nput vi a the control bus and i mproves the burst control i nterface.
Rev 1: May 23, 1991
SB 2: Improve Burst Tuning Interface, Self-Test Performance, and EMI Compatibility.
I nstal l ati on of thi s servi ce bul l eti n protects transmi tter power output transi stor duri ng sel f-test, corrects
burst tuni ng cross-si de standby operati on, and i mproves EMI compati bi l i ty.
Jan 18, 1991
SB 3: Prevent Corruption of Mode A/C Replies. ATC may report l oss of repl y or i ncorrect repl y
code. Several mi nutes to several hours may el apse before thi s mal functi on occurs. Once preci pi tated,
the condi ti on wi l l persi st unti l pri mary power i s cycl ed.
Jan 18, 1991
SB 4: Prevent Occasional Loss of Transponder Function. Recepti on of certai n combi nati ons of
transponder i nterrogati ons can cause the TDR-94 and TDR-94D not to repl y to subsequent i nterroga-
ti ons. Once thi s occurs power must be cycl ed to restart transponder operati on.
Mar 5, 1991
SB 5: A7U301or A7U304Replacement. I n some uni ts, when A7U301 or A7U304 are repl aced, one
or both channel s may fai l the DPSK rel ated test. Thi s servi ce bul l eti n shoul d be i nstal l ed when
repl aci ng I C A7U301 or A7U304.
Rev 1: Jun 10, 1993
SB 6: Convert TDR-94s and TDR-94Ds to -003Status (Converts -002status to -003status).
I nstal l ati on of thi s servi ce bul l eti n updates the TDR-94/94D to i ncl ude changes to the Mode S tran-
sponder requi rements by RTCA. I nstal l ati on congurati on opti ons are expanded and enhancements to
i ts di agnosti c and mai ntenance performance i s i mpl emented.
Rev 2: Sep 22, 1992
SB 7: A6U105or A6U120PROM Replacement. I f A6U105, on the -002/102 Vi deo Processor Card or
A6U120 on the -003/103 Vi deo Processor Card, requi res repl acement, the new PROM may exhi bi t
di fferent parameters whi ch affect the performance of the transponder. I f thi s servi ce i s not i nstal l ed
when changi ng A6U105 or A6U120, the transponder may not repl y to i nterrogati ons. Thi s servi ce
bul l eti n compensates for the parameter changes.
Rev 1: Sep 17, 1992
SB 8: Replacement of A7U500or A7U502. The current I C U500 (ci rcui t card assembl y A7, CPN
687-0727-002/102) or U502 (ci rcui t card assembl y A7, CPN 687-0727-001/101) has exhi bi ted some col d
start probl ems. The new U500 or U502 performs better over temperature but requi res some changes to
accommodate the new I C. Thi s servi ce bul l eti n shoul d be i nstal l ed onl y i f U500 or U502 requi res
repl acement.
Rev 1: Sep 22, 1992
SB 9: Prevent Possible Intermittent Operation. A rare combi nati on of events can cause the TDR-
94/94D to be i ntermi ttent. I f a speci c memory l ocati on i s corrupted and the uni t tri es to report a
di agnosti c, i ntermi ttent operati on can occur.
Rev 3: Apr 22, 1993
SB 10: Improve Operation of Remote Ident Input. I n ai rcraft whi ch uti l i ze the remote i dent i nput
(P1-16), the acti ve transponder may squawk i dent i f power i s removed from the i nacti ve transponder.
Oct 2, 1992
SB 11: Improve Power-On Initialization. To ensure that the TDR-94/94D powers up i n l ess than
two seconds and i ni ti al i zes the ai r/ground Mode S status to the correct reporti ng posi ti on.
Feb 5, 1993
SB 12: Add Diode Isolation to Strap Inputs. I n ai rcraft whi ch paral l el the CSDB and ARI NC 429
Control sel ect and Burst Enabl e i nputs to other systems, removal of transponder power may cause
unrequested acti vati on of the functi on i n another system.
Aug 2, 1993
SB A: Same as SB 3. Dec 11, 1990
SB B: Improve Start-Up Compatibility With The GulfstreamG-IV Gables 6969TCAS Control
Adapter. I nstal l ati ons uti l i zi ng the Gabl es 6969 TCAS control adapter may power up i n the standby
mode regardl ess of the mode the system was powered down i n.
Sep 29, 1992
SIL A-90: Connector Plate Inspection (CPN 629-8657-001/002. Some connector pl ates used wi th
the TDR-94/94D mounti ng rack may exhi bi t one or more di screpanci es. Thi s connector pl ate i s avai l abl e
i ndi vi dual l y and i s i ncl uded as part of connector ki ts, CPN 628-8660-001/002 and CPN 628-8661-
001/002. Al l connector pl ates "REV A" through "REV C" that do not have "A-90" marked on them
shoul d be i nspected and adjusted i f found di screpant. Connector pl ates "REV D" or l ater are i nspected
duri ng manufacture.
Oct 22, 1990
5/ 5/ 1993 1-13
523-0775655-103118
3rd Edition, 29 April 1991
1st Revision, 15 June 1995
TDR-94/94D
ATC/Mode S
Transponder System
Operation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
3.1 TDR-94/94D TRANSPONDER OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.1 I ntroducti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.1.2 CTL-92/92A Control , Control s and I ndi cators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.1 Operati ng I nstructi ons for I nstal l ati ons Usi ng a CTL-92/92A Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.2 Equi pment Turn On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.3 Code Sel ecti on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3.2.4 Code Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.5 Normal Operati on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2.6 Sel f-Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.6.1 CTL-92/92A ATC Control , Di agnosti c Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
NOTICE: This section replaces third edition dated 29 April 1991. Only the Title Page has changed in this revision.
List of Effective Pages
*The asteri sk i ndi cates pages changed, added, or del eted by the current change.
Page I ssue
*Ti tl e . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Jun 95
*Li st of Effecti ve pages . . . . . 15 Jun 95
3-1 thru 3-4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 90
3-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Apr 91
3-6 Bl ank . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Apr 89
Record of Revisions
RETAI N THI S RECORD I N THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEI PT OF
REVI SI ONS, I NSERT REVI SED PAGES I N THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
I NSERTED AND I NI TI ALS.
REV /
ED NO
REVI SI ON
DATE
I NSERTI ON
DATE /BY
SB NUMBER
I NCLUDED
REV /
ED NO
REVI SI ON
DATE
I NSERTI ON
DATE/BY
SB NUMBER
I NCLUDED
0/1 4 Apr 89 None
0/2 4 Apr 90 None
0/3 29 Apr 91 None
1/3 15 Jun 95 See Tabl e 1-6
IetieeJ 4 April 1990 3-1
VHFWLRQ ,,
RSHUDWLRQ
7'5' 75$16321'(5 23(5$7,1*
,16758&7,216
,QWURGXFWLRQ
Tho T!-94/94 Is nn InfogrnI nrf of fho AIr TrnffIc
ConfroI !ndnr Ioncon Sysfom. If rovIdos IdonfIfIcn-
fIon of fho frnnsondor oquIod nIrcrnff on fho ATC
ground confroIIor`s Inn osIfIon IndIcnfor. In InsfnIIn-
fIons oquIod wIfh nn nIfIfudo oncodor, fho T!-
94/94 rovIdos fho confroIIor wIfh nIrcrnff rossuro nI-
fIfudo.
Tho T!-94/94 cnn oornfo In modo S nnd rovIdo n
unIquo nIrcrnff IdonfIfIcnfIon codo ns woII ns nIr-fo-nIr
nnd nIr-fo-ground InforrognfIon roIIos. Tho unIf nIso
hns dnfn IInk cnnbIIIfy whIch nIIows If fo orform nddI-
fIonnI nIr frnffIc confroI nnd nIr sonrnfIon nssurnnco
funcfIons.
Tho T!-94/94 Is confroIIod vIn oIfhor CSI ns from
n CT!-92/92A confroI (fIguro 3-l) or A!IC 429 ns from
n comnfIbIo A!IC 429 confroI unIf. ThIs nrngrnh
doos nof rovIdo oornfIng InsfrucfIon for nn A!IC
429 confroI unIf.
In normnI modo A or modo C oornfIon, fho T!-
94/94 Is Inforrognfod by rndnr uIsos from n ground
sfnfIon nnd roIIos nufomnfIcnIIy wIfh n sorIos of uIsos.
Thoso roIy uIso grouIngs nro docodod fo suIy Idon-
fIfIcnfIon nn nIfIfudo dnfn.
In modo S oornfIon, fho unIf Is Inforrognfod by rndnr
uIsos oIfhor from n ground rndnr or from nnofhor nIr-
crnff. If roIIos fo fhoso InforrognfIons wIfh sImIInr
uIso roIy codos whIch gIvo nIfIfudo nnd nIrcrnff IdonfI-
fIcnfIon.
&7/$ &RQWURO &RQWUROV DQG ,QGLFD
WRUV
!ofor fo fIguro 3l for n vIow of fho CT!-92/92A confroIs
nnd IndIcnfors. TnbIo 3-l gIvos n doscrIfIon of onch
confroI. Inrngrnh 3.2.l gIvos fho oornfIng
rocoduros for fho CT!-92/92A.
23(5$7,1* ,16758&7,21
2SHUDWLQJ ,QVWUXFWLRQV IRU ,QVWDOODWLRQV 8V
LQJ D &7/$ &RQWURO

&DXWLRQ

Tho T!-94/94 nnd fho CT!-92/92A hnvo
boon dosIgnod fo oxhIbIf n vory hIgh dogroo of
funcfIonnI InfogrIfy. ovorfhoIoss, fho usor
musf rocognIzo fhnf If Is nof rncfIcnI fo rovIdo
monIforIng for nII concoIvnbIo sysfom fnIIuros
nnd, howovor unIIkoIy, If Is ossIbIo fhnf orro-
noous oornfIon couId occur wIfhouf n fnuIf In-
dIcnfIon. If Is fho rosonsIbIIIfy of fho IIof fo
dofocf such nn occurronco by monIforIng nIr
frnffIc confroI rosonsos fo soIocfod codos.
Tho oornfIng InsfrucfIons for sysfom usIng n CT!-
92/92A confroI nro gIvon In fho foIIowIng nrngrnhs.
(TXLSPHQW 7XUQ 2Q
Tho T!-94/94 frnnsondor nnd fho CT!-92/92A con-
froI nro furnod on oIfhor by rofnfIng fho owor nnd
modo swIfch on fho fronf of fho confroI fo fho STIY,
O, or A!T osIfIon (on fhoso confroIs fhnf hnvo fho o-
fIonnI OII osIfIon), or by furnIng on fho nvIonIcs mns-
for swIfch (for fhoso confroIs fhnf do nof hnvo nn OII
osIfIon).
Affor owor Is nIIod, fho CT!-92/92A dIsInys fho
snmo ncfIvo codo fhnf wns rosonf whon fho oquImonf
wns Insf furnod off.
&RGH 6HOHFWLRQ
Codo soIocfIon Is mndo usIng oIfhor fho codo soIocf
knobs or n romofo funIng Inuf from nnofhor sysfom
(CS, IMS, ofc). On fhoso confroIs wIfh n soIocf
swIfch, sof fho swIfch fo oIfhor numbor l or numbor 2
frnnsondor fo soIocf fho ncfIvo frnnsondor. Tho ofhor
frnnsondor romnIns In sfnndby unfII If Is soIocfod wIfh
fho soIocf swIfch.
operation 523-0775655
IetieeJ 4 April 1990 3-2
CTL-92/92A Con/rol, Con/role onJ 1nJico/ore
Iigure 3-1
operation 523-0775655
IetieeJ 4 April 1990 3-3
ToIle 3-1. CTL-92/92A Con/rol, Con/role onJ 1nJico/ore.
COT!O! O!
IICATO!
I!CTIO/ISC!IITIO
!or dIsIny wIndow Tho ATC codo (fho roIy codo of fho ncfIvo T!-94/94) nnd dIngnosfIc mossngos nro dIsInyod
In fho uor dIsIny wIndow. urIng normnI oornfIon onIy fho uor wIndow Is usod. ThIs
wIndow dIsInys fho frnnsondor codo. (Soo soIf-fosf dIsIny.)
!owor dIsIny wIndow Tho Iowor dIsIny wIndow Is normnIIy bInnk nnd Is ncfIvo onIy durIng soIf-fosf. (Soo soIf-fosf
dIsInys.)
Comnro nnnuncInfor ACT momonfnrIIy IIIumInnfos whon codos nro boIng chnngod. If ACT fInshos fho ncfunI roIy
codo Is nof IdonfIcnI fo fho codo shown In fho ncfIvo codo dIsIny.
AnnuncInfors Tho ATC confroI confnIns nn !MT (romofo) nnnuncInfor nnd n TX (frnnsmIf) nnnuncInfor.
Tho !MT nnnuncInfor mny or mny nof IIIumInnfo doondIng on fho InsfnIInfIon. If sfrnod
for IIIumInnfIon, If wIII IIIumInnfo whon nn oxfornnI swIfch (!OCA!/!IMOTI or sImIInr) Is
In fho !IMOTI osIfIon. ThIs IndIcnfos fhnf fho frnnsondor Is boIng confroIIod by nnofhor
confroI unIf (grny codo formnf, for oxnmIo). nshos wIII nonr In fho Iowor wIndow nnd nII
of fho confroIs on fho CT!-92/92A nro dIsnbIod. Tho codo dIsInyod In fho uor wIndow Is
fho curronf ncfIvo codo boIng sonf by fho romofo sourco fo fho CT!-92/92A confroI. Tho !MT
nnnuncInfor wIII nof IIIumInnfo whon fho frnnsondor Is boIng confroIIod by nn IMS or
sImIInr fIIghf mnnngomonf sysfom. An IMS sImIy confroIs fho CT!-92/92A jusf IIko fho
COI soIocf knobs do, nnd fho CT!-92/92A fhon confroIs fho frnnsondor. AII confroIs on fho
CT!-92/92A romnIn oornfIonnI whon nn IMS Is boIng usod fo confroI fho frnnsondor. Tho
TX nnnuncInfor IIIumInnfos whon fho T!-94/94 roIIos fo nn InforrognfIon.
Iowor nnd modo swIfch Tho ATC confroI owor (ofIonnI) nnd modo swIfch mny confnIn fhroo or four dofonfod osIfIons
(doondIng on fho confroI). Tho nvnIInbIo osIfIons nro STIY/O/A!T nnd OII/STIY/O/A!T.
Codo soIocf knobs Two conconfrIc knobs confroI fho ncfIvo codo dIsIny. Tho Inrgor knob chnngos fho fwo sIgnIfI-
cnnf dIgIfs, nnd fho smnIIor knob chnngos fho fwo Ionsf sIgnIfIcnnf dIgIfs. Tho Ionsf sIgnIfIcnnf
dIgIf Is Incromonfod or docromonfod for onch dofonf of fho smnIIor know If fho knob Is furnod
sIowIy. !nId rofnfIon of oIfhor knob wIII cnuso chnngos roorfIonnI fo fho rnfo of rofnfIon.
!oIIovor of fho Ionsf sIgnIfIcnnf dIgIfs wIII occur nf 0 nnd ?, nnd wIII cnuso fho mosf sIgnIfIcnnf
dIgIfs fo bo Incromonfod or docromonfod. Tho Ioff fwo dIgIfs nnd fho rIghf fwo dIgIfs nro Indo-
ondonf of onch ofhor. Tho vnrIous codos usod for normnI oornfIon nro IIsfod In fho AIrmnn`s
InformnfIon MnnunI. Codos ?600 or ??00 nro soIocfod for In-fIIghf omorgoncy oornfIon nnd wIII
bo nnnuncInfod by fho codos fInshIng In fho ncfIvo codo dIsIny for n fow soconds boforo frnns-
mIssIon bogIns (codos ?600 nnd ??00 wIII nof fInsh If fho frnnsondor Is boIng romofoIy confroIIod
by nn IMS).
I!I buffon Iush nnd hoId fho I!I buffon whIIo furnIng fho codo soIocf knobs fo soIocf n rosof codo for
sforngo. Tho rosof codo wIII bo sforod In nonvoInfIIo momory nnd cnn bo rocnIIod by momonfnr-
IIy rossIng fho I!I buffon ngnIn.
IIT buffon Tho IIT buffon cnusos fho frnnsondor fo frnnsmIf n socInI IdonfIfIcnfIon nfforn fhnf Is
dIsInyod on fho ground confroIIor`s rndnr scoo. ThIs buffon shouId bo rossod onIy whon ro-
quosfod fo squnwk Idonf by fho ground confroIIor. (Somo InsfnIInfIons uso n romofo swIfch for
IIT soIocfIon.)
TIST buffon Iross fho TIST buffon fo InIfInfo fho frnnsondor soIf-fosf roufIno. In dunI vorsIon unIfs, fho
swIfch doformInos whIch frnnsondor rosonds fo fho fosf commnnd.
operation 523-0775655
IetieeJ 4 April 1990 3-4
ToIle 3-1. CTL-92/92A Con/rol, Con/role onJ 1nJico/ore (Con/).
COT!O! O!
IICATO!
I!CTIO/ISC!IITIO
SoIf-fosf dIsIny:
SIngIo confroIs:
o fnIIuro urIng soIf-fosf, fho ncfIvo codo dIsIny InfonsIfy moduInfos from mInImum fo mnxImum. If fho
T!-94/94 Is funcfIonIng roorIy nnd nn nIfIfudo oncodor Is connocfod nnd oornfIng, A! Is
dIsInyod In fho uor wIndow nnd fho nIfIfudo In fhousnnds of foof In l00-foof Incromonfs Is
dIsInyod In fho Iowor wIndow.
InIIuro If nn ouf-of-foIornnco condIfIon Is dofocfod, fho uor wIndow shows fho word dIAC whIIo fho
Iowor wIndow shows n 2-dIgIf dIngnosfIc codo.
unI confroIs:
o fnIIuro IIfhor fho uor or Iowor wIndows wIII rosond fho snmo ns fho sIngIo unIf uor wIndow, do-
ondIng on whIch unIf Is boIng fosfod (l/2 swIfch).
InIIuro Snmo ns sIngIo unIfs.
Tho CT!-92/92A codo soIocf rnngo Is from 0000 fo
????. !ofnfIon of oIfhor codo soIocf know Incronsos or
docronsos fho codo In fho ncfIvo codo dIsIny. Tho
Inrgor, oufor knob chnngos fho fwo Ioff-hnnd dIgIfs.
Tho smnIIor, Innor knob chnngos fho fwo rIghf-hnnd
dIgIfs. Tho ACT nnnuncInfIor on fho confroI momon-
fnrIIy IIIumInnfos whIIo fho frnnsondor Is rosondIng
fo fho now codo.

1RWH

If fho ACT nnnuncInfor sfnrfs fInshIng, If In-
dIcnfos fhnf fho frnnsondor Is nof frnnsmIf-
fIng fho codo dIsInyod In fho ncfIvo codo dIs-
Iny.
Whon fho T!-94/94 Is boIng romofoIy confroIIod,
fho !MT nnnuncInfor mny or mny nof IIIumInnfo
doondIng on fho InsfnIInfIon. If wIrod, If wIII IIIumI-
nnfo whon nn oxfornnI swIfch (!OCA!/!IMOTI or
sImIInr) Is In fho !IMOTI osIfIon. ThIs IndIcnfos
fhnf fho frnnsondor Is boIng confroIIod by nnofhor
confroI unIf (dIscrofo A!IC 5?5, for oxnmIo).
nshos nonr In fho Iowor wIndow nnd nII of fho
confroIs on fho CT!-92/92A nro InoornfIvo unfII
!OCA! confroI Is rosoIocfod. Tho codo dIsInyod In
fho uor wIndow Is fho curronfIy soIocfod roIy codo
for fho T!-94/94 nnd If Is sforod In nonvoInfIIo
momory. Tho !MT nnnuncInfor wIII nof IIIumInnfo
whon fho frnnsondor Is boIng confroIIod by nn IMS
or sImIInr sysfom. An IMS sImIy confroIs fho CT!-
92/92A In fho snmo wny ns fho codo soIocf knobs do,
nnd fho CT!-92/92A confroIs fho frnnsondor. AII
confroIs on fho CT!-92/92A romnIn oornfIonnI whon
nn IMS Is confroIIIng fho frnnsondor.
&RGH 6WRUDJH
A sIngIo rosof codo cnn bo sforod In fho nonvoInfIIo
momory In fho CT!-92/92A. ThIs codo cnn bo Invokod
nf n Infor fImo. Mosf oornfors nro IIkoIy fo sforo fho
VI! codo l200. To sforo n codo In momory, ross nnd
hoId fho I!I buffon whon soIocfIng fho codo usIng fho
codo soIocf knobs. Tho rosof codo cnn bo rocnIIod
from momory nnd mndo ncfIvo by momonfnrIIy
rossIng fho I!I buffon ngnIn.
Affor n codo hns boon sforod In momory, If wIII romnIn
fhoro unfII chnngod by usIng fho I!I buffon.
Momory Is rofnInod ovon whon fho unIf Is furnod off
for nn oxfondod orIod of fImo.
1RUPDO 2SHUDWLRQ
ormnI oornfIon of fho frnnsondor InvoIvos fho foI-
IowIng rocoduros:
operation 523-0775655
IetieeJ 29 April 1991 3-/(3-6 Ilon/)
D Insuro fhnf nII nIIcnbIo cIrcuIf bronkors nro
ongngod nnd fho nvIonIcs mnsfor swIfch Is on.
E Sof fho modo swIfch fo STIY (STIY shouId bo
usod onIy durIng ground movomonf nnd whon
roquosfod by ATC).
F If fho CT!-92/92A hns n soIocf swIfch (dunI
frnnsondor InsfnIInfIons), osIfIon If fo soIocf
fho dosIrod frnnsondor.
G !so fho codo soIocf knobs fo soIocf fho dosIrod
codo.
H IosIfIon fho modo swIfch fo fho A!T or O
osIfIon jusf boforo bogInnIng fnkooff. Tho TX
nnnuncInfor IIIumInnfos onch fImo fho
frnnsondor roIIos fo nn ATC InforrognfIon.

1RWH

Tho CT!-92/92A rovIdos n 4- fo 5-socond
doIny from fho fImo n codo Is chnngod un-
fII fho now codo Is sonf fo fho frnnsondor.
ThIs gIvos fho oornfor fImo fo chock fho
codo nnd fhus rovonf frnnsmIssIon of n
nrfInIIy chnngod or Incorrocf codo. In
nddIfIon, whon omorgoncy codos ?600 nnd
??00 nro fIrsf soIocfod on fho CT!-92/92A,
fho codos fInsh for n fow soconds boforo
frnnsmIssIon bogIns. ThIs fInshIng wIII
nof occur If fho frnnsondor Is boIng con-
froIIod by n romofo sourco such ns nn
IMS. Any soIocfod codo Is ImmodInfoIy
nIIod fo fho frnnsondor whon fho
IIT buffon Is rossod.
I If roquosfod fo squnwk Idonf, ross nnd ro-
Ionso fho IIT buffon. Tho Ioffors Id n-
onr In fho Iowor wIndow for nroxImnfoIy
l5 soconds.
6HOI7HVW
IosIfIon fho modo swIfch fo O nnd sof fho swIfch
fo l. Sof fho dosIrod codo usIng fho codo soIocf
knobs. Iross fho TIST buffon on fho CT!-92/92A.
!ofor fo soIf-fosf dIsIny doscrIfIon In fnbIo 3-l.
&7/$ $7& &RQWURO 'LDJQRVWLF
&RGHV
CorfnIn dIngnosfIc codos nro dIsInyod In fho soIf-
fosf modo. If n dIngnosfIc condIfIon Is dofocfod In fho
T!-94/94 durIng soIf-fosf, fho uor wIndow dIs-
Inys fho word dIAC whIIo fho Iowor wIndow dIs-
Inys fho 2-dIgIf dIngnosfIc codo.

523-0775656-202118
2nd Edition, 4 April 1990
2nd Revision, 7 March 2007
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S
Transponder System

Theory of Operation
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
4.1 TDR-94/94D Transponder System theory of Operation...........................................................................................4-1
4.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.1.2 Physical Description .......................................................................................................................................................4-1
4.2 Purpose of Equipment ...................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.3 Background.....................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.3.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.3.2 Radar Systems ................................................................................................................................................................4-2
4.3.3 ATCRBS Interrogation Modes .......................................................................................................................................4-5
4.3.4 SSR Radiation Patterns and SLS..................................................................................................................................4-5
4.3.5 ATC Transponder 4096 Replies .....................................................................................................................................4-5
4.4 ATCRBS and Mode S .....................................................................................................................................................4-8
4.4.1 Introduction ....................................................................................................................................................................4-8
4.4.2 Mode S Interrogation Modes ........................................................................................................................................4-13
4.4.3 Mode S SSR Radiation Pattern and SLS....................................................................................................................4-14
4.4.4 Mode S Transponder Replies .......................................................................................................................................4-14
4.5 TDR-94/94D Theory of Operation..............................................................................................................................4-18
4.5.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................................4-18
4.5.2 Installation Strapping Options ....................................................................................................................................4-18
4.5.3 Typical Configurations.................................................................................................................................................4-19
4.5.4 TDR-94/94D Block Diagram Theory of Operation .....................................................................................................4-23



NOTICE: This title page replaces 1st revision, 2nd edition title page dated 15 June 1995.


Page No Issue
* Title ............................................7 Mar 07
* List of Effective Pages ...............7 Mar 07
4-1............................................... 4 Apr 90
4-2 thru 4-4 ................................ 4 Apr 89
4-5............................................... 4 Apr 90
4-6 thru 4-7 ................................ 4 Apr 89
4-8 thru 4-24 .............................. 4 Apr 90




Record of Revisions
RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF
REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV/
ED NO
REVISION
DATE
INSERTION
DATE/BY
SB NUMBER IN-
CLUDED
REV
NO
REVISION
DATE
INSERTION
DATE/BY
SB NUMBER IN-
CLUDED

0 / 1 4 Apr 89 None

0 / 2 4 Apr 90 None

1 / 2 15 Jun 95 None

2 / 2 3 Mar 07 None










List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.
Revised 4 April 1990 4-1
section IV
theory of operation
4.1 TDR-94/94D TRANSPONDER SYSTEM
THEORY OF OPERATION
4.1.1 General
The TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder is a solid-state,
airborne, air traffic control (ATC) transponder that re-
sponds to ATCRBS (air traffic control radar beacon sys-
tem) mode A and mode C interrogations and mode se-
lect (mode S) interrogations. The mode S transponder
differs from earlier ATCRBS transponders in operation
in that it is capable of discrete addressing. That is, in
mode S each transponder acquires a unique identity
and responds when interrogated according to that iden-
tity. In addition, mode S includes the capability of
sending and receiving
data link messages. Diversity-equipped mode S
transponders are also capable of receiving and trans-
mitting on two antennas. These are usually mounted
one on top and the other on the bottom of the fuselage.
This provides for more reliable air-to-air surveillance
and communications.
4.1.2 Physical Description
Figure 4-1 is a view of the TDR-94/94D Mode S
Transponder. The unit dimensions are 5 inches wide, by
3 inches high, by 14 inches long. It weighs about 7.5
pounds. All electrical connectors are at the rear of the
unit. These include two 60-pin Thinline connectors and
either one (for TDR-94) or two (for TDR-94D) antenna
connectors. The unit is normally mounted in a MMT-150
Modular Mounting Tray.
CTL-92/92A Control, Controls and Indicators
Figure 3-1
operation 523-0775656
4 April 1989 4-2
4.2 PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT
The TDR-94/94D transponder is the airborne
transponder for the ATCRBS. The TDR-94/94D pro-
vides mode A, mode C, and special identification re-
plies to ATCRBS interrogators for tracking, identifica-
tion, and altitude reporting. In addition, the TDR-
94/94D is capable of receiving and sending mode S
messages that will be required by TCAS II and TCAS
III (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System), It
also includes the data link capability necessary for air-
craft separation assurance (ASA) function.
4.3 BACKGROUND
4.3.1 Introduction
The air traffic control radar beacon system (ZTCRBS)
is a surveillance system in wide use that locates and
identifies aircraft within an airspace. However, be-
cause of increasing air traffic, this system is being ex-
panded to include additional facilities for airborne col-
lision avoidance. To gain a good understanding of
mode S transponder operation, it is necessary to un-
derstand the operation of the existing air traffic con-
trol (ATC) system.
If this is your first contact with the ATCRBS and
related equipment, this paragraph will give you
an overall description of the present ATCRBS and
then expand that understanding into the new
mode S operation.
4.3.2 Radar Systems
Refer to figure 4-2. The ATCRBS consists of a primary
surveillance radar (PSR) and a secondary surveillance
radar (SSR). The PSR can be visualized as
consisting mainly of a large rotating radar an-
tenna that can be seen at or near most air termi-
nals. This system uses conventional radar to lo-
cate all aircraft within its range in terms of range
and azimuth. It transmits a burst of energy and
then measures the time to an echo.* The direction
in which the antenna is pointing at the time the
echo is detected establishes the azimuth to the re-
flecting target. This target information is dis-
played on the air traffic controllers PPI (plan po-
sition indicator) (see figure 4-3).
4.3.3 ATCRBS Interrogation Modes
The SSR system interrogates the aircraft
transponder for aircraft identity and altitude. The
interrogations are in the form of either of two
modes: mode A for aircraft identity and mode C,
which is used to request altitude information.**
All pulses are 0.8 us wide. The interrogations
from the ground station are at a frequency of 1030
MHz. The transponder replies at a frequency of
1090 MHz. The signal received from the airborne
transponder is decoded by the round system so
that it can be displayed on the ATC radar screen
(see figure 4-3). The replies produce either a sin-
gle or double slash target display on the controller
screen. The controller can also elect to display the
aircraft identification number (as selected by the
aircrew) and the aircraft altitude.
*The time is easily converted into range. The propagation velocity of radio energy is known. The mathe-
matical formula for distance is: D = velocity x (multiplied by) time. However, radio propagation velocity is
usually expressed as 12.359 us per radar mile. Notice that this is the inverse of what is necessary for the dis-
tance formula, which must have velocity expressed as a measure of distance per unit of time (eg, miles per
hour). Therefore, the distance formula must be modified slightly: D = time / (divided by) propagation velocity.
**In the original definition of ATC modes, two other modes were defined: mode B and mode D. These also
differ only in terms of pulse spacing, with mode B pulses spaced 17 us and mode D pulses spaced 25 us. For a
time, mode D was widely used in Great Britain, but in recent years most of the aviation industry has settled
on mode A for ATCRBS operation and mode C for altitude reporting, and modes B and D have been largely
abandoned.
In US military applications, a system similar to ATCRBS is used; it is known as IFF (identification friend or
foe). As this name implies, it has to do with mission security. Three modes are defined: modes 1, 2, and 3.
Mode 3 is common to the civil mod A, with a pulse spacing of 8 us. This allows air traffic control visibility of
all aircraft, both civil and military.
operation 523-0775656
4 April 1989 4-3
ATC, PSR and SSR System
Figure 4-2
operation 523-0775656
4 April 1989 4-4
Air Traffic Presentation on the ATC Radarscope
Figure 4-3
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-5
4.3.4 SSR Radiation Patterns and SLS
Refer to figures 4-4 and 4-5. The SSR uses a ro-
tating directional antenna to transmit two pulses,
which are identified as P1 and P3. The spacing of
these pulses determines the mode. In mode a the
pulses are spaced 8 us, while in mode C the pulses
are spaced 21 us. The SSR also uses an omnidirec-
tional antenna to transmit a third pulse, desig-
nated P2. This pulse is transmitted 2 us after the
P1 pulse and provides a reference for side-lobe
suppression (sls). The amplitude of the P2 pulse is
about the same as the peak sidelobe of the direc-
tional antenna. Typically, this is about 18 dB be-
low the peak of the directional (main) beam.
Refer to figure 4-4. Notice the two aircraft on the
drawing. Aircraft A is shown as being within the
main lobe of the directional antenna. The ampli-
tude of the P1 and P3 pulses will be substantially
greater here than that of the P2 pulse radiated
from the omnidirectional antenna. Therefore, this
aircraft transponder will interpret this interroga-
tion as valid.
Aircraft B, however, is outside the main lobe and
within one of the sidelobes. The P1 and P3 pulses
detected here will be the result of side-lobe radia-
tion. Recall that the P2 pulse is transmitted by an
omnidirectional antenna and is about equal in
amplitude to that of the peak sidelobe. Therefore,
the P2 pulse detected by aircraft B will be at least
as great in amplitude as the P1, P3 pulses. The
transponder in aircraft B will detect this relation-
ship in pulses and discard the interrogation as in-
valid, because the P2 pulse is not substantially
less than the P1, P3 pulses. As a further safeguard
against replies to possible late-arriving echoes to
this invalid interrogation, the
transponder suppresses replies to all interroga-
tions for an additional 25 to 45 ms. In addition,
the receiver is desensitized for reception of P1, P3
pulses. The rationale here is that if the sidelobes
are detectable, then the main lobe must be much
greater, increasing the likelihood of echo recep-
tion.
4.3.5 ATC Transponder 4096 Replies
The ATCRBS transponder 4096 reply signal is shown
in figure 4-6. Notice that the signal can consist of
from 2 to 15 pulses (the X pulse is not used). The two
framing pulses, F1 and F2, are always present and
spaced 20.3 us. An identification pulse may be trans-
mitted 4.35 us after the last framing pulse, F2. The in-
tervening pulses, C1 through D4 on the figure, make
up the coded reply.
The coded reply consists of four digits ranging
from 0 through 7. The digits are formed by the
sum of the suffix numbers ranging from 0 through
7. The A group (A1, A2, and A4) makes up the
first digit, the B group makes up the second digit,
etc. (On the figure, a pulse outlined with a solid
line indicates that the pulse is present. A pulse
outlined with dashed lines indicates the position
for that pulse when it is present.) The pulse con-
figuration on the figure indicates a reply code of
1324. The first digit, 1, is formed y the presence of
only the A1 pulse. The second digit, 3, is formed
by the presence of B1 and B2 (1 + 2 = 3). A digit 7
is formed when all three pulses of the group are
present (1 + 2 + 4 = 7). Therefore, a reply sequence
with all pulses present constitutes a code 7777.
The X pulse is not defined in ATCRBS replies.
This combination of four digits, each ranging from
0 through 7, makes possible 4096 different codes,
which explains the reason for calling it the 4096
code.
operation 523-0775656
4 April 1989 4-6
ATCRBS, SSR Antenna Radiation Pattern
Figure 4-3
operation 523-0775656
4 April 1989 4-7
ATCRBS, Interrogator Pulse Spacing
Figure 4-5
ATCRBS and Mode S, Transponder 4096 Reply Code, Signal Format
Figure 4-6
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-8
4.4 ATCRBS AND MODE S (Refer to figure
4-7)
4.4.1 Introduction
Mode S substantially enhances the capability of the
ATCRBS by adding data link and discrete interro-
gation features. The data link capability includes
air-to-air information exchange, ground-to-air (data
uplink or comm A), air-to-ground (data downlink or
comm B), and multiple ground stations message pro-
tocol. The mode S transponder can also function as
part of an airborne separation assurance (ASA) sys-
tem when interfaced with a Traffic Alert and Colli-
sion Avoidance System (TCAS).
4.4.2 Mode S Interrogation Modes (Refer to
figures 4-8, 4-9, and 4-10)
There are eight different formats of interrogation
used in mode S. These eight formats can be summa-
rized in terms of three basic types. These are shown
in figures 4-8 and 4-9. Figure 4-10 is a summary of
all eight.
This variety of interrogation capability gives the
ground controller the flexibility of addressing only
those aircraft of immediate interest, as opposed to
processing replies from all aircraft.
All eight of the interrogation modes are summa-
rized in figure 4-10. The various fields are de-
scribed in the following paragraphs. These de-
scriptions are largely as provided in Document
RTCA/DO-181, with minor changes to clarify the
text.
a. Address/Parity (AP) Field: The 24-bit* AP
field contains the parity overlaid on the ad-
dress and appears at the end of all transmis-
sions for uplink interrogations and downlink
replies, except for downlink format (DF) num-
ber 11.
b. Acquisition Special (AQ) Field: The 1-bit AQ
field designates uplink format (UF) numbers 0
and 16 as acquisition transmissions and is re-
peated as received by the transponder in DF
numbers 0 and 16.
*In the RTCA document, some graphic material
refers to these as chips. For this description, the
terms are regarded as synonymous.
c. Designator Identification (DI) Field: The 3-bit
DI field identifies the coding contained in the
special designator (SD) field in IF numbers 4,
5, 20, and 21. The codes are defined as follows:
DI DEFINITION
0
1
2-6
7
Not used
SD contains multisite information
Not assigned
SD contains extended data readout
request
d. Interrogator Identification (II) Field: The 4-bit
II field identifies the interrogator and appears
in UF number 11 (mode S only all-call).
e. Message, Comm A (MA) Field: The 56-bit MA
field contains messages directed to the aircraft
(UF numbers 20 and 21). This field also con-
tains the 8-bit comm A definition subfield
(ADS). ADS defines the content of the MA
message field, of which it is a part.
f. Message, Comm C (MC) Field: The 80-bit MC
field contains one segment of a sequence of
segments transmitted to the transponder in
the extended length message (ELM) (112 bits)
mode. The field contains an 8-bit comm C
definition subfield (CDS) that defines the
message to be sent to the transponder and is
included in segment zero of the ELM uplink
sequence.
g. Message, Comm U (MU) Field: The 80-bit MU
field contains information used in air-to-air
message exchanges.
h. Number of C-Segment (NC) Field: The 4-bit
NC field provides the number of a segment
transmitted in an uplink ELM message and is
part of the comm C interrogation, UF number
24.
i. Protocol (PC) Field: The 3-bit PC field contains
the operating commands to the transponder.
The code description is as follow:
DI DEFINITION
0
1
2-3
4
5
6
7
No changes in transponder state
Nonselective all-call lockout
Not assigned
Cancel B
Cancel C
Cancel D
Not assigned
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-9
Mode S, PSR and SSR System
Figure 4-7
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-10
Mode S, All-Call and Discrete Addressing, Interrogation Format
Figure 4-8
Mode S, Discrete Addressing, Pulse P6 Definition
Figure 4-9
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-11
ATCRBS, SSR Antenna Radiation Pattern
Figure 4-10
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-12
j. Probability of Reply (PR) Field: The 4-bit PR
field contains commands to the transponder to
specify the reply probability to the mode S
only all-call interrogation, IF number 11. The
code description is as follows:
PR DEFINITION
0
1
2
3
4
5-7
8
9
10
11
12
13-15
Reply with probability = 1
Reply with probability = 1/2
Reply with probability =
Reply with probability = 1/8
Reply with probability = 1/16
No reply
Disregard lockout, reply with prob-
ability = 1
Disregard lockout, reply with prob-
ability =
Disregard lockout, reply with prob-
ability =
Disregard lockout, reply with prob-
ability = 1/8
Disregard lockout, reply with prob-
ability = 1/16
Do not reply
After receiving a mode S only all-call containing a
PR code other that 0 through 8, the transponder
will execute a random process and make a reply
decision for this interrogation in accordance with
the command probability. Random occurrence of
replies enables the interrogator to acquire closely
spaced aircraft that might otherwise synchro-
nously garble the transponder replies.
k. Reply Control (RC) Field: The 2-bit RC field
designates the transmitted segment as initial
(0), intermediate (1), or final (3). An RC field
(3) is used to request a comm d downlink by
the transponder. RC is part of the comm C in-
terrogation, UF number 24.
l. Reply Length (RL) Field: The 1-bit RL field
commands a reply (DFO) if the bit is 0 and a
reply in DF number 16 if the bit is 1.
m. Reply Request (RR) Field: The 5-bit RR field
describes the length and content of the infor-
mation requested (MB - see reply field de-
scriptions below ) by the interrogator. The
code description is as follow.:
RR REPLY
LENGTH MB CONTENT
0-15
16
17
18
19-31
Short
Long
Long
Long
Long
Air initiated comm B
Extended capability
Flight identification
Not assigned
If the first bit of the RR code is logic 1, then the
decimal equivalent of the last four bits designates
the requested source.
n. Special Designator (SD) Field: The 16-bit SD
field contains control codes affecting the
transponder protocol. The content is specified by
the DI field. A subfield, IIS, is contained within
the SD field and specifies the interrogator identi-
fier.
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-13
4.4.3 Mode S SSR Radiation Pattern and
SLS (Refer to figure 4-11)
The mode S interrogation is transmitted through a
technique known as binary differential phase-shift
keying (DPSK). This technique is described graphi-
cally in figure 4-9. A chip is an unmodulated interval
of 0.25 us that may be preceded by a phase reversal
(pr). If a chip is preceded by a pr, it represents a logic
1. If it is not preceded by a pr, it represents a logic 0.
In mode S, the omnidirectional antenna transmits
pulse P5 as the sls reference pulse. The P5 pulse oc-
curs within the P6 pulse and is timed 0.4 us before
the spr (sync phase reversal). Thus, if the amplitude
of P5 is sufficient to blank the spr of P6, the interro-
gation is most likely from a sidelobe and not from
the main love. In this case, the spr is hidden from
the transponder, so the reply is suppressed.
The SSR mode S interrogation pulse spacing and
identification is different from that of the earlier
ATCRBS. Figures 4-8, 4-9, and 4-10 show these con-
figurations. Notice that the rotating beam transmits
two different pulse combination. For all-call interro-
gations, the transmitted pulses are P1, P3 , and P4.
In these interrogations the sls reference pulse, P2, is
transmitted by the omnidirectional antenna as in
conventional ATCRBS. The P1-to-P3 pulse spacing is
either 8 s (for mode A) or 21 s (for mode C), also as
in ATCRBS. The P4 pulse follows the P3 pulse by 2 s
and can be either 0.8 s (the same as P1 and P3) or 1.6
s. The pulse width of P4 determines the all-call ob-
jective as follow (all times are in microseconds):
INTERROGATION TYPE PULSE SPACING
P1-P2 P1-P3 P3-P4 P4
ATCRBS Mode A
ATCRBS Mode C
ATCRBS Mode A/Mode S
all-call
ATCRBS Mode C/Mode S
all-call
ATCRBS Mode A-only
all-call
ATCRBS Mode C-only
all-call
20.15
20.15
20.15
20.15
20.15
20.15
80.2
210.2
80.2
210.2
80.2
210.2
2 0.05
2 0.05
2 0.05
2 0.05
None
None
Long
Long
Short
Short
Where P4 long pulse width is 1.6 0.1 s and P4 short pulse width is 0.8
0.1 s.
A 0.8-s pulse is only for non-mode S transpon-
ders, while the 1.6-s pulse is for both ATCRBS
and mode S transponders.
The mode S discrete addressing interrogation takes
yet another form. For this interrogation, the rotat-
ing beam antenna transmits pulses P1, P2, and P6.
P6 is in reality a series of either 56 or 112 bits identi-
fied as chips that define the data. At 1.25 s after the
start of P6, the spr occurs. This spr must be detected
in order to enable a reply response. The final chip is
followed by a 0.5-s guard interval. This prevents the
trailing edge of P6 from interfering with the de-
modulation process. The P2 pulse follows the P1
pulse by 2 s. P6 begins about 1.5 s after P2.
The ground mode S interrogator system uses a mo-
nopulse processing scheme to determine the azi-
muth bearing to the aircraft., This scheme requires
only a single reply from an airborne transponder,
as opposed to the two replies necessary in the ear-
lier ATCRBS system, to establish the azimuth to
the aircraft.* The address (derived from the reply)
and location (azimuth and range) of the mode S air-
craft is entered into a roll-call file. This file can be
visualized as a list of the mode S transponder
equipped aircraft within its assigned airspace. On a
later scan, the mode S aircraft is discretely ad-
dressed. This discrete address contains a command
field that is used to desensitize the mode S
transponder to further mode S all-call interroga-
tions. This desensitization is called mode S lockout.
The ATCRBS-only transponders are not affected by
this lockout technique and mode S transponders
continue to reply to ATCRBS interrogations.
When a mode S transponder equipped aircraft
moves from one assigned airspace into another,
the first ground interrogator can communicate
with the next interrogator and pass aircraft in-
formation to that second interrogator. This com-
munication link can be via ground lines or radio
link. If this method is used, the mode S lockout is
not disabled on the affected aircraft and the sec-
ond interrogator will schedule discrete roll-call in-
terrogations for that aircraft as needed. This
technique makes it possible to increase the air-
craft handling capacity of the ground interrogator.
*In this scheme, the monopulse system generates
two separate patterns: a single (sum) pattern and a
dual lobe (difference) pattern. The ratio of the energy
received by the sum pattern to the energy received
by the difference pattern determines the bearing of
the aircraft from the antenna beam center line.
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-14
In regions where mode S interrogators are not con-
nected via ground or radio link, the protocol for the
transponder allows it to be in mode S lockout only for
those interrogators that have the aircraft on the roll-
call list. This enables a second ground interrogator to
acquire an aircraft into its assigned airspace using the
all-call technique as previously described.
4.4.4 Mode S Transponder Replies
Typically, the ground-based interrogator tracks an
aircraft throughout its assigned airspace. The mode
S transponder equipped aircraft responds to mode S
interrogations with the ATCRBS 4096 code and the
mode S reply format. During each scan, the SSR in-
terrogations are in both mode A and mode C. The
mode S transponder reply uses a technique known as
pulse-position modulation (PPM). This is described
graphically in figure 4-12. A pulse transmitted in the
first half of the interval represents a logic 1, while a
pulse transmitted in the second half represents a
logic 0. The mode S reply format is described in the
following paragraphs.
4.4.5 Mode S Reply Description
The reply waveform is shown in figure 4-12. The re-
ply data block is formed by PPM encoding of the re-
ply data, as previously described. The first preamble
pulse occurs 128 s after the start of the P4 inter-
rogation pulse or the spr. The ATCRBS reply to an
ATCRBS interrogation is identical to the reply trans-
mitted by an non-mode S transponder (see figure 4-6).
All reply formats are summarized in figure 4-13. The
fields are described in the following paragraphs.
a. Address, Announced (AA) Field: The 24-bit AA
field contains the aircraft address (uncoded) and is
used in the all-call reply.
b. Altitude Code (AC) Field: The 13-bit AC field con-
tains the altitude code. The encoded altitude is
coded as shown in figure 4-6. The M bit has been
redefined for mode S; it was the X bit shown in
figure 4-6. In mode S the M bit may be used in the
future for encoding the altitude in metric units.
Zero is transmitted in each of the 13 bits if alti-
tude information is not available.
c. Address/Parity (AP) Field: The 24-bit AP field con-
tains the parity overlaid on the address and ap-
pears at the end of all transmissions on both
uplink and downlink, except for DF number 11.
d. Capability, Transponder (CA) Field: The 3-bit CA
field reports transponder capability. The code de-
scription is as follows:
CA DESCRIPTION
0
1
2
3
4-7
No communications capability
(surveillance only)
Comm A and comm B capability
Comm A, comm B, and downlink ELM ca-
pability
Comm A, comm B, uplink ELM, and
downlink ELM capability
Not assigned
If the transponder CA code is 1, 2, or 3, the data
link capability report is used to indicate the spe-
cific data link capabilities of the overall airborne
installation.
e. Downlink Request (DR) Field: The 5-bit DR
field is used to request extraction of downlink
messages from the transponder by the inter-
rogator. The code description is as follow:
DR DESCRIPTION
0
1
2-15
16-31
No downlink request
Request to send comm B message
Not assigned
Request permission to send extended
length message (ELMs) of n-segments.
The code inserted into the DR field corre-
sponds to 15 + n. Downlink ELMs are
transmitted only after authorization by
the interrogator. The segments are
transmitted on comm D replies. On receipt
of the authorization, the transponder
sends a segment every 136 Ts. After re-
ceipt of all segments, the interrogator re-
plies with a closeout transmission to indi-
cate that all segments have been received
and allow the DR field to be reset. The
closeout transmission is contained in a
surveillance or comm A interrogation.
f. Flight Status (FS) Field: The 3-bit FS field
reports the flight status of the aircraft. The
code description is as follows:
FS ALERT SPI
AIRBORNE/ON
THE GROUND
0
1
2
3
4
5
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Airborne
On the ground
Airborne
On the ground
Either
Either
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-15
g. Identification (ID) Field: The 13-bit ID field
contains the 4096 identification code as se-
lected by the pilot.
h. ELM Control (KE) Field: The 1-bit KE field
defines the content of the ND and MD fields in
comm D replies. The transponder acknowl-
edges receipt of a final segment with a comm
D transmission with KE = 1. The MD field
contains a transmission acknowledgement
subfield (TAS). The information contained in
the TAS subfield is continuously updated as
segments are received and is cleared when a
closeout occurs or a new initializing segment
is received.
i. Message Comm B (MF) Field: The 56-bit MD
field contains the message transmitted to the
interrogator. The field contains an 8-bit sub-
field (BDS) that defines the contents of the
comm B message.
j. Message Comm D (MD) Field: The 80-bit MD
field contains one segment of a sequence of
segments transmitted by the transponder in
the ELM mode. It also may contain a sum-
mary of the received MC segments of an
uplink ELM. An 8-bit subfield (DDS) defines
the message to be transmitted and is included
in segment 0 of the ELM downlink.
k. Message Comm V (MV) Field: The 56-bit MV
field contains information used in the air-to-
air exchanges between mode S transponders.
l. Number of D-Segment (ND) Field: The 4-bit
ND field provides the number of the segment
transmitted in a downlink ELM and is part of
the comm D reply.
m. Parity/Interrogator Identity (PI) Field: The 24-
bit PI field contains the parity overlaid on the
interrogator identity code.
n. Reply Information (RI) Field: The 4-bit RI
field reports the airspeed capability and type
of reply to the interrogating aircraft. The code
description is as follows:
RI DESCRIPTION
0-7
8-15
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Indicates that downlink is the reply to an
air-to-air acquisition interrogation
Indicates that downlink is an acquisition
reply as follows:
No maximum airspeed data is available
Airspeed is up to 75 knots
Airspeed is between 75 and 150 knots
Airspeed is between 150 and 300 knots
Airspeed is between 300 and 600 knots
Airspeed is between 600 and 1200 knots
Airspeed is more than 1200 knots
Not assigned
o. Utility Message (UM) Field: The 6-bit UM
field contains transponder status readouts.
p. Vertical Status (VS) Field: The 1-bit VS field
indicates that the aircraft is airborne (VS = 0)
or on the ground (VS = 1).
q. Free and Unassigned Coding Space Fields:
Free coding space contains all logic level 0, as
transmitted by the interrogator or transpon-
der. Unassigned coding space that exists
within fields is reserved for possible future
use.
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-16
Mode S, SSR Antenna Radiation Pattern
Figure 4-11
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-17
Mode S, Transponder Reply Code Pulse Spacing
Figure 4-12
Mode S, Transponder Reply Code Summary
Figure 4-13
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-18
4.5 TDR-94/94D THEORY OF OPERATION
4.5.1 Introduction
This paragraph gives you an overview of the TDR-
94/94D operating environment. If you are familiar
with the various installation configurations and
options, you can skip over this paragraph.
4.5.2 Installation Strapping Options
The TDR-94 and TDR-94D ATC/Mode S
Transponders offer a wide range of installation
options. First you should recognize the difference
between the TDR-94 and the TDR-94D; the TDR-
94 is for single
antenna installations, while the TDR-94D is for
antenna diversity (dual antenna) installations.
You are likely to find the TDR-94D in most TCAS
installations because dual antennas are required
in TCAS. Both transponders can accept control
data in CSDB or ARINC 429 format; this is set at
installation by means of special external straps.
The following paragraphs and accompanying dia-
grams describe the various installation configura-
tions. Figure 4-14 shows the various strapping op-
tions that must be considered for all installations.
You should understand that these strapping op-
tions can apply to all installations.
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder
Strapping Options
Figure 4-14
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-19
4.5.3 Typical Configurations
Figure 4-15 shows a TDR-94 installation with a
CTL-92/92A CSDB transponder control unit and
an encoding altimeter. This type of encoder typi-
cally supplies altitude data in Gillham code
(ARINC 572)
format. The encoded data can be supplied to the
CTL-92/92A or directly to the TDR-4. Installers
should choose the connection that involves the
shortest wire run.
TDR-94 ATC/Mode S Transponder With
CTL-92/92A Transponder Control
Unit and Altitude Encoder,
Typical
Figure 4-14
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-20
Figure 4-16 shows a similar installation except it
uses a central air data computer (CADC) for alti-
tude data. In each of these cases, external strap-
ping is required according to the type of altitude
data that is being used. An alternate Installation
configuration is
possible using ARINC 429 code selection. In this
case, an ARINC 429 source, such as an FMS,
would be shown in place of the CTL-92/92A, with
appropriate strapping as shown in figure 4-14.
TDR-94 ATC/Mode S Transponder With
CTL-92/92A Transponder Control Unit
and CADC Altitude Source,
Typical Installation Diagram
Figure 4-16
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-21
Figure 4-17 shows a TDR-94D in a TCAS installa-
tion with a CSDB control and dual antennas. If
the transponder is operated with only a single an-
tenna, a special strap is required. The diagram
also shows a CADC for altitude data. This can be
an encoder as shown in figure 4-15. Either way,
appropriate
strapping is required. The CTL-92T is required for
TCAS control and is connected between the TDR-
94D and CTL-92/92A. In this installation,
transponder control data is entered on the CTL-
92/92A and the TCAS control data is added to the
data word in the CTL-92T.
TDR-94D ATC/Mode S Transponder, Data Link, and TCAS Installation
With CSDB Control and CADC Altitude Data Source,
Typical Installation Diagram
Figure 4-17
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-22
Figure 4-18 shows an installation similar to that
of figure 4-17. This can be seen as a typical TCAS
and
data link installation using an ARINC 429 control
for code selection and transponder/TCAS control.
TDR-94D ATC/Mode S Transponder, Data Link, and TCAS Installation
With ARINC 429 Transponder Control and
CADC Altitude Data Source,
Typical Installation Diagram
Figure 4-18
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-23
4.5.4 TDR-94/94D Block Diagram Theory of
Operation
4.5.4.1 Introduction
The TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder is the
airborne portion of the SSR system. It is capable
of operating with ATCRBS and mode S interroga-
tors. The TDR-94D can operate with two antennas
for improved air-to-air surveillance. This capabil-
ity is required in TCAS installations. The TDR-
94/94D also provides data link message capability.
4.5.4.2 Overall Functional Block Diagram
Theory of Operation (Refer to figure 4-19)
The TDR-94/94D consists of seven major subas-
semblies numbered A1 through A7. These are de-
scribed in the following paragraphs.
The transponder interrogations and uplink mes-
sages are received by either one or both of the an-
tennas. This received signal is routed through the
receive signal detector in module A2 to the IF am-
plifier in module A7. If the transponder is a diver-
sity (dual antenna) unit, the IF amplifier operates
on both the top and bottom signals independently.
The IF amplifier ensures that the interrogation is
a valid signal and processses that signal into the
level required by the video processor in module 6.
Module A7 also contains the DPSK detector,
which detects the presence of a differential phase
reversal in a mode S interrogation.
The video processor evaluates the video data from
the IF amplifier to determine whether the inter-
rogation is an ATCRBS or mode S interrogation.
The
processor also determines whether a response is
appropriate. Depending on certain criteria, the
processor also determines which antenna should
be used for reply, top or bottom. This data is sup-
plied to modulator A3, where the proper diode
drive signals are generated. These diode drive
signals control the diversity switch in module A2.
The video processor also supplied the proper reply
data to the modulator. The modulator controls the
bracket drive signals which drive the power am-
plifer. The response pulse train is formed in the
power amplifier. This pulse train is switched
through the diversity switch and low-pass filter
and is radiated by the appropriately selected an-
tenna.
The CPU and I/O module contains most of the cir-
cuits involved in the digital input and output sig-
nals. The discrete inputs include a number of
strapping options, like TCAS select and control
format select (CSDB or ARINC 429). The digital
inputs include altitude and communications data.
The digital outputs include communication, TCAS,
and altitude data. A few of the discrete inputs,
like TCAS select, the altitude digitizer inputs, and
the mode S identification strapping inputs, enter
the unit on the A6 module.
The synthesizer generates the 1090-MHz CW sig-
nal that is used to drive the power amplifier. The
modulator effectively switches the power amplifier
on and off to create the output pulse train that be-
comes the reply or downlink transmission. The di-
versity switch directs the power amplifier output
to the top or bottom antenna. The modulator con-
trols the diversity switch in response to control
signals from the video processor.
operation 523-0775656
Revised 4 April 1990 4-24
TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder
Overall Block Diagram
Figure 4-19

523-0775657-105118
5th Edition, 15 June 1995
1st Revision, 7 March 2007
TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S
Transponder System

Maintenance
Table of Contents
Paragraph Page
5.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................................................5-1
5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE ......................................................................................................................................5-1
5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER REQUIREMENTS.............................................................................................5-1
5.4 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING......................................................................................................................5-1
5.5 MAINTENANCE DIANOSTIC DATA TREIEVAL AND ANALYSIS..................................................................5-132
5.6 NUMBER SYSTEM CONVERSION AND DATA WORD DESCRIPTIONS.......................................................5-148
5.7 GILLHAM CODE DESCRIPTION WITH ENCODING AND DECODING INSTRUCTIONS........................5-155
5.8 ACCEPTANCE TEST, TEST PANEL ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS................................................................5-158
5.9 FLIGHTLINE TEST, TEST PANEL ASSEMBLY INSTRUCTIONS..................................................................5-175

NOTICE: This section replaces 5th edition dated 15 June 1995.


Page No Issue
* Title ............................................7 Mar 07
* List of Effective Pages ...............7 Mar 07
5-1 thru 5-6 ............................... 5 May 93
5-7 thru 5-9 .............................. 15 Jun 95
5-10 thru 5-36............................ 5 May 93
5-37 thru 5-38........................... 15 Jun 95
5-39 thru 5-42............................ 5 May 93
5-43 thru 5-131........................... 5 Jun 95
5-132 thru 5-152........................ 5 May 93
5-153 thry 5-154....................... 15 Jun 95
5-154.1 Added........................... 15 Jun 95
5-154.2 Added Blank................ 15 Jun 95
5-155.......................................... 5 May 93
5-156 thru 157......................... 15 Jun 95
5-158 thru 5-163........................ 5 May 93
5-164 thru 5-168....................... 15 Jun 95
5-170 thru 5-197........................ 5 May 93
5-198 Blank............................... 5 May 93
5-199 thru 5-201 Deleted.......... 5 May 93












Record of Revisions
RETAIN THIS RECORD IN THE FRONT OF THE MANUAL. ON RECEIPT OF
REVISIONS, INSERT REVISED PAGES IN THE MANUAL, AND ENTER DATE
INSERTED AND INITIALS.

REV/
ED NO
REVISION
DATE
INSERTION
DATE/BY
SB NUMBER IN-
CLUDED
REV
NO
REVISION
DATE
INSERTION
DATE/BY
SB NUMBER IN-
CLUDED

0 / 1 4 Apr 90 None

0 / 2 29 Apr 91 None

0 / 3 6 Jan 92 None

0 / 4 5 May 93 See Table 1-6

0 / 5 15 Jun 95 See Table 1-6

1 / 5 7 Mar 07 See Table 1-6






List of Effective Pages *The asterisk indicates pages changed, added, or deleted by the current change.
section V
maintenance
5.1 GENERAL
Thi s secti on provi des on board mai ntenance proce-
dures and l i mi ted bench checkout procedures for
the TDR-94/94D ATC/Mode S Transponder. The
test procedures are for use i n:
a. Checki ng a transponder system on the bench
before i nstal l ati on to ensure that i t i s functi on-
i ng properl y, or
b. Exerci si ng the transponder system on board
the ai rpl ane through a systemati c routi ne for
faul t i sol ati on to a defecti ve LRU.
The bench procedures use a speci al test panel
descri bed i n paragraph 5.9. The Fl i ghtl i ne Faul t
I sol ati on procedures use a si mi l ar, but l ess com-
pl ex, test panel whi ch i s descri bed i n paragraph
5.9. I n both cases, data i s provi ded to al l ow l ocal
fabri cati on, or purchase from a suppl i er such as
Avi oni cs Speci al i sts I nc, or JcAI R.
Faul t i sol ati on procedures shoul d i ncl ude a check
of the ai rpl ane i nstal l ati on and wi ri ng wi th speci al
attenti on to condi ti ons that can contri bute to a
fai l ure of the transponder system.
On board ai rpl ane faul t i sol ati on most often as-
sumes that a sel f-test can be performed. A system
that i s total l y non-responsi ve i s usual l y best eval -
uated on the bench.
The TDR-94/94D performs a ful l sel f-test automat-
i cal l y upon uni t power-up. I t then performs exten-
si ve background testi ng to veri fy bus status and
the condi ti on of cri ti cal functi ons for di agnosti c
purposes. Use the TEST button on the control
head to i ni ti ate a sel f-test.
5.2 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Col l i ns has no requi rement for peri odi c mai nte-
nance of the TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder.
5.3 TEST EQUIPMENT AND POWER
REQUIREMENTS
5.3.1 Test Equi pment
Tabl e 5-1 l i sts the test equi pment requi red to per-
form the test procedures found i n thi s secti on.
Equi val ent test equi pment can be substi tuted i n
pl ace of the l i sted i tems.
5.3.2 Power Requi rements
Al l power requi red to perform the i ghtl i ne sys-
tem tests and LRU faul t i sol ati on procedures i s
provi ded by the ai rpl ane i n whi ch the system i s
i nstal l ed.
A bench 28-V dc suppl y, wi th at l east 5-A peak
current output, i s needed for the bench procedure.
5.4 TESTING AND TROUBLESHOOTING
Note
The fol l owi ng test procedures assume that
the ai rpl ane i nterconnect wi ri ng has been
veri ed and i s correct.
Test procedures i n tabl e 5-2 provi de an operati on-
al test of the TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder. I f
any of these tests fai l , or i f there i s reason to sus-
pect a fai l ure, then the Faul t I sol ati on Procedures
i n Tabl e 5-5 and can be used to hel p i sol ate a de-
fecti ve uni t.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-1
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-1. Test Equipment Required.
EQUI PMENT MANUFACTURER CHARACTERI STI C FUNCTI ON
Fl uke 8010A, Dvm John Fl uke Mfg. Co., I nc.
Sui te 113
1380 Corporate Center Curve
Eagan, MN 55121-1200
(612) 452-4264
Portabl e, 3-1/2 di gi t accu-
racy
Measure ac and dc vol tages; for
use on ramp for wi ri ng checkout
and wi th Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel or
on bench for Acceptance Testi ng
Tektroni x 455, 2235,
2236, Osci l l oscope
Tektroni x
5350 Keystone Court
Rol l i ng Meadows, I L 60008
(708) 259-7580
Portabl e, dc to 10 MHz Measure seri al l ogi c l evel s; for
use wi th Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel or
on bench for Acceptance Testi ng
ATC-601 Ramp Test Set I FR. I nc.,
4053 Navajo Lane
Wi chi ta, KS 67210
(316) 522-4981
Portabl e ATCRBS tran-
sponder Ramp Test Set.
Capabl e of broadcast and
di rect-connecti on testi ng
of normal transponder
operati on i n modes A, C,
and Mode S, as wel l as al l
dened and appl i cabl e
upl i nk /downl i nk for-
mats.
For ATCRBS and Mode S ground
stati on si mul ati on i n i ghtl i ne or
bench testi ng procedures.
RF l oad M/A-COM Omni Spectra, I nc.
21 Conti nental Bl vd
Merri mac, NH 03054-9979
50- at 1090 MHz TNC
or BNC wi th adapter
RF termi nati on of unused anten-
na output (TDR-94D onl y). Need-
ed on i ghtl i ne onl y when usi ng
di recti on connecti on method.
Di versi ty Boot Local l y fabri cated (i ncl uded
wi th ATC-601)
Rf opaque for di versi ty
testi ng. I deal l y, i t shoul d
have an adhesi ve base.
To i sol ate antenna ports for broa-
dcast di versi ty testi ng on the
i ghtl i ne.
DataTrac 400H *
DataTrac 400 *
DataTrac 200 **
Atl anti c I nstruments, I nc.
P.O. Box 021466
Mel bourne, FL 32902
(407) 951-2542
Portabl e, battery opera-
bl e,
*ARI NC 429 bus si mul a-
ti on and anal ysi s,
** ARI NC 429 and CSDB
bus si mul ati on and anal y-
si s
Control head si mul ati on and data
bus anal ysi s; for use on ramp
wi th Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel or on
bench for Acceptance Testi ng
JcAI R 429E JcAI R
400 I ndustri al Parkway
I ndustri al Ai rport, KS 66031
(913) 764-2452
ARI NC 429 bus si mul a-
ti on and anal ysi s
Control head si mul ati on and data
bus anal ysi s; for use on ramp
wi th Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel or on
bench for Acceptance Testi ng
Acceptance Test, Test
Panel
Local l y fabri cated accordi ng to
data i n paragraph 5.8 at the
end of thi s secti on. Thi s para-
graph al so l i sts the vari ous
cabl es needed.
Bench test panel To provi de i nput/output control
and uni t/test equi pment i nterface
for bench testi ng.
Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel Local l y fabri cated accordi ng to
data i n paragraph 5.9 at the
end of thi s secti on. Thi s para-
graph al so l i sts the vari ous
cabl es needed.
Portabl e test devi ce To provi de access to si gnal s be-
tween control and transponder
uni t
5/ 5/ 1993 5-2
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.1 Di agnosti c I nformati on
The procedures i n tabl e 5-6 provi de for the retri ev-
al of di agnosti c data that i s stored i n non-vol ati l e
memory i n the TRD-94/94D transponder. Thi s
data can be hel pful i n di agnosi ng certai n type of
fai l ures especi al l y those of a more transi ent na-
ture. Refer to tabl e 5-3 for a descri pti on of the
di agnosti c codes and the recommended troubl e-
shooti ng procedure. Tabl e 5-4 provi des addi ti onal
i nformati on for proper i nterpretati on of the di ag-
nosti c codes.
5.4.2 Test Equi pment I nstal l ati on and Power
Appl i cati on For Fl i ghtl i ne Testi ng Usi ng A
Ramp Tester
5.4.2.1 Prel i mi nary I nstructi ons
Refer to tabl e 5-2 for the transponder system i g-
htl i ne testi ng and faul t i sol ati on procedures. These
procedures use the test setup shown i n gure 5-1
and provi de for a qui ck i ni ti al check to determi ne
whether or not the transponder system i s functi on-
al . I f thi s check shows that a faul t exi sts, refer to
the procedures i n tabl e 5-5 for more detai l ed faul t
i sol ati on. A test panel and data bus reader are
needed for these procedures.
5.4.2.2 Bus Reader Sel ecti on
Any one of the four bus readers l i sted i n tabl e 5-1
can be used. However, of those l i sted onl y the
Atl anti c I nstruments DataTrac 200 i s capabl e of
recei vi ng and transmi tti ng ei ther the CSDB or the
ARI NC 429 bus format. The others are ARI NC
429 onl y. Therefore, i f the i nstal l ati on i ncl udes a
CTL-92/92A control , onl y the DataTrac 200 can be
used to si mul ate that control .
5.4.2.3 Ramp Tester Sel ecti on and Use
The I FR ATC-601 was used i n the devel opment of
the procedures i n thi s manual . I t i s possi bl e that
other i nstruments, i .e., i nstruments provi ded by
other manuafacturers, have comparabl y and ac-
ceptabl e features. You shoul d feel free to use your
choi ce of i nstruments. However, be sure that i t i s
capabl e of testi ng the transponder operati ng i tems
l i sted at the end of thi s paragraph.
Most transponder ramp testers can be used i n
di rect-connect or broadcast operati ng modes. At
ti mes both methods are useful i n i sol ati ng a tran-
sponder mal functi on between the antenna /anten-
na cabl es and the transponder uni t. For exampl e,
i f i n the broadcast method the test shows a l ow
power output or l ow sensi ti vi ty. Swi tchi ng to the
di rect-connecti on method can effecti vel y i sol ate the
probl em to the transmi tter/recei ver or the anten-
na system.
I f you use the di rect connecti on method and you
are usi ng a test set other than the I FR ATC-601,
be sure i t has the proper attenuati on i n the RF
l i nk to prevent damage to the transponder recei v-
er. The I FR ATC-601 has the proper attenuati on
bui l t i nto i ts rf port. I f another type of tester i s
bei ng used, check the manual to be sure i t pro-
vi des adequate protecti on. Be sure that the i nject-
ed si gnal l evel i s not greater than -20 dBm.
Most transponder ramp test sets al l ow operati on
i nsi de a hanger. Be aware, however, that the
gl ossy (and often pai nted) oor surfaces found i n
most hangers can resul t i n substanti al si gnal re-
ecti on. Thi s can have an effect on power output
and recei ver sensi ti vi ty tests. Movi ng the sense
antenna above or bel ow the transponder antenna
usual l y produces di fferent resul ts and demonstrat-
es the effect of si gnal reecti on. I t i s for thi s rea-
son that you shoul d try a few di fferent sense an-
tenna hei ghts, di stances, and ai rpl ane parki ng
l ocati ons to gai n a basi s for test resul t i nterpreta-
ti on and eval uati on. Be gui ded by the antenna
pl acement requi rements of the test set manufac-
turer.
Locate the ramp tester sense antenna at the prop-
er di stance from the ai rpl ane transponder anten-
na. The best di stance and hei ght may be speci ed
by the manufacturer.
Mode s di versi ty transponder i nstal l ati ons may
requi re shi el di ng of one antenna for di versi ty test-
i ng. An RF opaque boot of nearl y any desi gn i s
acceptabl e for thi s purpose. I t shoul d t compl ete-
l y over the antenna and provi de good base ground-
i ng. An adhesi ve base may be best for easy i nstal -
l ati on and removal .
5/ 5/ 1993 5-3
maintenance 523-0775657
The I FR ATC-601 features a speci al automati c test
sequence that si gni cantl y reduces the ti me re-
qui red for the test. Usi ng the automati c sequence
or an equi val ent manual sequence i s l argel y a
matter of personal choi ce. However, i f a parti c-
ul ar test fai l s i n the automati c sequence, i t mi ght
be advi sabl e to repeat that test manual l y to hel p
i n i sol ati ng the faul t. Fol l ow the test set operat-
i ng procedures as provi ded.
At l east the fol l owi ng transponder operati ng i tems
shoul d be tested. The order i s not cri ti cal .:
1. Mode A response.
2. Mode C response wi th al ti tude i f avai l abl e.
3. Mode S al l -cal l response,
4. Mode S l ockout.
5. Transmi tter frequency.
6. Transponder power output.
7. Recei ver frequency di scri mi nati on.
8. Recei ver sensi ti vi ty.
9. Recei ver i nterrogati on pul se spaci ng di scri mi -
nati on (al l modes). Thi s i nvol ves al teri ng the
pul se spaci ng from normal and testi ng the
transponder s repl y or l ack of repl y.
10. I ndi vi dual pul se-wi dth di scri mi nati on (al l
modes). Thi s i s the same type of test as 9.
except that the pul se wi dth i s changed i nstead
of the pul se spaci ng.
11. SLS (si de l obe suppressi on). Thi s i nvol ves
changi ng the P2 pul se ampl i tude wi th respect
to the P1/P3 pul ses and testi ng the transpond-
er s response.
12. Transponder response to i nval i d address i nter-
rogati ons.
13. SPR on/off.
14. Mode S, UF0 (upl i nk format 0).
15. Mode S, UF4.
16. Mode S, UF5.
17. Mode S, UF11.
18. Mode S, UF16.
19. Mode S, UF20.
20. Mode S, UF21.
21. Di versi ty i sol ati on (TDR-94D, operati ng wi th
dual antennas onl y).
22. Transponder squi tter.
23. Ai rpl ane i denti cati on code.
5.4.2.4 Transponder System I nspecti on
I f the nature of the transponder fai l ure report i s
such that i t may be caused by antenna cabl es or
antennas, i nspect these for possi bl e physi cal dam-
age or deteri orated i nstal l ati on i ntegri ty.
The condi ti on of the transponder antenna, anten-
na cabl e(s), and cabl e connectors can have a si gni f-
i cant effect on transponder operati on. Therefore,
an occasi onal vi sual i nspecti on of these compo-
nents i s advi sabl e. However, do not di sassembl e
the ai rpl ane to i nspect antenna cabl es unl ess you
have good reason to suspect a cabl e or connector
probl em.
5.4.2.5 Transponder System Ground Test En-
abl e
Some transponder i nstal l ati ons use a wei ght-on-
wheel s transponder i nhi bi t mechani sm to prevent
response to i nterrogati ons whi l e the ai rpl ane i s on
the ground. I t i s necessary to di sabl e thi s i nhi bi t
feature for testi ng. Thi s i s uni que to each ai r-
pl ane therefore you must consul t the ai rpl ane
manual for the necessary i nstructi ons.
I t may al so be necessary to condi ti on the al ti tude
data system for test purposes.
5.4.3 Fl i ghtl i ne Test Procedures
Transponder system testi ng procedures, for use on
the i ghtl i ne, are shown i n tabl e 5-2. These pro-
cedures wi l l veri fy that the system i s functi onal .
I f a fai l ure i s detected or suspected because of
pi l ot compl ai nt or other evi dence, the faul t i sol a-
ti on procedures i n tabl e 5-5 provi de more detai l ed
testi ng and LRU performance anal ysi s.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-4
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-2. Transponder System, FlightlineTest Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
1. Setup: Prepare the ai rpl ane and transponder system for testi ng as requi red. As a mi ni -
mum thi s wi l l requi re:
Be sure that the ai r/ground test i nhi bi t, i f used, i s functi onal . P2-53 must be
grounded to al l ow a manual sel f-test.
Set al ti meter system(s) for a test al ti tude (consul t ai rpl ane manual for neces-
sary procedures) especi al l y as may be requi red for TCAS i f used.
Setup I FR ATC-601 Ramp Tester and perform the necessary prel i mi nary tests
for i t.
I f the broadcast method of testi ng wi l l be used wi th the ATC-601 (or equi va-
l ent) ramp tester and the i nstal l ati on consi sts of a TDR-94D di versi ty tran-
sponder i nstal l an rf boot over the top antenna. I f the di rect connecti on i s
bei ng used, di sconnect both antenna cabl es from the transponder mount,
connect the ATC-601 to the l ower antenna connector and i nstal l an rf l oad on
the upper connector.
Note: I f the transponder i nstal l ati on makes the di rect connecti on method qui te
di ffi cul t, the broadcast method shoul d be seen as preferred unl ess i ni ti al tests
suggest an advantage i n favor of di rect connecti on.
2.0 I nspecti on: Before appl yi ng power to the transponder system, make a vi sual i nspecti on of the
transponder antenna(s), ATC control , and the r/t. Be sure the r/t i s rml y seated
i n i ts mount and there are no obvi ous si gns of a dysfuncti onal i nstal l ati on. I f i t i s
possi bl e, check the antenna cabl e connecti ons on the back of the transponder for
ti ghtness and the wi re harness for obvi ous si gns of broken wi res or di sl odged
connector pi ns.
3.0 Power appl i cati on:
Appl y power to the tran-
sponder system. Enter an
appropri ate code i nto the
control and set for normal
operati on.
Normal operati on:
I n the case of the I FR ATC-601, the
I NTERR and REPLY i ndi cators shoul d
both be l i t.
I f the i nstal l ati on i s equi pped wi th a
CTL-92/92A -2XX control , "di AG" may
be di spl ayed i n the l ower wi ndow i f a
di agnosti c i s detected. I t i s necessary,
then, to press TEST to di spl ay the
di agnosti c code.
I f the broadcast method of testi ng i s
bei ng used wi th the ATC-601, avoi d use
of an emergency i dent code (consul t the
ai rpl ane manual i f you are unsure).
I f the I NTERR l amp does not l i ght, the
ramp tester i s not functi oni ng properl y.
I f the REPLY l amp does not l i ght, the
transponder i s not respondi ng. Check
for possi bl e ground operati on i nhi bi ts.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-5-5
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-2. Transponder System, FlightlineTest Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
4.0 Sel f Test:
Press the ATC TEST button
on the ATC control .
Note: The i nstal l ati on may
feature a remote ATC TEST
button i n whi ch case use i t
i nstead.
I f the i nstal l ati on uses an ATC control
head other than the CTL-92/92A or
RTU-870A/T, you may need to consul t
the ai rpl ane manual to determi ne
where the ATC sel f test resul ts are
di spl ayed and i n what format any di ag-
nosti cs are di scl osed.
Test resul ts shoul d not show any di ag-
nosti c other than 00 (no faul ts detect-
ed). I n the case of the CTL-92/92A , the
di agnosti cs are di spl ayed on the control .
See tabl e 5-3 for an i nterpretati on of the
di agnosti c code.
A normal i ndi cati on on the CTL-92/92A i s:
The acti ve code di spl ay i ntensi ty modul ates from mi ni mum to maxi mum.
On al l CTL-92/92A control s:
"AL" i s di spl ayed i n the upper wi ndow and the al ti tude i n thousands of feet
i n 100-foot i ncrements i s di spl ayed i n the l ower wi ndow.
I f a di agnosti c condi ti on i s detected, the upper wi ndow shows "dI AG" and the
two-di gi t di agnosti c code i s di spl ayed i n the l ower wi ndow. Refer to tabl e 5-3
for a l i sti ng of the codes, and tabl e 5-4 for an i nterpretati on and expl anati on
of each.
5.0 Auto Test:
Sel ect AUTO TEST on the
I FR ATC-601 and press
RUN.
Al l AUTO TEST i tems shoul d i ndi cate
PASSED. Thi s test takes about 30 sec-
onds to compl ete.
Note: I t i s possi bl e that tests 13, 14,
and 15 i ndi cate FAI LED. These i tems
are a functi on of datal i nk capabi l i ti es
and may not be i mpl emented i n whi ch
case you can i gnore thi s fai l ure i ndi ca-
ti on.
Successful compl eti on of tests veri fyi ng
these i tems, and no other i ndi cati on of
fai l ure (l i ke pi l ot or ATC compl ai nts),
i ndi cates a functi onal transponder.
Otherwi se, a fai l ure of any one or more
of the i tems, may i ndi cate a performance
probl em. I n thi s case, consi der removi ng
the transponder for addi ti onal anal ysi s
and repai r on the bench.
6.0 Opposi te antenna test:
I f the di rect connecti on met-
hod i s bei ng used, swi tch the
test set cabl e to the other
antenna port. I f the broad-
cast method i s bei ng used,
move the rf boot to the top
(or opposi te) antenna con-
nector and repeat the test.
The test resul ts shoul d be approxi mate-
l y equi val ent between the two antenna
test.
I f there i s a substanti al di fference i n
recei ver sensi ti vi ty and/or power output,
i t may be caused by a faul ty antenna,
antenna cabl e, or connector i nstal l ati on.
I n thi s case, i nspecti on and repai r of the
antennas, cabl es, or cabl e connectors i s
needed.
7.0 Equi pment removal and res-
torati on:
Restore al l equi pment to i ts normal ground operati ng congurati on. Return the test
set to i ts normal storage l ocati on. Careful handl i ng and storage of al l ramp test
equi pment prol ongs the servi ce l i fe and reduces mai ntenance costs.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-5-6
maintenance 523-0775657
Tabl e 5-3. TDR-94/94D Di agnosti c Codes
PRIMARY
CODE
SECONDARY
CODE
DESCRIPTION DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY
TI F/W
00 No fault found
10 Power supply diagnostics (1) (1)
11 +5 V dc Yes Yes
12 +70 V dc No No
13 +35 V dc No No
14 LVPS No No
20 Transmitter/modulator diagnostics (2) (2)
21 Final stage, overcurrent Yes Yes
22 Top antenna, low power output No No
23 Bottom antenna low power output No No
24 Transmitter overtemperature No No
30 Synthesize diagnostics No No
31 Synthesizer lock detect No No
32 Synthesizer low power detect No No
40 Receiver/IF diagnostics No No
41 Top receiver channel No No
42 Bottom receiver channel No No
43 Top DPSK demodulator No No
44 Bottom DPSK demodulator No No
50 Program memory (ROM) diagnostics Yes Yes
51 High-byte ROM Yes Yes
52 Low-byte ROM Yes Yes
53 Both ROM chips Yes Yes
60 Volatile memory (RAM) diagnostics Yes Yes
61 High-byte RAM Yes Yes
6/ 15/ 1995 5-7
maintenance 523-0775657
PRI MARY
CODE
SECONDARY
CODE
DESCRI PTI ON DI AGNOSTI C DI SPLAY
TI F/W
60 (contd) 62 Low-byte RAM Yes Yes
63 Both RAM chi ps Yes Yes
64 Cache RAM Yes Yes
65 Cache RAM and hi gh-byte RAM Yes Yes
66 Cache RAM and l ow-byte RAM Yes Yes
67 Cache RAM and both RAM chi ps Yes Yes
68 Dual port RAM Yes Yes
70 Nonvol ati l e memory (NVRAM)di agnos-
ti cs
No No
80 Seri al i nput control bus di agnosti cs (4) No
81 ARI NC 429 control UART (4) No
82 ARI NC 429 control port A i nacti ve (4) No
83 ARI NC 429 control port B i nacti ve (4) No
84 ARI NC 429 control port C i nacti ve (4) No
85 CSDB control i nput port A i nacti ve (4) No
90 Seri al al ti tude i nput di agnosti cs No No
91 ARI NC 429/575 al ti tude UART No No
92 ARI NC 429/575 i nput port A i nacti ve No No
93 ARI NC 429/575 i nput port B i nacti ve No No
94 CSDB al ti tude i nput port A i nacti ve No No
95 CSDB al ti tude i nput port B i nacti ve No No
A0 ADLP communi cati on di agnosti cs No No
A1 ADLP comm A/B UART No No
A2 ADLP comm A/B bus i nacti ve No No
A3 ADLP comm C/D UART No No
A4 ADLP comm C/D bus i nacti ve No No
B0 TCAS communi cati on di agnosti cs No No
B1 TCAS UART No No
B2 TCAS uni t - -
B3 TCAS bus i nacti ve No No
B4 TCAS protocol error No No
C0 Squi tter di agnosti cs No Yes
C1 (TDR-94D onl y) Top channel squi tter No Yes
C2 (TDR-94D onl y) Bottom channel squi tter No Yes
6/ 15/ 1995 5-8
maintenance 523-0775657
PRIMARY
CODE
SECONDARY
CODE
DESCRIPTION DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY
TI F/W
D0 (TDR-94D only) Diversity diagnostic No Yes
E0 Message processor diagnostics No No
E1 (TDR-94D only) Top channel message processor, soft
failure
No No
E2 Bottom channel message processor, soft
failure
No No
E3 Top channel message processor, hard
failure
Yes Yes
E4 Bottom channel message processor, hard
failure
Yes Yes
F0 Conguration diagnostics No No
F1 Mode S discrete address changed No No
F2 TCAS selection changed No No
F3 Altitude units selection changed No No
F4 Max airspeed program selects changed No No
F5 Port selects changed No No
F6 SDI selects changed No No
F7 Single antenna selection changed No No
F8 ADLP selection changed No No
F9-FE (not assigned)
FF Unacceptable mode s address selected
(address lines are all 0 or all 1)
Yes Yes
Notes:
Except for 00, 70, and D0, primary diagnostics are not displayed.
(1) Transmitter is inhibited (TI) and failure warn (F/W
1
) output (P1-31) is set only if a diagnostic code 11 is detected.
(2) Transmitter is inhibited and F/W
1
discrete is set only if a diagnostic code 21 is detected.
(3) Transmitter is inhibited and TDR-94/94D is set to standby only if all selected control inputs are nonfunctional.
(4) Transmitter is inhibited and TDR-94/94D is set to standby only if the control bus failure is detected on the selected control
bus.
(5) Transmitter is inhibited and TDR-94/94D is set to standby only if serial control is selected and all serial inputs are
nonfunctional.
1
"F/W set" here refers to:
a. TDR-94/94D fault monitor discrete output, P1-31, set to high level,
b. TDR-94/94D CSDB data word label 1F, byte-1, bit-7, set to logic 0, and
c. TDR-94/94D ARINC 429 SSM and other data bits related to diagnostics set to the appropriate fault level.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-9
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-4. TDR-94/ 94D Diagnostic CodeDescription and LRU Disposition
Di agnosti c
Code
Ti tl e Descri pti on and LRU Di sposi ti on
For purposes of thi s di agnosti c code i nterpretati on and for the sake of brevi ty, the fol l owi ng faul t l evel s are dened:
Level 1: A l evel 1 faul t i s dened as one i n whi ch the TDR-94/94D shoul d be removed for further testi ng or faul t i sol ati on on
the bench.
Level 2: A l evel 2 faul t i s dened as one i n whi ch the TDR-94/94D i s demonstrati ng a fai l ure whi ch may not prevent i t from
performi ng conti nued but temporary servi ce. That i s, a di agnosti c whi ch i ndi cates a fai l ure i n a peri pheral functi on. For
exampl e, a di agnosti c code A? i ndi cati ng an ADLP faul t. I f an ADLP i s not bei ng used i n the i nstal l ati on the transponder may
operate normal l y i n i ts other functi ons.
Level 3: A l evel 3 faul t i s dened as one i n whi ch the TDR-94/94D has experi enced a change i n the i nstal l ati on, i .e., external to
the TDR-94/94D. I n thi s case, further anal ysi s i s needed to correct or restore the i nstal l ati on as needed. For exampl e, a
di agnosti c code F4 i ndi cati ng a change i n the max ai rspeed strappi ng. Thi s strongl y suggests an ai rpl ane wi ri ng probl em.
Reference to a fai l ure warni ng i ndi cati on shoul d be understood to be the ag.
00 No faul t found Thi s code i ndi cates that no fai l ure was detected duri ng the most recent sel f test
routi ne.
11 +5 V dc Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng i ndi cati on.
I t i s caused by a out-of-tol erance condi ti on i n the +5 V dc power suppl y.
12 +70 V dc Level 1. Same as 11 except that i t appl i es to the +70 V dc suppl y on hvps modul e A1.
13 +35 V dc Level 1. Same as 11 except that i t appl i es to the +35 V dc suppl y on hvps modul e A1.
14 LVPS Level 1. Same as 11 except that i t appl i es to the l ow vol tage power suppl y on modul e
A7.
21 Transmi t-
ter/modul ator, nal
stage, overcurrent
Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng i ndi cati on.
I t i s caused by a sensed hi gh current condi ti on i n the nal transmi tter stage. Thi s
may be accompani ed by a di agnosti c code 24.
22 Top antenna l ow
power output
Level 1 i f veri abl e, otherwi se l evel 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompa-
ni ed by a fai l ure warni ng i ndi cati on. I t i s caused by a sensed l ow power output
condi ti on at the top antenna output nal stage. Thi s may be veri abl e i n the ATC-601
test. Thi s di agnosti c wi l l not occur on a TDR-94 (non-di versi ty) uni t.
23 Bottom antenna
l ow power output
Same as 22 except that i t appl i es to the bottom antenna output port.
24 Transmi tter over
temperature
Level 1. The same as 21 except that i t i s caused by a hi gh temperature condi ti on.
31 Synthesi zer l ock
detect
Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on and occurs when the synthesi zer output frequency does not agree wi th the proces-
sor command. Thi s condi ti on may be veri abl e i n the ATC-601 test as a transmi tter
off frequency fai l ure.
32 Synthesi zer l ow
power detect
Level 1. Much the same as 31 except that i t appl i es to the synthesi zer output l evel . A
suffi ci entl y l ow output may prevent the modul ator, and hence the transmi tter or
recei ver, from operati ng.
41 * Top recei ver chan-
nel
Level 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on and occurs when the top recei ver channel does not respond properl y to a si mul ated
test si gnal generated by the bottom channel recei ver. I t i s possi bl e that the bottom
channel may sti l l be functi onal . Nei ther di agnosti c 41, 42 or 43 occur on a TDR-94.
* See the note 1 at the end of thi s tabl e
5/ 5/ 1993 5-10
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-4. TDR-94/ 94D Diagnostic CodeDescription and LRU Disposition
Di agnosti c
Code
Ti tl e Descri pti on and LRU Di sposi ti on
42 * Bottom recei ver
channel
Level 2. Same as 41 except that the channel rol es are reversed. See note 1 at the end
of thi s tabl e.
43 Top DPSK demodu-
l ator
Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on and occurs when the top DPSK demodul ator does not respond properl y to a
si mul ated mode s test si gnal . I t i s possi bl e that the uni t may sti l l respond properl y to
ATCRBS (mode A and C) i nterrogati ons. * See the note at te end of thi s tabl e.
44 Bottom DPSK de-
modul ator
Level 1. Same as 43 except that i t appl i es to the bottom channel .
51 Hi gh-byte ROM Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi ti on.
Duri ng sel f-test the mi croprocessor executes a memory modul o 64K summati on of al l
memory l ocati ons and compares that resul t agai nst a stored check-sum val ue. Thi s
di agnosti c i ndi cates that the hi gh-byte ROM fai l ed that compari son test.
52 Low-byte ROM Level 1. Same as 51 except that the l ow-byte ROM fai l ed the test.
53 Both ROM chi ps Level 1. Same as 51 except that both ROMs fai l ed the test.
61 Hi gh-byte RAM Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi ti on.
Duri ng sel f-test the mi croprocessor executes a read/wri te test on al l avai l abl e vol ati l e
RAM l ocati ons usi ng AAAAH and 5555H data. Thi s di agnosti c i ndi cates that one or
more hi gh-byte RAM devi ce fai l ed thi s test.
62 Low-byte RAM Level 1. Same as 61 except that the l ow-byte RAM devi ce fai l ed the test.
63 Both RAM Level 1. Same as 61 except that both RAM devi ce fai l ed the test.
64 Cache RAM Level 1. Same as 61 except that the cache RAM fai l ed the test.
65 Cache and hi gh-
byte RAM
Level 1. Same as 61 except that both the hi gh-byte RAM (61) and cache RAM (64)
fai l ed the test.
66 Cache and l ow-byte
RAM
Level 1. Same as 61 except that both the l ow-byte RAM (62) and cache RAM (64)
fai l ed the test.
67 Cache and both
RAM
Level 1. Same as 61 except that both RAM (63) and cache RAM (64) fai l ed the test.
68 Dual port RAM Level 1. Same as 61 except that the dual port RAM fai l ed the test.
70 NVRAM Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on. Duri ng power-up the mi croprocessor executes a read/wri te test on the l ast 16
bytes of the NVRAM to veri fy proper operati on. Thi s di agnosti c i ndi cates that the
NVRAM fai l ed that test.
81 ARI NC 429 UART Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng
condi ti on. Duri ng sel f-test, the mi croprocessor forces the output from al l seri al control
UARTs to feedback to the i nput. The mi croprocessor veri es that the UART processes
thi s ARI NC word properl y. Thi s di agnosti c i ndi cates that the ARI NC 429 UART fai l ed
thi s test.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-11
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-4. TDR-94/ 94D Diagnostic CodeDescription and LRU Disposition
Di agnosti c
Code
Ti tl e Descri pti on and LRU Di sposi ti on
82 ARI NC 429 control
port A i nacti ve
Level 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on. Duri ng normal non-burst mode operati on, the mi croprocessor peri odi cal l y
moni tors the sel ected seri al ports for bus acti vi ty. Duri ng burst mode, thi s test i s not
performed because there i s no way of predi cti ng the arri val of control data. Thi s
di agnosti c code i ndi cates that ARI NC 429 control port A has no bus acti vi ty for at l east
1-second.
83 ARI NC 429 control
port B i nacti ve
Level 2. Same as 82 except that i t appl i es to ARI NC 429 control port B.
84 ARI NC 429 control
port C i nacti ve
Level 2. Same as 82 except that i t appl i es to ARI NC 429 control port C.
85 CSDB control port
A i nacti ve
Level 2. Same as 82 except that i t appl i es to CSDB control port A. Moni tor ti me i s
extended to 2-seconds.
86 CSDB control port
B i nacti ve
Level 2. Same as 85 except that i t appl i es to CSDB control port B.
91 ARI NC 429/575
al ti tude UART
Level 2. Same as 81 except that i t appl i es to the ARI NC 429/575 al ti tude UART.
92 ARI NC 429/575
al ti tude i nput port
A
Level 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on. Duri ng normal operati on, the mi croprocessor peri odi cal l y moni tors the sel ected
al ti tude i nput ports for bus acti vi ty. Thi s di agnosti c code i ndi cates that ARI NC
429/575 al ti tude i nput port A has no bus acti vi ty for at l east 2-seconds.
93 ARI NC 429/575
al ti tude i nput port
B
Level 2. Same as 92 except that i t appl i es to ARI NC 429/575 al ti tude i nput port B.
94 CSDB al ti tude
i nput port A
Level 2. Same as 92 except that i t appl i es to CSDB al ti tude i nput port A.
95 CSDB al ti tude
i nput port B
Level 2. Same as 92 except that i t appl i es to CSDB al ti tude i nput port B.
A1 ADLP comm A/B
UART
Level 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on. Duri ng power-on sel f-test and whenever a comm A/B bus fai l ure i s suspected, the
mi croprocessor forces the UART output to feedback to the i nput and veri es that the
UART processes the data properl y. Thi s di agnosti c code i ndi cates that ADLP comm
A/B UART fai l ed the test.
A2 ADLP comm A/B
i nput port
Level 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on. The determi nati on of a fai l ure i n thi s functi on i nvol ves a hi ghl y compl i cated
exchange between data l i nk transmi tters and recei vers i nvol vi ng data word check-sums
and pari ty checks. Thi s di agnosti c code resul ts after repeated attempts to establ i sh a
rel i abl e communi cati ons l i nk fai l . The fai l ure shoul d be veri abl e i n the ATC-601 tests
9 through 15.
A3 ADLP comm C/D
UART
Level 2. Same as A1 except that i t appl i es to ADLP comm C/D UART.
A4 ADLP comm C/D
i nput port
Level 2. Same as A2 except that i t appl i es to ADLP comm C/D i nput port.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-12
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-4. TDR-94/ 94D Diagnostic CodeDescription and LRU Disposition
Di agnosti c
Code
Ti tl e Descri pti on and LRU Di sposi ti on
B1 TCAS UART Level 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on. Whenever a TCAS i s sel ected and a bus fai l ure i s suspected, the mi croprocessor
forces the UART output to feedback to the i nput and veri es that the UART processes
the data properl y. Thi s di agnosti c code i ndi cates that TCAS UART fai l ed the test.
B2 TCAS uni t fai l ure Level 3. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a TDR-94D fai l ure
warni ng condi ti on. Thi s di agnosti c code i ndi cates that TCAS operati on i s sel ected and
a TCAS uni t fai l ure warni ng has been recei ved. The TCAS uni t shoul d be i ndi cati ng a
fai l ure warni ng.
B3 TCAS bus i nacti ve Level 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on. When TCAS i s sel ected, the mi croprocessor peri odi cal l y moni tors the TCAS i nput
port for bus acti vi ty. Thi s di agnosti c code i ndi cates that the TCAS i nput port i s
i nacti ve, or fai l s to meet certai n pari ty, rate, and status condi ti ons, for a ti me exceed-
i ng the normal update rate whi ch vari es accordi ng to the type of data to be exchanged.
B4 * TCAS protocol
error
Level 2. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on. Thi s di agnosti c code i ndi cates that the TCAS data bei ng recei ved does not compl y
wi th the requi red protocol . * See the note 2 at the end of thi s tabl e.
C1 Top channel
squi tter (TDR-94D
onl y)
Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi ti on
and i ndi cates that the top channel squi tter functi on i s not functi oni ng properl y.
C2 Bottom channel
squi tter
Level 1: Same as C1 except that i t appl i es to the bottom channel .
D0 Di versi ty (TDR-
94D onl y)
Level 1. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi ti on
and i ndi cates an i nabi l i ty to exchange data between the top and bottom channel as
descri bed for di agnosti c 41 and 42 and others bel ow.
E1 Top channel mes-
sage processor
Thi s di agnosti c code wi thout an accompanyi ng E3 di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not
accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi ti on. Duri ng sel f test the bottom channel PAM
i s prel oaded to generate an ATCRBS or mode s i nterrogati on whi ch i s i njected i nto the
top channel for processi ng. I f the message i s not properl y processed an E1 di agnosti c
code i s recorded and the process i s repeated. I f the fai l ure occurs on three consecuti ve
attempts, an E3 di agnosti c code i s recorded. An E3 di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y
accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi ti on. Therefore, an E1 di agnosti c code wi thout
an accompanyi ng E3 di agnosti c code can be i gnored unl ess a pattern i s detected whi ch
may i ndi cate a margi nal condi ti on.
E2 Bottom channel
message processor
Same as E1 except that i t appl i es to the bottom channel message processor.
E3 Top channel hard
message processor
Level 1. See E1 above.
E4 Bottom channel
hard message pro-
cessor
Level 1. Same as E3 except that i t appl i es to the bottom channel message processor.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-13
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-4. TDR-94/ 94D Diagnostic CodeDescription and LRU Disposition
Di agnosti c
Code
Ti tl e Descri pti on and LRU Di sposi ti on
F1 Mode s di screte
address changed
Level 3. Thi s di agnosti c code i s typi cal l y not accompani ed by a fai l ure warni ng condi -
ti on and i ndi cates that one or more of the mode s address straps has changed si nce the
previ ous power-up. These straps are moni tored onl y duri ng power-up. I f the straps
change duri ng a i ght l eg, the condi ti on wi l l not be detected unti l the next power-up.
F2 TCAS sel ecti on
changed
Level 3. Same as F1 except that i t appl i es to the TCAS sel ecti on strap.
F3 Al ti tude uni ts se-
l ecti on changed
Level 3. Same as F1 except that i t appl i es to the al ti tude uni ts (metri c or deci mal )
sel ecti on strap. (At the ti me of thi s publ i cati on, thi s functi on has not been i mpl e-
mented.)
F4 Max ai rspeed pro-
grams sel ects
changed
Level 3. Same as F1 except that i t appl i es to the max ai rspeed straps.
F5 Control port sel ects
changed
Level 3. Same as F1 except that i t appl i es to the control port sel ect straps.
F6 SDI sel ects
changed
Level 3. Same as F1 except that i t appl i es to the SDI sel ect straps.
F7 Si ngl e antenna se-
l ect strap changed
Level 3. Same as F1 except that i t appl i es to the si ngl e antenna sel ect strap.
F8 ADLP sel ecti on
changed
Level 3. Same as F1 except that i t appl i es to the ADLP sel ect strap.
FF Unacceptabl e ad-
dress
Level 3. Thi s di agnosti c code occurs when an unacceptabl e mode s address strappi ng i s
detected; e.g., al l straps open or al l straps shorted to ground. Thi s can occur i f the
strappi ng pl ug i s removed or the common l i ne has opened.
Note 1:
Several of these di agnosti c codes may be seen i n a di agnosti c data downl oad. I n most cases they can be i gnored. I f, however,
one remai ns for an extended peri od (more than 1 or 2 seconds) duri ng manual sel f-test, the uni t shoul d undergo more detai l ed
testi ng.
Expl anati on:
Duri ng sel f-test (automati c and manual ) a si mul ated i nterrogati on si gnal i s generated i n one recei ver (cal l thi s the
sendi ng recei ver) and i s i njected i nto the opposi te recei ver (cal l thi s the target recei ver). I f the target recei ver does not
return a proper response, the appropri ate di agnosti c i s recorded.
Scenari o:
I f a val i d i nterrogati on arri ves i n the target recei ver at the same ti me as or sl i ghtl y ahead of the test si gnal , i t wi l l
respond to the val i d i nterrogati on and therefore fai l the test eval uati on. Because the test si gnal i s automati cal l y
generated at l east once per second, the probabi l i ty of thi s scenari o occurri ng i s rather hi gh and i ncreases as a functi on
of the i nterrogati on rate. I f the val i d i nterrogati on arri ves at the sendi ng or target recei ver duri ng the ti me thi s test
sequence i s i n process, the uni t wi l l si mpl y not respond to the i nterrogati on. Thi s wi l l most l i kel y be unnoti ced.
Note 2:
The B4 di agnosti c may be seen repeatedl y i n a di agnosti c data downl oad. From the poi nt of vi ew of the transponder and i f i t
i s not accompanyed by a TCAS FAI L on the TCAS di spl ay, i t can be i gnored.
Expl anati on:
The B4 di agnosti c can occur because of an i ncompati bi l i ty between the TCAS and transponder protocol s as dened i n
the respecti ve MOPS (Mi ni mum Operati ng Performance Standards).
5/ 5/ 1993 5-14
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.4 5.4.4 Fl i ghtl i ne Faul t I sol ati on
Procedures
Thi s paragraph provi des procedures for
i sol ati ng a transponder equi pment
mal functi on to a parti cul ar LRU. The
procedures i n tabl e 5-5 requi re the use of a
test panel , ramp tester, dvm, and a data bus
reader/si mul ator.
Tabl e 5-1 l i sts the vari ous uni ts whi ch can be
used. Other si mi l ar uni ts may become
avai l abl e whi ch al so can be used provi ded the
capabi l i ti es are si mi l ar to those l i sted. Refer
to fi gure 5-1 for the test setup di agram.
FlightlineFault I solation, Test Setup Diagram
Figure5-1
5/ 5/ 1993 5-15
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
1.0 Setup:
I f thi s i s a conti nuati on
of tabl e 5-2, ski p to step
7.
Prepare the ai rpl ane and transponder system for testi ng as requi red. As a
mi ni mum thi s wi l l requi re:
Be sure that the ai r/ground test i nhi bi t, i f used,i s functi onal . P2-53 must
be grounded to al l ow a manual sel f-test.
Set al ti meter system(s) for a test al ti tude (consul t ai rpl ane manual for
necessary procedures) especi al l y as may be requi red for TCAS, i f used.
Setup I FR ATC-601 Ramp Test Set (or equi val ent) and perform the
necessary prel i mi nary tests for i t.
I f the broadcast method of testi ng wi l l be used wi th the ATC-601 Ramp
Test Set, and the i nstal l ati on consi sts of a TDR-94D di versi ty
transponder, i nstal l an rf boot over the top antenna. I f the di rect
connecti on i s bei ng used, di sconnect both antenna cabl es from the
transponder mount, connect the ATC-601 to the l ower antenna connector
and i nstal l a l oad on the upper connector.
Note: I f the transponder i nstal l ati on restri cts use of the di rect connecti on
method, the broadcast method shoul d be used unl ess or unti l tests i ndi cate the
need for di rect connecti on.
2.0 I nspecti on: Before appl yi ng power to the transponder system, make a vi sual i nspecti on of
the transponder antenna(s), ATC control , and the r/t. Be sure the r/t i s fi rml y
seated i n i ts mount and there are no obvi ous si gns of l oose or damaged
system components. I f i t i s possi bl e, check the antenna cabl e connecti ons on
the back of the transponder for ti ghtness and the wi re harness for obvi ous
si gns of broken wi res or di sl odged connector pi ns.
3.0 Power appl i cati on:
Appl y power to the tran-
sponder system. Enter
an appropri ate code i nto
the control and set for
normal operati on.
At power-up, you may see di AG al ong wi th a di agnosti c code number. These
random i ndi cati ons shoul d be i gnored. You shoul d be concerned pri mari l y wi th
those di agnosti cs that persi st.
4.0 Sel f Test: I f the i nstal l ati on uses an ATC control
head other than the CTL-92/92A, you
may need to consul t the ai rpl ane manual
to determi ne where the ATC sel f test re-
sul ts are di spl ayed and i n what format
any di agnosti cs are di scl osed.
Test resul ts shoul d not show any di ag-
nosti c other than 00 (no faul ts detected).
I n the case of the CTL-92/92A uni ts, the
di agnosti cs are di spl ayed on the control .
See tabl e 5-3 for an
i nterpretati on of the di agnosti c
codes and tabl e 5-4 for di sposi ti on
of LRU.
4.1.a. Sel f-test di spl ay on CTL-
92/92A:
Press the ATC TEST
button on the ATC
control .
Note: The i nstal l ati on
may feature a remote
ATC TEST button i n
whi ch case use i t i nstead.
I f the CTL-92/92A has a
1/2 swi tch (dual
transponder control ), set
the 1/2 swi tch to 2 and
repeat the test.
A normal i ndi cati on on the CTL-92/92A i s:
The acti ve code di spl ay i ntensi ty modul ates from mi ni mum to maxi mum.
On any CTL-92/92A control s wi th CPN endi ng i n other than -2XX:
I f an al ti tude encoder i s connected to the control and operati ng, "AL"
i s di spl ayed i n the upper wi ndow and the al ti tude i n thousands of
feet i n 100-foot i ncrements i s di spl ayed i n the l ower wi ndow.
I f al ti tude data i s not bei ng suppl i ed to the control , "AL" i s di spl ayed
i n the upper wi ndow and the l ower wi ndow remai ns
"-------".
I f a di agnosti c condi ti on i s detected, the upper wi ndow shows "dI AG"
and the two-di gi t di agnosti c code i s di spl ayed i n the l ower wi ndow.
Refer to tabl e 5-3 for a l i sti ng of the codes, and tabl e 5-4 for an
i nterpretati on and expl anati on of each.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-16
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
4.1.b. Sel f-test di spl ay on RTU-
870A/T:
Sel ect the ATC page and
press the ATC test key.
A normal i ndi cati on on the RTU-870/870A
i s (top to bottom):
Upper wi ndow: ON ALT
Second wi ndow: XXXXX FT
Thi rd wi ndow: (not used)
Fourth wi ndow: TST
Lower wi ndow: (ATC code)* RTN
4.1.c. ATC sel f-test di spl ay for
systems usi ng the TTC-920G,
CTL-92T, or other type of
ARI NC 429 transponder /
TCAS control .
Press the TEST button on the
control .
Consul t the ai rpl ane manual for the
l ocati on and format of transponder and
TCAS sel f-test di spl ay, especi al l y the
di spl ay of any possi bl e ATC di agnosti cs.
5.0 Setup the ATC-601 for AUTO
TEST and sel ect RUN.
Al l AUTO TEST i tems shoul d i ndi cate
PASSED. Thi s test takes about 30 sec-
onds to compl ete.
Note: I t i s possi bl e that tests 13, 14, and
15 i ndi cate FAI LED. These i tems are a
functi on of datal i nk capabi l i ti es and may
not be i mpl emented i n whi ch case you can
i gnore thi s fai l ure i ndi cati on.
Otherwi se, a fai l ure of any
one or more of the i tems,
may i ndi cate a performance
probl em. I n thi s case, con-
si der removi ng the tran-
sponder for addi ti onal
anal ysi s and repai r on the
bench.
6.0 Opposi te antenna test:
I f the di rect connecti on
method i s bei ng used, swi tch
the test set cabl e to the other
antenna port. I f the broad-
cast method i s bei ng used,
move the rf boot to the top (or
opposi te) antenna connector
and repeat the test.
The test resul ts shoul d be approxi matel y
equi val ent between the two antenna test.
I f there i s a substanti al
di fference i n recei ver
sensi ti vi ty and/or power
output, i t may be caused by
a faul ty antenna, antenna
cabl e, or connector i nstal l a-
ti on. I n thi s case,
i nspecti on and repai r of the
antennas, cabl es, or cabl e
connectors i s needed.
Successful compl eti on of al l tests to thi s poi nt veri fi es a functi onal transponder system unl ess there are other
i ndi cati ons of fai l ure (l i ke pi l ot or ATC compl ai nts). I f any test(s) fai l ed or i f you need added assurance, conti nue wi th
the faul t i sol ati on procedures bel ow. These procedures wi l l hel p you i sol ate a fai l ure between the control (s) and the
transponder uni t.
The steps that fol l ow requi re the use of a fl i ghtl i ne test panel and bus reader. Thi s al l ows access to the data busses for
detai l ed faul t i sol ati on and data anal ysi s. The test panel i s descri bed i n paragraph 5.9. Refer to fi gure 5-1 for a
di agram of the setup needed for thi s procedure.
I f you choose to conti nue i n thi s seri es, you shoul d feel free to pi ck any or al l of the tests as seems necessary dependi ng
on the suspected fai l ure. The sequence of tests gi ven i s not i mportant. For exampl e, i f the sel f-test test fai l ed to
produce any resul ts, you shoul d perform the Sel f-test swi tch test 9.2.1. to be sure that sel f-test i s bei ng commanded
properl y.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-17
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
7.0 LRU faul t i sol ati on:
7.1
Setup
I F POWER I S ON, TURN
POWER OFF TO THE TRAN-
SPONDER (AND TCAS
SYSTEM I F USED)
Remove the control from i ts
l ocati on and i nstal l the
fl i ghtl i ne test panel and
appropri ate cabl e. Connect
the control to the test panel
mati ng connector.
Set al l test panel data bus
swi tches to MON. Connect
the compati bl e data bus read-
er RX termi nal s to the test
panel OUT termi nal s. I f
your bus reader has a second
RX port, connect i t to the test
panel I N termi nal s.
Set the ATC-601 for ATCRBS
REPLY TEST
Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel i nstal l ati on:
I f you are connecti ng the test panel between a CTL-92/92A and the
ai rpl ane wi ri ng (wi th no CTL-92T; i .e., a non-TCAS i nstal l ati on) you wi l l
need a CSDB reader/si mul ator l i ke the DataTrac 200.
I f you are connecti ng the test panel between the CTL-92/92A and the
ai rpl ane wi ri ng whi ch uses a CTL-92T (i .e., a TCAS i nstal l ati on), you wi l l
need a CSDB reader/si mul ator l i ke the DataTrac 200 to moni tor/si mul ate
the CSDB data between the CTL-92/92A and the CTL-92T, and the CSDB
data feedback from the TDR-94D.
I f you are connecti ng the test panel between the Gabl es 816 Control ,
the CTL-92T Transponder/TCAS Control , TTC-920G Transponder/TCAS
Control , or an RTU-870A/T Radi o Tuni ng Uni t and the ai rpl ane wi ri ng,
you wi l l need an ARI NC 429 reader/si mul ator.
Note: Do not connect the bus reader TX port to the test panel OUT
termi nal s whi l e the control i s al so connected and operati ng, unl ess you set
the correspondi ng test panel swi tch to EXT I NPUT. The test panel I N
and OUT bus termi nal l abel i ng i s wi th reference to the control . That i s,
OUT i s data bei ng transmitted OUT from the control , whi l e IN i s data
bei ng received by/i nto the control . Pl aci ng the correspondi ng swi tch to the
EXT I NPUT posi ti on di sconnects the source so that external data can be
i njected wi thout i nterference. You can al ways connect the bus reader RX
to ei ther the I N or OUT termi nal s to moni tor the source of that parti cul ar
data (test panel swi tch i n the MON posi ti on).
8.0
Code
veri fi -
cati on
Normal operati on test:
Turn power on to the system,
and set the control for 2150
or any ATCRBS code (avoi d
the emergency codes). Set for
normal operati on. Read the
appropri ate l abel as shown
---->.
Note that the bus reader shows the correct data.
Control Word Format/Label Bus Reader ATC-601 Bus Reader
RX 1 RX 2
CTL-92/92A CSDB/1E (Note 1) CODE= 2150 (Note 2)
CTL-92T ARI NC 429/031 (Note 1) CODE= 2150 (Note 2)
RTU-870A/T ARI NC 429/031 (Note 1) CODE= 2150 (Note 2)
TTC-920G ARI NC 429/031 (Note 1) CODE= 2150 (Note 2)
X = any octal character
Note 1: Thi s i s the data bei ng transmi tted by the control . ( Remember, the CTL-92/92A i nput/output i s CSDB data. I n
al l other control s the data i s ARI NC 429.)
CSDB (CTL-92/92A):
DataTrac 200: LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX-XMT-DATA MSEC
1E 00011111 21 50 24 10 0100
ARI NC 429:
DataTrac (al l ): LBL SI 29-HEX-XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 21 50 XX XX 00 1 0100
JcAI R 429E: 031 01 142211 00
Note 2: Thi s i s data bei ng returned by the transponder.
CSDB :
DataTrac 200: LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX-RCV-DATA MSEC
1F 00011111 21 50 24 11 0100
ARINC 429:
DataTrac (all): LBL SI 29-HEX-RCV-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 21 50 XX X 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E: 031 01 142211 11
5/ 5/ 1993 5-18
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
8.1
I dent
ATC code test:
Press I DENT on the control
head or on the test panel .
A normal l y operati ng transponder shoul d transmi t the I DENT code for
about 18 seconds (18 1 s) and then stop. Duri ng that ti me the ATC-601
shows CODE=ID2150; the CODE preceded by "ID". I f the CODE bei ng
di spl ayed on the ATC-601 i s not the same as the code you entered on the
control head recheck your setup to be certai n of the code that you are
suppl yi ng. The code bei ng suppl i ed and di spl ayed i s enti rel y a software
functi on and therefore i s hi ghl y unl i kel y of fai l ure.
Note: When the TDR-94/94D fi rst begi ns transmi tti ng the I DENT code, the ATC-601 di spl ays: CODE=ID2150. After
about 18 seconds (18 1) the I D porti on di sappears but the code number remai ns. I f I DENT was l ast commanded by
way of a di gi tal word i t i s necessary to transmi t a new di gi tal word wi th the I DENT bi t reset (bi t 13 = 0) before I DENT
can be commanded agai n ei ther by way of the di gi tal word or by a di screte command. I f you use the I DENT button on
the control head, the uni t wi l l be automati cal l y reset.
9.0 Al ti tude Test: Al ti tude i nformati on can be suppl i ed to the transponder i n a number of formats:
a. ARI NC 429,
b. ARI NC 575,
c. CSDB, or
d. ARI NC 572 (Gi l l ham code); paragraph 5.7 provi des encodi ng and decodi ng i nformati on for Gi l l ham
code.
I n a TCAS i nstal l ati on and i f the al ti tude source i s a system usi ng the Gi l l ham code, two sources of al ti tude
data are requi red. One source i s connected di rectl y to the transponder whi l e the other i s connected to the
CTL-92/92A control . I n the control the Gi l l ham data i s converted to CSDB and suppl i ed to the CTL-92T
where i t i s converted to ARI NC 429 and suppl i ed to the transponder. I n the transponder the two sources
are compared. I f they do not agree wi thi n 500-ft, the transponder wi l l set the al ti tude word SSM output to
NCD (No Computed Data).
I f the al ti tude system i s one of the fi rst three l i sted, the data i s suppl i ed di rectl y to the transponder. One or
two al ti tude sources may be used. I n ei ther case they are connected di rectl y to the transponder.
I n non-TCAS i nstal l ati ons usi ng a CTL-92/92A control , i .e., no CTL-92T, typi cal l y the al ti tude data i s
suppl i ed di rectl y to the transponder. I t i s possi bl e, however, that the Gi l l ham code can al so be suppl i ed to
the CTL-92/92A. I n thi s case i t i s suppl i ed to the transponder as CSDB al ti tude data.
10.0 Power Test:
Connect the dvm to the
appropri ate power termi nal s
on the test panel .
The TTC-920G uses 115 V ac , 400 Hz,
power, al l others use +28 V dc. Al l ow
10% for 115 Vac or 15% for 28 V dc.
I f the power i s not correct,
repai r ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
power source as needed.
11.0 Sel f-test swi tch veri fi cati on:
Sel f-test can be i ni ti ated i n the transponder wi th ei ther of two i nputs; di screte or di gi tal . I n most
i nstal l ati ons the di screte i nput to the transponder i s not used. I n step 4.0 above, sel f-test was i ni ti ated
di gi tal l y. Therefore, i f step 4.0 was successful , there i s very l i ttl e to be gai ned by performi ng thi s step. I f i t
fai l ed, however, step 11.1 bel ow provi des i nstructi ons for veri fi cati on of the sel f-test swi tch by moni tori ng the
control i nternal swi tchi ng functi on. I f the control does not have a di screte sel f-test i nput/output, or i f i t does
not have a sel f-test swi tch, step 11.1 cannot be performed.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-19
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
11.0
(cont
d)
Step 11.2 i s usi ng the bus si mul ator to moni tor the di gi tal output from the control and then to generate a
di gi tal sel f-test command. I f step 4.0 above fai l ed, you can perform step 11.2. I f the control output i s not
correct (i .e., the test bi ts do not change) the probabl e cause of fai l ure i s i n the control . I f the transponder
sti l l does not respond correctl y when a si mul ated sel f-test word i s i njected, the fai l ure appears to be i n the
transponder.
Step 11.2 al so provi des i nstructi ons to moni tor the feedback from the transponder to the control . I n the case
of CSDB data, the feedback word l abel i s 1F. I n ARI NC 429 the feedback word l abel i s the same as the
control word l abel ; 031. When the transponder i s repl yi ng to i nterrogati ons, the feedback SSM i s set to 11.
Otherwi se i t i s the same as the control word.
11.1 Sel f-test swi tch test.
Connect the dvm to the TEST
termi nal on the test panel [ref
to COMM or 28V (-)]. Press
TEST on the control (or
remote swi tch i f used - not the
swi tch on the test panel .)
Dvm shows +5 Vdc ( 1) when no TEST
swi tch (ei ther on the control , test panel ,
or el sewhere), i s pressed.
Dvm shows l ess than +3 V dc when any
TEST swi tch i s pressed.
I f +5 V dc vol tage i s not
correct, or i s correct but does
not change when the swi tch
i s pressed, the faul t appears
to be i n the control and i t
shoul d be removed for
further testi ng on the bench.
11.2 Control output test:
Wi th the bus reader RCV
connected to the test panel
OUT termi nal s and the
correspondi ng swi tch set to
MON, you shoul d see the test
bi ts change when you press
the TEST swi tch.
Sel f-test usi ng bus si mul ator:
I f there i s no response,
connect the bus reader XMT
to the OUT termi nal s on the
test panel . Set the
correspondi ng test panel
swi tch to EXT I NPUT and set
the bus reader as shown --->.
CSDB (CTL-92/92A):
DataTrac 200: LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX-XMT-DATA MSEC
1E 10000101 21 50 24 10 0100
|<---test bit
ARI NC 429:
DataTrac (al l ) * LBL SI 29-HEX-XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 21 50 XX X1 01 1 0100
||<--test command
JcAI R 429E: (TX) 031 01 142211 01
||<--test command
* Recogni ze that the col umn headers are sl i ghtl y di fferent between the
DataTrac 200 and the DataTrac 400/400H.
I n the fi rst part of thi s test, the control output shoul d be as shown above.
I n the second part of thi s test, the transponder shoul d respond to the si mul ated sel f-test command. Be sure
to set the data back to normal (non-test) after the sel f-test sequence.
As a further verfi cati on of i nter-uni t communi cati on, you can connect the bus reader RCV to the test panel
I N termi nal s and set the correspondi ng swi tch to MON. Thi s wi l l al l ow you to moni tor the feedback data
from the transponder to the control . You shoul d see the test bi ts change when you press the test swi tch
when the sel f-test command i s transmi tted. I f so, thi s veri fi es that the transponder i s recei vi ng the
command properl y. I t i s hi ghl y unl i kel y, however, that the transponder can provi de a proper feedback
wi thout properl y executi ng a sel f-test command.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-20
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
Note: The remai nder of thi s procedure consi sts of expl anatory i nformati on that may be useful for troubl eshooti ng.
The test panel test poi nts l abel i ng refl ects the si gnal or vol tage that i s found at that poi nt. I n most cases, that si gnal
or vol tage depends on certai n i nstal l ati on opti ons. Therefore, you wi l l need to consul t the ai rpl ane manual to
determi ne whi ch of those opti ons are acti ve or i nacti ve i n your i nstal l ati on. Then use the fol l owi ng procedures to veri fy
the correctness of the i nstal l ati on. The procedures are separated accordi ng to the control present i n the i nstal l ati on.
CTL-
92
/92A
di s-
cretes
and
etc
Use a mul ti meter at the
fol l owi ng test panel test
poi nts, connect the reference
l ead to COMM (P1-s):
DUAL sel ect (P1-m) (-2XX
control s onl y):
Sel ected = ground
Not sel ected = near +5-V dc (pul l -up
resi stor to +5 V dc i nternal ).
When thi s pi n i s grounded
the no. 2 CSDB i nput port i s
defi ned as the no. 2 TDR
feedback port.
REMOTE sel ect (P1-K) Sel ected = ground
Not sel ected = near +5-V dc (pul l -up
resi stor to +5-V dc i nternal ).
Thi s pi n i s typi cal l y
connected to a remote swi tch
l abel ed REMOTE (or
si mi l ar). When grounded
the CTL-92/92A:
control s are i noperati ve,
di spl ay shows RMT, and
code i s determi ned by the
remote tuni ng devi ce.
XPDR STBY No. 1 and No.
2 (P1-W and P1-X) (appl i es
onl y to CTL-92/92A uni ts wi th
1/2 swi tch)
P1-W i s at ground when 1/2 swi tch on
CTL i s i n the No. 2 posi ti on. Near + 5-V
dc when 1/2 swi tch i s i n the No.1
posi ti on. P1-X i s al ways opposi te of P1-
W.
These pi ns may be used to
operate a rel ay whi ch
control s power to ei ther or
both transponders. I n thi s
case, the hi gh vol tage may
be near +28-V.
XPDR ON/OFF, No. 1 and
No.2 (P1-B and P1-C).
These two pi ns are i denti cal and at
ground when the CTL functi on swi tch i s
at OFF and open otherwi se.
These pi ns are typi cal l y
connected to the XPDR
ON/OFF; no. 1 to the no. 1
transponder, and no. 2 to
no.2, i n dual i nstal l ati ons.
SW 28 V DC OUT, No. 1
and No. 2 (P1-k and P1-j).
These two pi ns provi de swi tch +28 V dc
output through the control . The outputs
are i denti cal and hi gh i n al l CTL control
swi tch posi ti ons other than OFF.
These outputs may be used
to swi tch power to the
transponders through an
external rel ay.
DATA BUS SHI ELDS (P1-
D, P1-L, P1-P, P1-T, and P1-
V)
Pi n P1-D i s typi cal l y connected to chassi s
ground. The other are connected to an
associ ated data bus shi el d. Al l of these
pi ns are i nternal l y connected (wi thi n the
CTL) to 28-V dc common.
I t i s i mportant that these
pi ns are properl y i sol ated
from ei ther of the two
associ ated data bus l i nes.
TEST (P1-E) and I DENT
(P1-b)
Both of these pi ns shoul d refl ect a TTL
hi gh (near + 5-V dc) when none of the
associ ated swi tches are depressed and a
short to ground when the swi tch i s
depressed.
I n both cases, the functi on i s
acti vated at the l ow l evel . A
constant ground (even when
the swi tch i s not pressed)
shoul d be seen as a fai l ure
and wi l l di sal l ow the
functi on.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-21
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
CTL-
92T
di s-
cretes
and
etc
Use a mul ti meter at the fol l owi ng test panel test poi nts, connect the reference l ead to COMM (P1/2-32).
Strappi ng Opti ons 1 through
6.
The ai rpl ane manual shoul d reveal those strappi ng opti ons sel ected. I n
al l cases, the sel ected strap shoul d show a short-to-ground whi l e those not
sel ected (open strap) shoul d show a TTL hi gh (near +5-V dc).
No. 1 (P1-53): open = Al l traffi c di spl ay,
grounded = RA/TA onl y di spl ay sel ected.
No. 2: (P1-49) Range sel ect
strap:
On uni ts wi th push-
buttons and CPN endi ng i n
0XX:
Open = 5/10/20 nmi ranges enabl ed
Ground = 6/12 nmi ranges enabl ed
On uni ts wi th push-
buttons and CPN endi ng i n
1XX:
Open = 40/20/10/5/3 ranges enabl ed
Ground = 6/12 nmi ranges enabl ed
On uni ts wi thout push-
buttons and CPN endi ng i n
0XX:
Open = 20 nmi range sel ected
Ground = 12 nmi range sel ected
On uni ts wi thout push-
buttons and CPN endi ng i n
1XX:
Open = 5 nmi range sel ected
Ground = 12 nmi range sel ected
No. 3: (P1-52) Rel ati ve /
Absol ute i ntruder al ti tude
di spl ay sel ect:
Open = i ntruder al ti tude di spl ayed as rel ati ve to own
Ground = i ntruder al ti tude di spl ayed as absol ute
No. 4: (P1-51) Not used
No. 5 (P1-47) Seri al /
Paral l el Transponder Control
Sel ect
Open = Seri al control sel ected (CTL-92/92A or ARI NC 429)
Ground = Paral l el control sel ected (CTL-90)
No. 6: P1-24) Not used
Control Functi ons: The ai rpl ane manual shoul d reveal the control functi ons whi ch are acti ve
i n your i nstal l ati on. Most control functi ons are i ntended for use wi th a
paral l el ATC control head l i ke the CTL-90.
ATC SEL I N, No. 1
(P1-19) and No. 2 (P1-18)
P1-18 P1-19 ATC Acti ve or Standby
open open No. 1 & No. 2 i n standby
open gnd No. 1 i s acti ve
gnd gnd No. 1 i s acti ve
gnd open No. 2 i s acti ve
SW 28 V DC OUT No. 1
(P1-25)
Operabl e onl y on uni ts wi th OFF control swi tch posi ti on. Provi des
swi tched +28 V dc output when swi tch i s other than OFF; 1.5 A max, open
i n OFF posi ti on.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-22
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
CTL-
92T
di s-
cretes
and
etc
(cont
d)
Control Functi ons (contd):
Repl y Lamp Hi (P1-33) and
Lo (P1-41)
Provi des a constant +5 V dc hi gh and swi tched l ow output to dri ve the
CTL-90 repl y l amp. The l amp l i ghts whi l e the transponder i s repl yi ng to
i nterrogati ons.
ALT REP (Al ti tude
Reporti ng) (P1-20)
Provi des a swi tched l ow output to dri ve the CTL-90 al ti tude reporti ng
i ndi cator.
GRAY CODE TUNI NG
(From CTL-90)
These 12 l i nes are the Gray code tuni ng l i nes from the CTL-90. These
paral l el i nputs are transl ated i nto ARI NC 429 and become the l abel 031
tuni ng control output to the transponder (ARI NC TO XPDR), P1-5/4 and
P1-6/7.
SERI AL DATA
I NPUT/OUTPUT:
When used wi th the
CTL-92/92A ATC Control
I n thi s appl i cati on, the i nter-uni t communi cati on formats are:
To CTL-92/92A From CTL-92/92A To XPDR(s) From XPDR(s)
CSDB CSDB ARI NC 429 ARI NC 429
When used wi th the
CTL-90 ATC Control
I n thi s appl i cati on, the i nter-uni t communi cati on formats are:
To CTL-90 From CTL-90 To XPDR(s) From XPDR(s)
* ** ARI NC 429 ARI NC 429
* Data to the CTL-90 i s i n the form of di scretes:
Repl y l amp swi tchi ng
Al ti tude reporti ng l amp swi tchi ng
** Data from the CTL-90 i s i n the form of di scretes:
Test
I dent
ATC Sel ect, No. 1 and No. 2
Gray code
When used wi th an
ARI NC 429 Control
I n thi s appl i cati on, the i nter-uni t communi cati on formats are:
To ATC Control From ATC Control To XPDR(s) From XPDR(s)
ARI NC 429 ARI NC 429 ARI NC 429 ARI NC 429
I f al l tests passed successful l y, restore al l equi pment to i ts normal ground operati ng confi gurati on. Return
the test set to i ts normal storage l ocati on. Careful handl i ng and storage of al l ramp test equi pment prol ongs
the servi ce l i fe and reduces mai ntenance costs.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-23
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
RTU-
870-
A/T,
power
and
l i ght-
i ng
Use a mul ti meter at the fol l owi ng test panel test poi nts. Connect the
reference l ead to the appropri ate "L" test poi nt for power measurements, or
COMM (P1-53) for si gnal checks.
Di screte ON/OFF:
Connect meter + to
ON/OFF, meter - to 28 V
DC POWER I N L (No. 1
or No. 2)
Thi s i nput must be l ow (ground) to
enabl e the RTU. A cross-si de swi tch
may be used to sel ect to enabl e the uni t.
28 V dc power i nput:
Connect meter + to:
a. 28 V DC POWER
I N, NO. 1, H
b. 28 V DC POWER
I N, NO 2, H
+28 V dc 5 The No. 1 and No. 2 power
i nputs are combi ned (ord)
i nternal l y. Therefore, the
uni t wi l l operate on ei ther.
115 v ac l i ghti ng bus:
Connect meter + to 115 V
AC LI GHTI NG BUS H
and - to L.
115 V ac 15 Check 115 V ac l i ghti ng
suppl y
28 V dc di mmi ng i nput:
Connect meter + to DI M,
- to COMM
28 V dc 15, max, dependi ng on di m
control setti ng. I f di mmi ng i s manual l y
control l abl e, adjust the DI M control and
note that bri ghtness range appears
correct.
Check 28 V di mmi ng suppl y
RTU-
870-
A/T,
di sc-
retes
Di scretes: Note: Wi th the excepti on of ON/OFF,
those test poi nts l abel ed DI SCRETES
are al l strappi ng or swi tchi ng opti ons.
You wi l l need to check the ai rpl ane
manual to determi ne whi ch opti ons have
been sel ected. I n most cases, a hi gh
readi ng i s the resul t of an i nternal pul l -
up to + 12 V dc and i ndi cates the opti on
i s not sel ected or enabl ed.
X-SI DE Thi s i s an output to a cross-si de RTU A
l ow output i ndi cates the on-si de RTU i s
on. A hi gh (near + 12 V dc) i ndi cates the
cross-si de RTU i s enabl ed.
Check RTU
EDAT (Engi ne Data
Sel ect, RTU-870A onl y)
Thi s i s a reversi onary i nput from an
external swi tch. Thi s shoul d be l ow
(ground) when Engi ne Data i s sel ected
and hi gh (near +12 V dc) otherwi se.
Engi ne data i nformati on can be
moni tored at the ARI NC 429 ENGI NE
DATA No. 1 and No. 2, A/B test poi nts.
Check external swi tch or
RTU
MB (Marker Beacon
Sensi ti vi ty Sel ect)
Thi s i nput i s normal l y connected to an
external MKR BCN swi tch. I n the HI
(hi gh) posi ti on thi s i nput shoul d be hi gh.
I n the LO posi ti on thi s i nput shoul d be
l ow (ground).
Check external swi tch or
RTU.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-24
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
RTU-
870-
A/T,
di sc-
retes
(cont
d)
Di scretes (contd):
ATC 1 (transponder no.
1)
Thi s i nput i s normal l y connected to an
external ATC (sel ect) swi tch. A l ow
(near ground) i nput i ndi cates that
transponder no. 1 i s sel ected. A hi gh
(+12 V dc pul l -up) i ndi cates, no. 2 i s
sel ected.
Check external swi tch or
RTU.
RTU 2 A ground at thi s poi nt desi gnates thi s
RTU as the no. 2 (co-pi l ots) RTU. An
open (near +12 V dc) i s no. 1 (pi l ots
si de).
REM (remote) I f remote tuni ng i s avai l abl e, thi s pi n i s
used to enabl e the remote tune functi on.
The external REMOTE TUNE swi tch
suppl i es 28 V dc to thi s pi n when remote
tune i s enabl ed. A ground i ndi cates
di sabl e.
Check external swi tch or
RTU.
RTU-
870-
A/T,
Strap-
pi n
op-
ti ons
Strappi ng opti ons:
TST EN (Sel f test
enabl e)
A swi tched ground at thi s i nput causes
the RTU to turn on al l di spl ay segments
and i ndi cators (DME HOLD and
REPLY). I t al so transmi ts the fol l owi ng
data word on the ARI NC 429 data bus:
1. Di agnosti c l abel 350,
2. Di m bus word l abel 351, and
3. Sel f test word l abel 352 (RTU-870T
onl y). You wi l l need an ARI NC 429 bus
reader, connected to any one of the
ARI NC 429 OUT test jacks i f you want
to veri fy thi s.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
N TST (Nav test) A ground at thi s poi nt di sabl es the NAV
test functi on. "TEST" i s removed from
the VOR or MLS subpages.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
MLS 1 and MLS 2 A ground at these poi nts confi gures the
RTU to di spl ay MLS 1/2 on the top l i ne
of the mai n menu. Thi s i s used onl y on
i nstal l ati ons equi pment wi th a
mi crowave l andi ng system (or systems).
I f the i nstal l ed MLS i s on same si de as
the RTU, the MLS control words are
added to i ts ARI NC output bus and to
the top l i ne of the VOR subpage.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
5/ 5/ 1993 5-25
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
RTU-
870-
A/T
Strap-
pi n
op-
ti ons
(cont
d)
DME (No DME2) A ground at thi s poi nt causes the pi l ots
RTU to transmi t onl y the channel 1
ARI NC 429 tuni ng word to the DME. A
ground at thi s poi nt on the copi l ots RTU
causes that RTU to transmi t onl y the
channel 2 ARI NC 429 tuni ng word to the
DME. The copi l ots RTU transmi ts
channel 3 data onl y when the copi l ots
RTU recei ves channel 3 data from the
remote tuni ng source. Wi th thi s pi n at
ground, onl y SDI 01 i s transmi tted.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
ADF (No ADF 2) A ground at thi s poi nt i ndi cates there i s
no ADF on the copi l ots si de. Thi s
causes the RTU to transmi t tune data
onl y for the pi l ots ADF.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
UHF 1 (RTU-870T
onl y)
An open at thi s poi nt sel ects vhf 1
COMM 1 as the l eft-si de COMM. A
ground sel ects UHF 1 as the l eft si de
COMM.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
UHF 2 (RTU-870T
onl y)
Same as UHF 1 except as i t appl i es to
the copi l ots si de and no. 2 systems.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
TCN 1 (TACAN No. 1)
(RTU-870T onl y)
A ground at thi s poi nt sel ects the
TACAN transcei ver for the l eft-si de DME
transcei ver. TCN i s shown on the
di spl ay. An open sel ects the l eft-si de
DME transcei ver .
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
TCN 2 (TACAN No. 2)
(RTU-870T onl y)
Same as TCN 1 except as i t appl i es to
the copi l ots si de.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
TCAS (RTU-870T onl y) There shoul d be a ground at thi s poi nt i f
a TCAS i s i nstal l ed on thi s ai rpl ane.
Open i f no TCAS i s i nstal l ed.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
ADF X (ADF extended
frequency range) (RTU-
870T onl y)
A ground at thi s poi nt confi gures the
RTU to use the 2091 kHz ADF extended
tuni ng frequency range wi th or i n pl ace
of the 2081 kHz extended range.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
I NV TC (I nverse
TACAN) (RTU-870T
onl y)
A ground at thi s poi nt di sabl es the
i nverse TACAN functi on. An open
enabl es.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
C EXT (COMM
frequency extensi on)
A ground at thi s poi nt sel ects the
extended frequency range (above 135.95
MHz).
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
N EXT (NAV frequency
extensi on)
A ground at thi s poi nt enabl es the NAV
frequenci es up to 135.00 MHz.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
5/ 5/ 1993 5-26
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
RTU-
870-
A/T
Strap-
pi n
op-
ti ons
(cont
d)
A EXT (ADF frequency
extensi on)
A ground at thi s poi nt enabl es the ADF
emergency frequency, 2182 kHz.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng or
RTU
RTU-
870-
A/T
Data
Buses
Data Buses The RTU-870A/T can recei ve and
transmi t ARI NC 429 data on three data
buses, l abel ed A, B, and C. Thi s i s i n
addi ti on to the engi ne data i nput buses
descri bed bel ow. A data bus reader can
be used to read the data. Typi cal l abel s
seen here are (update rate):
016*: ATC mode S (5/s),
030: VHF COMM frequency (10/s),
031: ATC control code (5/s),
032: ADF tune frequency (5/s),
034: VHF NAV tune frequency (5/s),
035: DME tune frequency (30/s),
036: MLS channel echo (5/s),
051*: UHF frequency and control (5/s),
053*: TACAN tune frequency and
control (5/s),
154: MLS max sel ect GP angl e (5/s),
157: Basi c data word 2 (5/s),
166*: DPU mode W and 1 (5/s),
203: ATC al ti tude code (5/s),
254: FCC mode word 3 (10/s),
270: FMC mode (5/s),
301: VHF COMM frequency (burst),
302: VHF NAV frequency (burst),
303: DME frequency X3 (burst),
304: ADF frequency (burst),
305: ATC code (burst),
320*: Headi ng word,
376*: UHF frequency (burst), and
377*: TACAN channel (burst).
* = RTU-870T onl y
I f the i nstal l ati on i s non-
typi cal , consul t ai rpl ane
manual to determi ne the
buses acti ve and the
i nformati on that each can be
expected to reveal .
Engi ne Data Buses: Typi cal l y the l abel s seen here are
(update rate):
340: Torque (percent of max) (10/s),
344: Propel l er RPM (10/s),
345: I nner turbi ne temperature (10/s),
and
346: Turbi ne speed (percent of max i n
RPM) (10/s).
I f al l tests passed successful l y, restore al l equi pment to i ts normal ground operati ng confi gurati on. Return the test set
to i ts normal storage l ocati on. Careful handl i ng and storage of al l ramp test equi pment prol ongs the servi ce l i fe and
reduces mai ntenance costs.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-27
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
TTC-
920G,
power
and
l i ght-
i ng
Note: You can ski p any tests that have been performed earl i er as part of thi s test sequence.
Check the ai rpl ane manual to determi ne the strappi ng and swi tchi ng functi ons used i n your i nstal l ati on.
These procedures assume al l functi ons are acti ve whi ch may not be true i n al l cases. For exampl e, you wi l l
never fi nd an i nstal l ati on that uses both 28 V and 5 V l i ghti ng.
Power Test:
Connect mul ti meter to 115
VAC POWER I N, NO. 1 and
NO. 2 test poi nts.
Measure ai rcraft power at both sets of
test poi nts. Al l ow 10% tol erance.
Check ai rcraft power
source(s).
Li ghti ng and Di mmi ng
Control Test:
Connect mul ti meter to
LI GHTI NG power test poi nts;
ei ther 28V or 5 V, as
appl i cabl e. I f a manual
di mmi ng control i s used,
adjust i t.
Measure l i ghti ng power. Note that
di mmi ng control works and i ntensi ty
appears correct. Note that al l swi tch
and control l egends are properl y
i l l umi nated. I t may be necessary to
bl ock the cockpi t l i ght, especi al l y i f thi s
i s bei ng done outdoors.
Check l i ghti ng and di mmi ng
source. I f any l egends are
not properl y l i t, remove TTC
for bench repai r.
Moni tor Lamp Power test:
Connect mul ti meter (+) to
MON LMP PWR poi nt and (-)
to COMM (J1-6)
Measure the moni tor l amp power i nput.
Thi s may be 28 V or 12 V. Al l ow 10%
tol erance.
Check power source.
TTC-
920G,
man-
ual
con-
trol s,
tests
Sel f Test Swi tch tests:
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to SELF TEST,
(-) to COMM (J1-6).
Note an open when the swi tch i s not
pressed and a short when the swi tch i s
pressed.
Check TTC.
Faul t Moni tor Lamp Test
Swi tch tests:
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to MON,
(-) to COMM (J1-6).
Note an open when the swi tch i s not
pressed and a short when the swi tch i s
pressed.
Check TTC.
ANTENNA SELECT Swi tch
tests:
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to No. 1,
(-) to COMM (J1-6)
Note an open when the XPDR swi tch i s
at posi ti on 2 and a short when the
swi tch i s at posi ti on 1.
Check TTC.
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to No. 2,
(-) to COMM (J2-6)
Note an open when the XPDR swi tch i s
at posi ti on 1 and a short when the
swi tch i s at posi ti on 2.
Check TTC.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-28
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
TTC-
920G,
man-
ual
con-
trol s,
tests
(con-
td)
XPDR I N STBY Swi tch tests:
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to No. 1,
(-) to COMM (J1-6)
Note an open when the XPDR swi tch i s
at posi ti on 2 and a short when the
swi tch i s at posi ti on 1.
Check TTC.
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to No. 2,
(-) to COMM (J2-6)
Note an open when the XPDR swi tch i s
at posi ti on 1 and a short when the
swi tch i s at posi ti on 2.
Check TTC.
REP ALT SEL (Reporti ng
Al ti tude Sel ect) Swi tch tests:
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to NO. 1,
(-) to COMM (J1-6)
Note an open when the swi tch i s at
posi ti on 2 and a short when the swi tch i s
at posi ti on 1.
Check TTC.
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to NO. 2,
(-) to COMM (J2-6)
Note an open when the swi tch i s at
posi ti on 1 and a short when the swi tch i s
at posi ti on 2.
Check TTC.
TTC-
920G,
di sc-
retes
tests,
(con-
td)
AI R/GRD Tests:
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to NO. 1 I N,
(-) to COMM (J1-6)
(NO. 1 OUT i s i denti cal )
Note: Thi s i nput i s normal l y connected
to an ai rpl ane strut swi tch. Wi th wei ght
on wheel s thi s poi nt shoul d show a short
to chassi s ground (CHAS GND, J1-8 or
J2-8). I f thi s functi on has been defeated
for test purposes, i t shoul d show an
open.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng
Connect mul ti meter, set for
resi stance measurement:
(+) to NO. 2 I N,
(-) to COMM (J1-6)
(NO. 2 OUT i s i denti cal )
Note: Thi s i nput i s normal l y connected
to an ai rpl ane strut swi tch. Wi th wei ght
on wheel s thi s poi nt shoul d show a short
to chassi s ground. I f thi s functi on has
been defeated for test purposes, i t shoul d
show an open.
Check ai rpl ane wi ri ng
Transponder Fai l I /O Tests:
TTC-
920G,
Xpdr
fai l
warn
tests
Connect mul ti meter, set for dc
vol tage measurement:
(+) to TRANSPONDER FAI L,
1-I N, (-) to COMM (J1-6)
28 V dc at ei ther of these poi nts
i ndi cates that no detected fai l ure exi sts
i n the appl i cabl e transponder. I f thi s
vol tage i s l ow, you may need to use an
ARI NC 429 data bus reader to determi ne
the di agnosti c condi ti on - see Di agnosti c
Code Retri eval Procedures bel ow.
Note: Not al l di agnosti c
condi ti ons produce a fai l ure
warn (fl ag) output. Refer to
tabl es 5-3 and 5-4.
Connect mul ti meter, set for dc
vol tage measurement:
(+) to TRANSPONDER FAI L,
2-I N, (-) to COMM (J2-6)
Connect mul ti meter, set for dc
vol tage measurement:
(+) to TRANSPONDER FAI L,
OUT, (-) to COMM (J1-6)
Thi s i s an i nverted fai l ure warn output.
I f ei ther of the two transponder fai l
i nputs are l ow, thi s poi nt shoul d be hi gh.
I f both i nputs are hi gh, thi s poi nt shoul d
be l ow.
Check TTC.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-29
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
TTC-
920G,
data
bus
output
tests
Connect an ARI NC 429 bus
reader to the ARI NC 429
OUT NO. 1 jack. Sel ect
transponder no. 1.
Set the bus reader to read ARI NC 429
word l abel s 13, 15, or 16. The words are
defi ned as fol l ows:
Label 013:
Bi t(s) Defi ni ti on
0 - 7 Label (i n octal ): bi ts 0,1 = MSB, 2-4 = second di gi t, 5-7 = LSB,
8, 9 SDI (source desti nati on (or data) i denti fi er),
10 I ntruder al ti tude (ABS/REL), ABS = 1
11, 12 Al ti tude sel ect, bi ts 12/11: 00 = normal , 10 = above, 01 = bel ow, 11 = unrestri cted
13 Di spl ay: al l traffi c/threat traffi c, al l = 0
14 - 20 (not used)
21 - 28 TCAS range (see bel ow)
29, 30 SSM (see bel ow)
31 Pari ty bi t
Label 015:
Bi t(s) Defi ni ti on
0 - 7 Label (i n octal ): bi ts 0,1 = MSB, 2-4 = second di gi t, 5-7 = LSB,
8, 9 SDI (source desti nati on (or data) i denti fi er),
10 - 16 Al ti tude A l i mi ts (see ai rpl ane manual )
17 - 23 Al ti tude B l i mi ts (see ai rpl ane manual )
24 - 28 (not used)
29, 30 SSM (see bel ow)
31 Pari ty bi t
Label 016:
Bi t(s) Defi ni ti on
0 - 7 Label (i n octal ): bi ts 0,1 = MSB, 2-4 = second di gi t, 5-7 = LSB,
8, 9 SDI (source desti nati on (or data) i denti fi er),
10 Al ti tude reporti ng, on/off, 1 = off,
11 I dent mode
12, 13 Di spl ay control
14 - 16 Sensi ti vi ty control
17 - 19 Di gi t 4 code
20 - 22 Di gi t 3 code
23 - 25 Di gi t 2 code
26 - 28 Di gi t 1 code
29, 30 SSM (see bel ow)
31 Pari ty bi t
TCAS range bi t defi ni ti on:
bi t 21 = 0.5 nmi
bi t 22 = 1.0 nmi
bi t 23 = 2.0 nmi
bi t 24 = 4.0 nmi
bi t 25 = 8.0 nmi
bi t 26 = 16.0 nmi
bi t 27 = 32.0 nmi
bi t 28 = 64.0 nmi
SSM defi ni ti on (bi ts 30/29):
00 = normal operati on
01 = NCD (no computed data)
10 = Functi onal test
11 = Fai l ure warn
5/ 5/ 1993 5-30
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-5. Transponder System, FlightlineFault I solation Procedures.
TEST PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULT TROUBLESHOOTI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
TTC-
920G
(con-
td)
I f al l tests passed successful l y, restore al l equi pment to i ts normal ground operati ng confi gurati on. Return
the test set to i ts normal storage l ocati on. Careful handl i ng and storage of al l ramp test equi pment prol ongs
the servi ce l i fe and reduces mai ntenance costs.
Table5-6. Transponder System, Diagnostic Data Retrieval Procedures.
TEST NO and
DATA TI TLE
BUS READER, TX SETUP RESULTS and COMMENTS
1.0
I ntroducti on
Note: These procedures appl y onl y to i nstal l ati ons usi ng the CTL-92T or the RTU-870A/T.
Di agnosti c i nformati on i s avai l abl e onl y on the ARI NC 429 data bus. I nstal l ati ons usi ng a TTC-
920G or a CTL-90, do not return thi s bus to the control . I nstal l ati ons usi ng a CTL-92/92A onl y use
the CSDB bus whi ch does not carry di agnosti c data beyond the current di agnosti c code whi ch i s
di spl ayed on the CTL-92/92A duri ng sel f test. Refer to paragraph 5.5 for added i nformati on on
Di agnosti c Data Retri eval and I nterpretati on.
2.0 Setup These procedures use the same setup as used for the procedures i n tabl e 5-5, shown on fi gure 5-1.
I n al l cases, the XMT word l abel i s 277 and the response word l abel i s 351.
Note: Throughout these procedures be sure the SSM i s al ways set to 11. I f you are usi ng the
DataTrac 400/400H you need change onl y di gi ts 5 and 6 of the data fi el ds; di gi t 1 (e.g., the 6 i n step
3.0) i s al ways set automati cal l y. Thi s bi t i s set by data word bi ts 29 through 32. On the DataTrac
200 you set the SI fi el d. For the sake of si mpl i ci ty, the col umn headers are not shown on the
DataTrac di spl ay exampl es bel ow.
3.0 Soft-ware
Rev Status
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 00 00 00 00 FD 00 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 00 00000 00 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX, l abel 277:
E00000
Response form (data may di ffer):
DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
351 10 90 26 92 97 00 1 0100
DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 10 81348 00 1 0100
JcAI R 429E RX, l abel 351:
902692
Thi s shows a SRS = 10-26-92
4.0 Total Pwr-
On Cycl e
Counter
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 01 E0 00 01 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 01 00000 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX, l abel 277:
E00001
Si x-di gi t data fi el d di spl ays count i n deci mal
form.
DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
351 00 60 02 00 97 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 00 00100 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E RX, l abel 351:
600200
Thi s shows a POCC = 200.
5.0 Total
Faul t Counter
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 10 E0 00 02 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 10 00000 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX, l abel 277:
600002
Si x-di gi t data fi el d di spl ays count i n deci mal
form.
DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
351 00 60 02 08 97 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 00 00104 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E RX, l abel 351:
600208
Thi s shows a TFC = 208.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-31
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-6. Transponder System, Diagnostic Data Retrieval Procedures.
TEST NO and
DATA TI TLE
BUS READER, TX SETUP RESULTS and COMMENTS
6.0 Total
Pwr-on
Ti mer (Hrs)
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 11 60 00 03 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 11 00000 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX l abel 277:
600003
Si x-di gi t data fi el d di spl ays count i n deci mal
form.
DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
351 11 60 00 77 97 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 11 0003A 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E RX, l abel 351:
600077
Thi s shows a TPOTH = 77.
7.0 Total
Pwr-on
Ti mer (Mi n)
Note: I f you watch thi s data i tem for a mi nute or l ess you wi l l see the data i ncrement.
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 00 E0 00 04 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 00 00002 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX l abel 277:
600004
Si x-di gi t data fi el d di spl ays count i n deci mal
form.
DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
351 11 60 00 11 97 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 11 00008 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E RX, l abel 351:
600011
Thi s shows a TPOTM = 11.
8.0 Last Pwr-
on Cycl e
Faul t Cntr
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 01 60 00 05 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 01 00002 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX l abel 277:
600005
Si x-di gi t data fi el d di spl ays count i n deci mal
form.
DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
351 10 E0 00 02 97 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 10 00000 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E RX, l abel 351:
600002
Thi s shows a LPOCFC = 2.
9.0 Last
Mai ntenance
Date
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 11 60 00 07 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 11 00002 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX l abel 277:
600007
Si x-di gi t data fi el d di spl ays i n the form
MMDDYY.
Si x-di gi t data fi el d di spl ays count i n deci mal
form.
DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
351 11 E6 29 93 97 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 11 314C8 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E RX, l abel 351:
E62993
Thi s shows a LMD = 6-29-93 (June 29, 1993)
10.0 Last
Pwr-on
Cycl e Faul t
Data
Note: I n thi s sequence you must watch the l abel 351 word careful l y. The UUT may transmi t
several words, each wi th a di fferent di agnosti c code, at 5-second i nterval s. The fi rst transmi ssi on i s
the contents of the current Total Power-on Cycl e count buffer (see step 4.0; above). Thi s i s fol l owed,
i n 5-seconds i nterval s, wi th a transmi ssi on of each of the secondary di agnosti c codes encountered
duri ng the most recent power-on cycl e (auto sel f-test). Thi s sequence i s automati c and non-
i nterruptabl e. I f you are usi ng the JcAI R 429E, be prepared to wri te down the data as i t appears.
The DataTrac uni ts wi l l retai n the data. The fi nal l abel 351 word i s l i kel y to be a word si mi l ar to
XXXEOF whi ch transl ates i nto "End of Fi l e".
5/ 5/ 1993 5-32
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-6. Transponder System, Diagnostic Data Retrieval Procedures.
TEST NO and
DATA TI TLE
BUS READER, TX SETUP RESULTS and COMMENTS
10.0 Last
Pwr-on
Cycl e Faul t
Data (contd)
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 00 60 00 10 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 00 00008 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX, l abel 277:
600010
Si x-di gi t data fi el d di spl ays count i n deci mal
form.
DataTrac 400/400H RCV:
351 00 E0 02 00 97 11 1 6800
351 10 60 00 82 97 11 1 6800
351 11 E0 0E 0F 97 11 1 6800
DataTrac 200 RCV:
351 00 00100 11 1 4999
351 10 00040 11 1 4999
351 11 00706 11 1 4999
JcAI R 429E RX, l abel 351:
E00200
600082
E00E0F
11.0 Conti nue
(pri or)
Pwr-on
Cycl es Faul t
Data
Note: Thi s step can be seen as an extensi on of the previ ous step by retri evi ng di agnosti c data stored
duri ng earl i er power-on cycl es. Data del i very and i nterpretati on i s the same as step 10.0. The most
recent 16 power-on cycl e sequences are stored and are read by i ncrementi ng data fi el d bi t 6 (bi t 5 on
the DataTrac 200) 1 through F (Hex).
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 00 60 00 11 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 01 00008 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX, l abel 277:
600011
Same as step 10.0 except one set of data for
each i nterrogati on.
A conveni ent Record Chart i s provi ded,
fol l owi ng paragraph 5.5.14.2, for manual l y
enteri ng the data.
12.0 Fast
Data
Downl oad
Note: Thi s step i s for those wi th access to an automated means of requesti ng, capturi ng, and
anal yzi ng the data. Such faci l i ti es are avai l abl e from sources other than Col l i ns. For exampl e,
Atl anti c I nstruments suppl i es hardware and software, operati ng wi th the DataTrac 400/400H, for
automated downl oadi ng of the captured data on a PC for detai l ed anal ysi s and storage. For manual
(sl ower) data downl oad, use step 13.0 bel ow.
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 00 60 00 50 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 00 00028 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX, l abel 277:
600050
Refer to paragraph 5.5.13.2 for a detai l ed
descri pti on of the data that i s transmi tted
here. I f you are retri evi ng data manual l y,
e.g., wi th the JcAI R 429E, use step 13.0
i nstead. I n thi s step, step 12.0, the data i s
transmi tted to qui ckl y to be read manual l y.
See note bel ow.
13.0 Sl ow
Data
Downl oad
Note: Thi s step i s essenti al l y the same as the previ ous step, step 12.0. Here, however, the data
output rate i s sl ower; each sequence i s transmi tted for a 5-second peri od, separated by a break
transmi ssi on 0FFFFH.
Data request:
DataTrac 400/400H XMT:
277 00 60 00 51 FD 11 1 0100
DataTrac 200 XMT:
277 01 00028 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E TX, l abel 277:
600051
Same as step 12.0 except the data i s
transmi tted at 5--second i nterval .
Note: The DataTrac 400/400H uni ts have a Break Data Revi ew feature whi ch can be effecti vel y used here to capture
the data. Consul t the appl i cabl e manual for the necessary operati ng procedures.
Return the test set to i ts normal storage l ocati on. Careful handl i ng and storage of al l ramp test equi pment prol ongs
the servi ce l i fe and reduces mai ntenance costs.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-33
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.5 ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES
5.4.5.1 I ntroducti on
The Acceptance Test Procedures (ATP) shoul d
be used to veri fy that the equi pment i s
operati onal ; that no shi ppi ng damage has
occurred. Veri fyi ng equi pment operati on before
i nstal l ati on hel ps to i sol ate most probl ems
di scovered after i nstal l ati on. The procedures i n
thi s paragraph can al so be seen as a Return to
Servi ce Test (RTS). I n thi s scenari o a the
pi l ot compl ai nt and the fl i ghtl i ne test i s not
concl usi ve. Thus the uni t i s removed from an
ai rpl ane and tested on the bench to i sol ate a
mal functi on between the uni t or the ai rpl ane
i nstal l ati on. I f the uni t performs properl y on
the bench usi ng the RTS, i t can be returned to
servi ce. The procedures i n thi s paragraph
must not be seen as the equi val ent of a Fi nal
Performance Test (FPT). An FPT must be
performed after any repai r operati on and i s
consi derabl y more detai l ed than thi s ATP. The
FPT i s provi ded i n the TDR-94/94D Component
Mai ntenance Manual .
The procedures are provi ded i n four di fferent
procedures. The procedure chosen depends on
equi pment avai l abl e and on the extent to whi ch
testi ng i s to be performed. The fi rst procedure
uses the CTL-92/92A CSDB control and an
abbrevi ated versi on of the test panel . Thi s
procedure sati sfi es a mi ni mum l evel of
acceptance testi ng by veri fyi ng that the UUT i s
abl e to respond to CSDB tuni ng data and
report any i nternal di agnosti cs that may exi st.
The remai ni ng procedures uti l i ze the enhanced
versi on of test panel and provi de a greater l evel
of I /O testi ng capabi l i ty. These procedures
di ffer onl y i n the parti cul ar data bus anal yzer
bei ng used.
5.4.5.2 ATP Setup Descri pti on
Tabl e 5-7 i s a l i st of the equi pment requi red for
thi s ATP. The equi pment i ncl udes an I FR
ATC-601 Mode S Test Set. I f an other test set
i s used, you shoul d be sure that i t i s capabl e of
performi ng the tests as defi ned i n these
procedures and as l i sted i n paragraph 5.4.2.
The ri ght hand col umn i n tabl e 5-7 i denti fi es
the test panel requi red for the use of that TE
i tem. Panel A refers to the abbrevi ated
panel shown schemati cal l y i n fi gure 5-4.
Panel E i s the enhanced versi on shown i n
fi gures 5-3 and 5-5. TE i tems keyed A and
E can be used wi th ei ther panel . TE i tems
keyed A onl y can be used onl y wi th the
abbrevi ated versi on; i tems keyed E are for
use onl y on the enhanced versi on.
5.4.5.3 Test Panel Opti ons
Tabl e 5-7 shows two test panel s. Opti on
1A i s the enhanced versi on and wi l l al l ow
use of a databus reader and vari ous
control s and control si mul ators i n addi ti on
to a number of al ti tude sources. The
detai l s of thi s panel are i ncl uded i n
paragraph 5.8 Opti on 1B i s the
abbrevi ated versi on menti oned i n
paragraph 5.4.5.2. I t i s expected that the
abbrevi ated test panel i s assembl ed l ocal l y.
The enhanced versi on can al so be l ocal l y
assembl ed or purchased from a number of
suppl i ers. Those known suppl i ers are
i ncl uded i n the vendor l i sti ng i n tabl e 5-8.
The abbrevi ated test panel , when used wi th
the automati c test capabi l i ty of the ATC-
601, sati sfi es the requi rements of
ADVI SORY CI RCULAR NO 43.13-6A,
dated 11/11/77; Subject: Automati c
Pressure Al ti tude Encodi ng Systems and
Transponder Mai ntenance and I nspecti on
Practi ces. The I FR ATC-601 Test Set, or
equi val ent, can be used wi th ei ther of the
two panel versi ons.
I f you are usi ng a test panel bui l t accordi ng
to i nstructi ons i n an earl i er versi on of thi s
manual , i t may need to be updated. Refer
to paragraph 5.8.1 for update i nformati on.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-34
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-7. Equipment Required for ATP
I tem Manufacturer Mfg Part Number Purpose Panel
A/E
Test Panel
Opti on 1A
Local l y fabri cated See fi gure 5-3 and 5-5 To i nterconnect
equi pment for ATP
E
Test Panel
Opti on 1B
Local l y fabri cated See fi gure 5-4 To i nterconnect
equi pment for ATP
A
ATC/Mode S Test
Set
I FR Systems, I nc.
Wi chi ta, KS
ATC-601 For rf testi ng A,E
ARI NC Bus Reader
Opti on 2A
Atl anti c I nstr.
Mel bourne, FL
DataTrac 200, Data Trac
400, or DataTrac 400H
For bus moni tor and
si mul ati on
E
ARI NC Bus Reader
Opti on 2B
JcAI R
I ndustri al Ai rport, KS
429E ARI NC 429
Transmi tter /Recei ver
For bus moni tor and
si mul ati on
E
Transponder
Control
Opti on 3A
Col l i ns CTL-92 or CTL-92A
Transponder Control
Transponder control A,E
I nterconnect cabl e
for opti on 3A
Same as test panel See fi gure 5-6 For CTL-92/92A
i nterface to test panel
A,E
Transponder
Control
Opti on 3B
Col l i ns RTU-870A or RTU-870T
Radi o Tuni ng Uni t
Transponder or
transponder/TCAS
control
E
I nterconnect cabl e
for opti on 3B
Same as test panel See fi gure 5-7 For RTU-870/870A
i nterface to test panel
E
Transponder
Control Opti on 3C
Col l i ns TTC-920G TCAS /
Transponder Control
Transponder control E
I nterconnect cabl e
for opti on 3C
Same as test panel See fi gure 5-8 For TTC-920G i nterface
to test panel
E
RF l oad Omni -Spectra 3101-6100-00 RF termi nati on of
unused antenna port
A,E
I nterconnect cabl es
for Bus Readers
and control
si mul ators
Local l y fabri cated or the
same as test panel
See fi gure 5-9 To connect bus reader
and control /al ti tude
si mul ator to test panel
E
28 V dc power
suppl y
any 5 A mi ni mum capabi l i ty For test setup power A,E
Scope any any For suppressi on test A,E
Table 5-8. Equipment Suppliers
Suppl i er Address Product
I FR Systems, I nc. 10200, West York Street
Wi chi ta, KS 67215
ATC-601 Ramp Test Set
Atl anti c I nstruments, I nc. P.O. Box 021466
Mel bourne,FL 32902
DataTrac 400 DataTrac 400H and
DataTrac 200 Databus Anal yzers
JcAI R 400 I ndustri al Parkway,
I ndustri al Ai rport, KS 66031
AcceptanceTest Panel , Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel ,
and 429E ARI NC 429 Transmi tter/Recei ver
Avi oni cs Speci al i st, I nc 3833 Premi er Ave.
Memphi s, TN 38118
Acceptance Test Panel and Fl i ghtl i ne Test
Panel
5/ 5/ 1993 5-35
maintenance 523-0775657
The enhanced versi on of test panel , al so
sati sfi es these requi rements, and offers
addi ti onal capabi l i ti es for more compl ete I /O
testi ng as fol l ows:
Gi l l ham al ti tude si mul ati on,
Gi l l ham al ti tude swi tchi ng for di rect or
through CTL testi ng,
Mode S address code sel ecti on,
Control type sel ecti on,
Control i nput port sel ecti on,
Di gi tal al ti tude type sel ecti on; ARI NC 429,
ARI NC 575, or CSDB,
TCAS i /o bus veri fi cati on,
Di gi tal al ti tude and control port sel ecti on,
Manual i dent,
Crossfeed swi tchi ng,
Si de 1/Si de 2 swi tchi ng,
Output port sel ecti on, and
Use of a data bus anal yzer.
The control i nterface cabl es, shown i n fi gures
5-6, 5-7, and 5-8 can be used wi th ei ther panel .
5.4.5.4 Control Panel Opti ons
Some type of transponder control i s requi red
wi th ei ther test panel . The abbrevi ated versi on
uses the CTL-92/92A Control . The enhanced
versi on can use any of the currentl y avai l abl e
control s or a si mul ator. I f you have a databus
recei ver/transmi tter, l i ke the DataTrac 400,
DataTrac 400H, or DataTrac 200, by Atl anti c
I nstruments, i t can be used to si mul ate an
ARI NC 429 control . The DataTrac 200 can
al so si mul ate a CSDB control . I f you pl an to
used the TTC-920G TCAS control , be aware
that i t requi res 115 Vac, 400 Hz, power whi ch
i s not provi ded i n the test panel . The
i nterconnect cabl e, fi gure 5-8, has a patch
provi si on for 115 Vac power i nput. Tabl e 5-8 i s
a l i sti ng of suppl i ers for the vari ous test
equi pment i tems as wel l as the test panel .
5.4.5.5 Gi l l ham Code Si mul ator
The TDR-94/94D Mode S Transponder
Acceptance Test Panel used here i ncl udes a
bui l t-i n Gi l l ham code (ARI NC 572)
si mul ator. The Gi l l ham Code Al ti tude
Tests i n thi s secti on i ncl ude a l i sti ng of a
number of al ti tudes and correspondi ng
Gi l l ham code swi tch setti ngs. Set the
correspondi ng swi tch down (SEL) for an
acti ve code sel ecti on, and set the swi tch up
(OFF) for an i nacti ve sel ecti on.
5.4.5.6 ATC Setup Descri pti on
I f you are usi ng thi s setup for the fi rst
ti me, check that 28 vol ts appears onl y on
the correct pi ns. Use the schemati c
di agram shown i n fi gure 5-4 or 5-5 as
appl i cabl e to the panel you are usi ng.
WARNING: Do not use a standard
mul ti meter probe when maki ng conti nui ty
tests to the ProLi ne I I UUT mati ng
connector. These types of probes have been
known to cause the contact forks to break
resul ti ng i n unrel i abl e operati on. I t i s far
better to fabri cate one or two test probes
usi ng a short l ength of fl exi bl e 22 or 26
AWG wi re, termi nated at one end wi th a
mati ng bl ade contact l i ke those used i n the
UUT connector. Termi nate the other end
wi th a smal l al l i gator cl i p or ti p jack to
connect to the mul ti meter l ead.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-36
maintenance 523-0775657
I nterconnect the equi pment as shown i n fi gure
5-2. The data bus readers are not used wi th
the abbrevi ated test panel . Be sure that the rf
connecti ons to the antenna connectors are ful l y
i nserted and that the i /o mati ng connectors are
fi rml y seated before appl yi ng power.
Termi nate the unused antenna port wi th a
TNC 50 rf termi nati on as i denti fi ed i n tabl e
5-1 and tabl e 5-7.
Turn on the ATC-601 Test Set, or equi val ent,
and exerci se the sel f test routi ne. I f the test
set i s operati onal conti nue wi th the test.
Otherwi se, repai r the test set.
I f you are usi ng the test panel shown on fi gure
5-5, set the swi tches as fol l ows: The
abbrevi ated panel has onl y the UUT POWER
and EXT STBY swi tches. I f you are usi ng a
test panel bui l t accordi ng to i nstructi ons i n an
earl i er versi on of thi s manual , i t may requi re
modi fi cati on. Refer to paragraph 5.8.1.
SWI TCH POSI TI ON
UUT POWER: OFF
EXT STBY: STBY
XFEED: OUT
SELF TEST: EN
TCAS/NO TCAS: NO TCAS
SDI : SI DE 1
AI R: AI R
ANT: DL
AUTO ALT: OFF
REP ALT SEL: PA
DATA LI NK SEL: A/B
BURST TUNE: OFF
DATALI NK: NO ADLP
CONTROL DATA SELECT:
ARI NC PORT: PA
OUTPUT PORT SELECT:
ARI NC 429 PORT
A
ARI NC 572 ALT I N: TO TDR
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARI NC 429
SOURCE SELECT: SEL
ARI NC 572 ALT I N: TO TDR
Gi l l ham Code swi tches:
Al l OFF except C2 and B1 to SEL (2,
500 ft)
MAX AI RSPEED: Al l OFF
MODE S ADDRESS SELECT: Al l OFF
except: P1-35, 36, 37, 39, 41, 42, 46, 51, 56.
(Hex code: 3AC421, Octal : 16542041)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-37
maintenance 523-0775657
Acceptance Test, Test Setup Diagram
Figure 5-2
6/ 15/ 1995 5-38
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.5.7 Mi ni mum Acceptance Test, Usi ng a
CSDB Control and the Abbrevi ated Test
Panel
The procedures i n tabl e 5-9 use a CSDB control
l i ke the CTL-92/92A to provi de transponder
control and the abbrevi ated versi on of test
panel for equi pment i nterconnecti on.
Successful compl eti on of these procedures
veri fi es the performance of the UUT by
provi di ng reasonabl e assurance of the
functi onal i ntegri ty of the transmi tter,
recei ver, the CSDB control i nput, and
i nternal data handl i ng.
Table 5-9. MinimumAcceptance Test Procedures, Using a CSDB Control
and the Abbreviated Test Panel
STEP TI TLE PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULTS
1.0 Setup I f not al ready done, connect equi pment as shown i n fi gure 5-2.
Connect the CTL-92/92A usi ng the cabl e shown i n fi gure 5-6.
Connect the ATC-601 (or equi val ent) to the UUT bottom antenna connector.
Connect and rf termi nati on to the top antenna connector.
Connect power to the power jacks - observe proper pol ari ty.
Be sure POWER swi tch i s OFF and EXT STBY swi tch i s at STBY.
The bus reader i s not needed i n thi s setup.
2.0 I ni ti al
Test
Power appl i cati on
Set test panel POWER swi tch to ON
Set CTL to any val i d ATC code; e.g. 1234
Set CTL swi tch to STBY ATC-601 REPLY l amp i s off; no repl i es.
Set CTL swi tch to OPR No change.
Set EXT STBY swi tch to OPR ATC-601 REPLY l amp l i ghts; UUT i s repl yi ng
to the i nterrogati ons.
3.0 UUT Sel f
Test
Press the TEST button; ei ther on the test
panel or on the CTL.
Noti ce any di agnosti c code that may be di spl ayed on the CTL. I f diAG and a di agnosti c code i s
di spl ayed, refer to tabl e 5-3 and 5-4 for an i nterpretati on. I f a code from 10 to 70 (i ncl usi ve),
C(), or D0 i s di spl ayed, the UUT shoul d be rejected. Any other code may not be i ndi cati ve of
an equi pment fai l ure but rather the resul t of an i nacti ve data bus. As a general rul e i n testi ng
a UUT wi th CPN endi ng i n -002, those di agnosti c condi ti ons accompani ed by an exti ngui shed
FLT MON (faul t moni tor) l amp on test panel , shoul d be seen as cause for uni t rejecti on.
Others may be the resul t of the an i ncompl ete equi pment compl ement and may not be
i ndi cati ve of an equi pment fai l ure.
4.0 Test Set,
Auto Test
Fol l ow the i nstructi ons i n the Test Set
operati on manual for the Auto Test mode and
execute the test.
Ensure that al l tests pass. See note bel ow.
Set the test panel POWER swi tch to Off
Swi tch the RF connector on the UUT from top
to bottom (or bottom to top)
Repeat the Auto Test sequence. Ensure that al l tests pass. See note bel ow.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-39
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-9. MinimumAcceptance Test Procedures, Using a CSDB Control
and the Abbreviated Test Panel (Cont).
STEP TI TLE PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULTS
Thi s compl etes the mi ni mum test requi rement.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note. The AUTO TEST sequence wi l l i ndi cate FAILED even when certai n tests resul t i n a NO REPLY condi ti on. The NO
REPLY condi ti ons are the resul t of no ADLP (Ai rborne Data Li nk Processor) data bei ng suppl i ed i n thi s setup. Thi s
same condi ti on i s l i kel y to occur when usi ng the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testi ng an i nstal l ati on not equi pped
wi th an ADLP. I t i s al so possi bl e that the AUTO TEST fai l s because the UUT sensi ti vi ty i s more than -77.0 dBm. I f you
fi nd thi s to be the case, recogni ze that Col l i ns prefers that a sensi ti vi ty (MTL) greater than 77.0 be seen as acceptabl e.
Obvi ousl y, an MTL approachi ng -80 dBm tends to i ndi cate a probl em wi th test equi pment cal i brati on. To veri fy that
the test can be seen as successful , proceed as fol l ows:
When the test sequence i s compl eted and the ATC-601 stops (as i ndi cated by no INTERR l amp off, you wi l l see a
screen as fol l ows:
** AUTO TEST - FAILED **
MODES TESTED - A,C,S FREQ: 1089.92 MHz
MODES PASSED - A,C.S ERP: 55 dBm
MODES FAILED - -> MTL: -77 dBm
DIVERSITY ISOLATION: >40 dB
Press RUN to start
Veri fy the test resul ts as fol l ows:
Use the SELECT up arrow or down arrow key to scrol l through the fol l owi ng l i st of tests performed. I f you use the up
arrow, you wi l l see the sequence as l i sted from top to bottom. I f you use the down arrow, you wi l l see the sequence i s
reverse order.
1. ** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED **
2. ** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED **
3. ** FREQUENCY TEST - PASSED **
4. ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
5. ** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY **
6. ** MODE S UF20 TEST - NO REPLY **
7. ** MODE S UF16 TEST - NO REPLY **
8. ** MODE S UF11 TEST - PASSED **
9. ** MODE S UF5 TEST - PASSED **
10. ** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
11. ** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **
12. ** SPR ON/OFF TEST - PASSED **
13. ** INVALID ADDRESS TEST - PASSED **
14. ** MODE S ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
15. ** ATC ONLY ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
16. ** SLS LEVEL TEST - PASSED **
17. ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - PASSED **
18. ** REPLY JITTER TEST - PASSED **
19. ** REPLY DELAY TEST - PASSED **
At thi s poi nt, another press of the arrow key wi l l redi spl ay the fi rst i tem; ei ther 1. or 19., dependi ng whi ch arrow was
used.
I n each case, the screen al so shows the parti cul ar test parameter and the test resul t. I f the test has fai l ed, thi s val ue
can be compared to the requi red val ue to gai n more defi ni ti ve i nsi ght i nto the reason for the fai l ure.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-40
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.5.8 Mi ni mum Acceptance Test, Usi ng
a ARI NC 429 Control and the Abbrevi ated
Test Panel
The procedures i n tabl e 5-10 use an ARI NC
429 control l i ke the RTU-870A/T to provi de
transponder control and the abbrevi ated
versi on of test panel for equi pment
i nterconnecti on. Successful
compl eti on of these procedures veri fi es the
performance of the UUT by provi di ng
reasonabl e assurance of the functi onal
i ntegri ty of the transmi tter, recei ver, the
ARI NC 429 control i nput, and i nternal data
handl i ng.
Table 5-10. MinimumAcceptance Test Procedures, Using an ARINC 429 Control
and the Abbreviated Test Panel
STEP TI TLE PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULTS
1.0 Setup I f not al ready done, connect equi pment as shown i n fi gure 5-2.
Connect the ARI NC 429 control usi ng the cabl e shown i n fi gure 5-7 or 5-8.
Connect the ATC-601 (or equi val ent) to the UUT bottom antenna connector.
Connect and rf termi nati on to the top antenna connector.
Connect power to the power jacks - observe proper pol ari ty.
Be sure POWER swi tch i s OFF and EXT STBY swi tch i s at STBY.
The bus reader i s not needed i n thi s setup.
2.0 I ni ti al
Test
Power appl i cati on
Set test panel POWER swi tch to ON
Set CTL to any val i d ATC code; e.g. 7777
Set CTL swi tch to STBY ATC-601 REPLY l amp i s off; no repl i es.
Set CTL swi tch to OPR No change.
Set EXT STBY swi tch to OPR ATC-601 REPLY l amp l i ghts; UUT i s repl yi ng
to the i nterrogati ons.
3.0 UUT Sel f
Test
Press the TEST button; ei ther on the test
panel or on the control .
Noti ce any di agnosti c code that may be di spl ayed. I f a di agnosti c code i s di spl ayed, refer to
tabl e 5-3 and 5-4 for an i nterpretati on. I f a code from 10 to 70 (i ncl usi ve), C(), or D0 i s
di spl ayed, the UUT shoul d be rejected. Any other code may not be i ndi cati ve of an equi pment
fai l ure but rather the resul t of an i nacti ve data bus. As a general rul e i n testi ng a UUT wi th
CPN endi ng i n -002, those di agnosti c condi ti ons accompani ed by an exti ngui shed FLT MON
(faul t moni tor) l amp on test panel , shoul d be seen as cause for uni t rejecti on. Others may be
the resul t of the an i ncompl ete equi pment compl ement and may not be i ndi cati ve of an
equi pment fai l ure.
4.0 Test Set,
Auto Test
Fol l ow the i nstructi ons i n the Test Set
operati on manual for the Auto Test mode and
execute the test.
Ensure that al l tests pass. See note bel ow.
Set the test panel POWER swi tch to Off
Swi tch the RF connector on the UUT from top
to bottom (or bottom to top)
Repeat the Auto Test sequence. Ensure that al l tests pass. See note bel ow.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-41
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-10. MinimumAcceptance Test Procedures, Using an ARINC 429 Control
and the Abbreviated Test Panel (Cont).
STEP TI TLE PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULTS
Thi s compl etes the mi ni mum test requi rement.
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Note. The AUTO TEST sequence wi l l i ndi cate FAILED even when certai n tests resul t i n a NO REPLY condi ti on. The NO
REPLY condi ti ons are the resul t of no ADLP (Ai rborne Data Li nk Processor) data bei ng suppl i ed i n thi s setup. Thi s
same condi ti on i s l i kel y to occur when usi ng the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testi ng an i nstal l ati on not equi pped
wi th an ADLP. I t i s al so possi bl e that the AUTO TEST fai l s because the UUT sensi ti vi ty i s more than -77.0 dBm. I f you
fi nd thi s to be the case, recogni ze that Col l i ns prefers that a sensi ti vi ty (MTL) greater than 77.0 be seen as acceptabl e.
Obvi ousl y, an MTL approachi ng -80 dBm tends to i ndi cate a probl em wi th test equi pment cal i brati on. To veri fy that
the test can be seen as successful , proceed as fol l ows:
When the test sequence i s compl eted and the ATC-601 stops (as i ndi cated by no INTERR l amp off, you wi l l see a
screen as fol l ows:
** AUTO TEST - FAILED **
MODES TESTED - A,C,S FREQ: 1089.92 MHz
MODES PASSED - A,C.S ERP: 55 dBm
MODES FAILED - -> MTL: -77 dBm
DIVERSITY ISOLATION: >40 dB
Press RUN to start
Veri fy the test resul ts as fol l ows:
Use the SELECT up arrow or down arrow key to scrol l through the fol l owi ng l i st of tests performed. I f you use the up
arrow, you wi l l see the sequence as l i sted from top to bottom. I f you use the down arrow, you wi l l see the sequence i s
reverse order.
1. ** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED **
2. ** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED **
3. ** FREQUENCY TEST - PASSED **
4. ** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
5. ** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY **
6. ** MODE S UF20 TEST - NO REPLY **
7. ** MODE S UF16 TEST - NO REPLY **
8. ** MODE S UF11 TEST - PASSED **
9. ** MODE S UF5 TEST - PASSED **
10. ** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
11. ** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **
12. ** SPR ON/OFF TEST - PASSED **
13. ** INVALID ADDRESS TEST - PASSED **
14. ** MODE S ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
15. ** ATC ONLY ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
16. ** SLS LEVEL TEST - PASSED **
17. ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - PASSED **
18. ** REPLY JITTER TEST - PASSED **
19. ** REPLY DELAY TEST - PASSED **
At thi s poi nt, another press of the arrow key wi l l redi spl ay the fi rst i tem; ei ther 1. or 19., dependi ng whi ch arrow was
used.
I n each case, the screen al so shows the parti cul ar test parameter and the test resul t. I f the test has fai l ed, thi s val ue
can be compared to the requi red val ue to gai n more defi ni ti ve i nsi ght i nto the reason for the fai l ure.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-42
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.5.9 Procedures usi ng the DataTrac 400 or DataTrac 400H Databus Anal yzer
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
1.0 Setup Note: If you are using a Test Panel built according to instruction provided in a previous edition of this
manual, it may be necessary to upgrade the panel. Refer to paragraph the Special Tools and Fixture
Section.
If not already done, connect equipment as shown in figure 5-2.
Connect DATATRAC as follows using cables shown in figure 5-9.
XMT 1 to test panel DIGITAL CONTROL port,
Parallel connect XMT 1 to test panel PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE PORT,
RCV 1 to test panel DATA BUS READER port.
Connect the ATC-601 to the UUT bottom antenna connector.
Connect an rf termination to the TOP antenna port.
Connect power to test panel power jacks - observe proper polarity.
Preset the switches as shown in paragraph 5.4.4 above. Be sure POWER switch is OFF and EXT
STBY switch is at STBY.
On test panel, set the MODE S ADDRESS switches to any combination except all OFF or all to SEL.
If all switches are set OFF or all set SEL, a diagnostic code FF will result.
1.1 Setup Turn the DATATRAC ( ) on and set the
RCV 1, and XMT 1 screen ----->
(See notes 1 and 2 that follow test step
1.2)
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
... no data present ...
-ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0100
Turn on
TDR-94/94D
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
Monitor current. If OK:
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
Monitor current.
If the unit has been in service and there is a possibility of
an over-current condition, monitor the power supply
current output. The setup should draw no more than 1.5
A. Typically it draws about 0.9 to 1.1 A when the UUT is
transmitting.
Setup
(power-up)
Turn the ATC-601 on and press SELECT
for the screen -------------->
See Note in next cell below.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - NOT RUN **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
1.2 ARINC 429
tuning test
On the ATC-601, press RUN
ATC-601 screen --------->
Note: When power is applied and proper
control data is supplied, the TDR-94/94D
should turn on the XFEED OUT lamp
almost immediately. The FAULT MON
lamp may be off for a few seconds and
then turn on. A lighted FAULT MON lamp
should generally be seen as a no-fault
indication. See table 5-3.
UUT responds to interrogations as indicated by a lighted
XFEED OUT lamp on the test panel and a lighted REPLY
lamp on the ATC-601.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
To change the CODE, see note 1 below.
To change the ALT, see note 2 below.
The DATATRAC ( ) RCV 1 display
becomes --------->
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0200
031 01 F5 66 81 98 00 1 0200
350 01 60 00 01 17 11 1 0200
... no data present ...
Note: Any other labels displayed are irrelevant to this
test. Use the down arrow key to scroll the display. See
Note 3 below.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-43
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
Note 1. You can change the (octal) CODE=XXXX display by changing data bits 18 through 29 in the label 031 data word (XMT 1
field of the DATATRAC ( )) as follows:
ATC-601 digit: First Second Third Fourth
Bit: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Data: Par SSM |<-----Data -------> ----->| Pad
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
DATATRAC (Hex): | 1 | | 5 | | 6 | | 6 |
Binary: 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Octal value: 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Produces CODE: 5 2 6 3
Bits 11 through 17, of the label 031 control word, are assigned the following functions:
DATATRAC Hex bits: 5th 6th
Bit: 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Bit values: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| | | | Pad | |<- |<--SDI
Assignment: Pad Pad | | |<--Altitude reporting, 1 = OFF
| |<--Ident, 1 = ON
|<--Altitude port select, 1 = B
Note 2: You can set the XMT 1 label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV 1 label 203
word data field will reflect the XMT 1 word while the ATC-601 will show the altitude to the nearest 100 feet. The label 203
word data bit values are as follows:
DATATRAC Hex *: | 2nd | | 3rd |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Alt value:(sign bit; 0 = +) 65536 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512
(in feet)
DATATRAC Hex *: | 4th | | 5th | | 6th |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09
Alt value 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ** ** **
(in feet)
Determine the altitude by totaling the bit value of all bits set to 1.
* The left-most Hex Data bit (bit 1) is determined by the parity bit 32, the SSM bits 31 and 30, and sign bit 29. Since bit 29
must always be a 0, this Hex bit must always be an odd number. The right-most bits (bits 7 and 8) are determined by the
label. **= Not used
Note 3: You will see a label 371 data word. This is the ARINC 429 Specific Equipment Identification word which is
structured the same as other ARINC 429 words but conveys the following information:
Bits 11 through 18 identify the equipment type. The code for ATC transponders is 18 therefore bits 14 and 15 are 1; the
others are 0. Bits 19 through 24 convey a binary code identifying the equipment manufacturer. Collins is 6. Therefore bits
20 and 21 are 1; all others are 0. Bits 24 through 29 are reserved for purposes to be defined.
When ARINC 572 altitude data is active, you will see a label 200 data word. This word reflects the ARINC 572 (Gillham code)
altitude data. This word is structured the same as other ARINC 429 words, except bits 9 and 10 are part of the data field; i.e.,
there is no SDI. Bits 9,10, and 11 reflect the D1, D2, and D4 code bits respectively. Bits 13, 14, and 15 reflect the C-bits,
bits 17, 18, and 19 reflect the B-bits, and 21, 22, and 23 reflect the A-bits.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-44
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
2.0 Test set, Auto
Test
On ATC-601:
Press RUN/STOP to stop
Press AUTO TEST
Press RUN to start
Note: This test requires a few
seconds to run. It will stop
automatically.
Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
On UUT:
Move the test set rf cable to the UUT top antenna connector and the rf termination to the
bottom.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
On ATC-601:
Repeat the AUTO TEST
Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
Note. The AUTO TEST sequence will indicate FAILED even when certain tests result in a NO REPLY condition. The NO REPLY
conditions are the result of no ADLP (Airborne Data Link Processor) data in this setup. This same condition is likely to occur
when using the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testing an installation not equipped with an ADLP. To verify that the test can
be seen as successful, proceed as follows:
When the test sequence is completed and the ATC-601 stops, as indicated by INTERR and REPLY lamps off, you will likely
see a screen as follows:
** AUTO TEST - FAILED **
MODES TESTED - A,C,S FREQ: 1089.92 Mhz
MODES PASSED - A,C,S ERP: 55 Dbm
MODES FAILED - -> MTL: -77 Dbm
DIVERSITY ISOLATION: >40 dB
Press RUN to start
(The FREQ, ERP, and MTL val ues can vary from UUT to UUT and to a l esser degree on UUT temperature.)
Veri fy the test resul ts as fol l ows:
On the ATC-601, use the SELECT 6th up arrow or down arrow key to scroll through the following list of tests performed; the
numbers are for reference purposes only and do not appear on the test set screen. If you use the down arrow, you will see
the list in the order shown; from test 1 through test 19. If you use the up arrow key, you will see the list in reverse order,
starting at test 19. You will likely notice that all tests passed except tests 13, 14, and 15 which had a NO REPLY.
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
1.0
** REPLY DELAY TEST - PASSED ** MODE S: 128.00 (0.25) s
ITM A: 128.00 (0.25) s
(All others): 3.00 (0.50) s
2.0
** REPLY JITTER TEST - PASSED ** MODE S: =< 0.05 s
ITM: =< 0.06 s
(All others): =< 0.1 s
3.0
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - PASSED ** F1 TO F2 SPACING: 20.3 (0.1) s
All PULSE WIDTH: 0.45 (0.1) s
6/ 15/ 1995 5-45
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
4.0
** SLS LEVEL TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with F2 (SLS) pulse at 9 dB below F1.
UUT should reply to this interrogation. Then UUT is
interrogated with F2 equal to F1. UUT should not reply.
PASSED indicates correct response to both tests.
5.0
** ATC ONLY ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
The TDR-94/94D should not reply to this mode a and mode
c only interrogation. PASSED indicates a correct (NO)
response.
6.0
** MODE S ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
The TDR-94/94D should reply to this interrogation. PASSED
indicates a correct response. UUT address previously
determined in mode s interrogation, is sent to UUT in UF4
(Uplink Format 4) and verified in DF4 (Downlink Format 4)
reply.
7.0
** INVALID ADDRESS TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with two addresses, both of which are
different from the correct address. PASSED indicates UUT
did not reply to interrogation.
8.0
** SPR ON/OFF TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated first with SPR ON and verifies a proper
reply, then with SPR OFF and verifies no reply. PASSED
indicates UUT responded correctly.
9.0
** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with mode S UF0, verifying correct
altitude as compared to previous mode c reply, correct
address as compared to DF11 address, and correct format.
PASSED indicates correct UUT response.
10.0
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF4, verifying correct altitude as
compared to previous mode c reply, correct address as
compared to DF11 reply, and correct format. PASSED
indicates correct UUT response.
11.0
** MODE S UF5 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF5, verifying the correct ID code
as compared to previous mode a reply, correct address as
compared to DF11 reply, and correct format. PASSED
indicates correct UUT response.
12.0
** MODE S UF11 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF11, verifying correct address as
compared to previous response, and correct format.
PASSED indicates correct UUT response.
13.0
** MODE S UF16 TEST - NO REPLY **
(See test 15.)
14.0
** MODE S UF20 TEST - NO REPLY **
(See test 15.)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-46
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
15.0
** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY **
UUT is interrogated with UF16, UF20, and UF21.
These formats are all related to the airborne data link
function. This function has not been implemented.
The TDR-94/94D will not reply to these interrogation
formats. NOT REPLY should not be seen as a failure.
16.0
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
When set for dual antenna operation, the TDR-94D
transmits a squitter pulse once each second, alternating
between top and bottom antenna ports. The ATC-601
verifies that one squitter pulse is received every 1.6 to
2.4 seconds. The test panel ANT SGL/DL switch must
be in the DL position. When set for single antenna
operation, or when testing a TDR-94, only the bottom
antenna port is used. In this case the ATC-601 verifies
that one squitter pulse is received every 0.6 to 1.4
seconds. When you change the ANT SGL/DL switch,
you must cycle power to the UUT in order for it to take
effect. PASSED indicates a correct UUT response.
17.0
** FREQUENCY TEST - PASSED **
Freq: 1090 (1) MHz
18.0
** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED **
ATC-601 monitors squitter pulses on active antenna
port (as in test 16) and then monitors for intervening
squitter pulses that are not greater than 20 dB below
the active squitter. This test will always fail when the
UUT is a TDR-94 (non diversity) because squitter is
transmitter every second on the same antenna port. If
you are testing a TDR-94D and the DL ANT/SGL ANT
switch is set to SGL ANT, the test will also fail because
this causes the unit to operate like a TDR-94. PASSED
indicates a correct response from a TDR-94D.
19.0
** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED **
ATC-601 verifies that the MTL difference between mode
a and mode c responses is < 1.0 dB. At this point,
another press of the arrow key will display the first item;
either 1.0 or 18.0, depending on which arrow was used.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-47
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
3.0 Power
output and
Rcvr
Sensi-tivity
Test
On test panel select:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
On ATC-601:
Select POWER TEST
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING ----
--->
** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
ANTENNA UNITS ERP MTL STATUS
NO REPLY
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: If necessary, press SELECT (or SLEW) to select Top Antenna. Be sure that the ATC-601 rf
cable is connected to the top antenna port and the rf termination is connected to the bottom port.
On DATATRAC ( ): set screen ------>
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
... no data present ...
-ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0100
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
After a few seconds, the ATC-601
shows ---->
On ATC-601:
Press RUN/STOP to stop the test.
** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
ANTENNA UNITS ERP MTL STATUS
Top dBm 55.7 -76.0 PASSED
***** TEST RUNNING *****
If a failure is detected, a small arrow will be shown to
the left of the offending parameter(s). Make a note of
the test results, if a record is needed, and label it as
applicable to the UUT bottom antenna port. The data
displayed here will be overwritten on the next test.
If the UUT is a TDR-94, skip this step.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
On TDR-94D mount:
Swap the rf cable connection and
termination on the UUT antenna ports.
(Rf cable to bottom port and termination
to top antenna port.)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING
Wait a few seconds then press RUN/STOP
to stop the test.
You should see a similar display on the ATC-601
except this data is applicable to the top antenna port.
The data can be slightly different. See below for test
tolerances and an explanation of a possible failure
indication due to high sensitivity.
Note: You may also select bottom antenna screen on
the ATC-601.
Note: You may see a marginal test failure if the UUT is
relatively cold. In this case allow the unit to warm up a
few minutes and then repeat the test.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-48
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
3.0
(con-
td)
Power
output and
Rcvr
Sensi-tivity
Test
(contd)
The test tolerances are:
ERP: > 48.5 dBm and < 57.0 dBm
MTL: -73.0 (4.0) dBm
The ATC-601 will indicate that the UUT has FAILED if the MTL is more than -77.0 dBm or less than -
71 dBm. Collins prefers, however, that a FAILURE should be reported only if the MTL is less than -
71 dBm. Therefore, if you have a unit displaying an MTL of -77.1 or more, you should see that value
as acceptable. Obviously, an MTL indication approaching -80 dBm or more may be cause for
suspecting a problem with test set calibration.
You may also see a failure because the ERP, Effective Radiated Power or Peak Pulse Power , is
more than 57 dBm. Power measurements taken with a ramp tester can be confusing. The various
test equipment manufacturers use different dimensions for displaying the test results, the test
specifications are not always clear on how the test is to be performed to produce the specified result,
and the test method; direct or radiation, yields different results. As in the case of MTL, an ERP
slightly greater than 57 dBm ( e.g., 59 dBm max), using the direction connection method, should not
be seen as cause for unit rejection.
DO-181 specifies the transponder power output at the antenna. Testing a unit on the bench by direct
connection to the antenna port yields a power reading at the transmitter output. The difference is,
of course, antenna cable and connector losses.
DO-181 specifies transponder power output in watts and dBW. The IFR ATC-601 displays power in
dBm (ERP). The TIC-48/-49 displays power in watts. The following chart may be useful for proper
test evaluation:
Watts dBW dBm TDR-94/94D Spec
50 16.99 46.99
70 18.45 48.45 (Min for airplanes limited to 15 000 ft and 175 kts.)
100 20.00 50.00
125 20.97 50.97 Minimum at antenna (ramp testing)
150 21.76 51.76
200 23.01 53.01
250 23.98 53.98 Minimum direct (on bench)
300 24.77 54.77
350 25.44 55.44
400 26.02 56.02
450 26.53 56.53
500 26.99 56.99 Maximum at antenna
6/ 15/ 1995 5-49
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
4.0 Gillham
Altitude
Test
On ATC-601: select
ATCRBS REPLY TEST ----------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
On test panel select:
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 572
ARINC 572 ALT IN: TO TDR
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 label 203 word to OFF
Set RCV 1 and XMT 1 screen
------>
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
... no data present ...
-ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
On test panel:
Set all ARINC 572 switches to OFF:
Then set A4, C2, C4, and B4 to SEL.
Set POWER to ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
The XFEED OUT lamp turns on. The ATC-601 REPLY
lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
DATATRAC ( ) RCV 1 screen shows: -----
--------------->
----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
203 01 E0 B8 61 C1 11 1 0200
031 01 F5 66 81 98 11 1 0200
(i gnore any other di spl ayed l abel s)
On ATC-601:
Press RUN. Screen shows:
-------------------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=5900 FT [4460]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
(The CODE 5263 depends on your selection in the 031
XMT 1 word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above)
At this step you are asked to toggle each of the ARINC 572 switches and verify the altitude display. You should also watch
the RCV 1 data word on the DATATRAC ( ) display. By cycling each switch between OFF and SEL you should see the ATC-
601 display and the DATATRAC ( ) 203 data word change. If the displays do not change for a particular switch, this would
indicate either an open or a shorted code line. If the wrong altitude is shown, this would suggest that the code line is affecting
another line; i.e., causing two or more inputs to change simultaneously. In either case the UUT, the test panel, or the
interconnecting cable needs repair.
Set each switch as shown in the listing below to the (position) shown, and back, and verify the altitude display at both
positions. The altitude display should always revert to the initial display when the switch is returned to its original position.
There is no serious need to verify the correctness of the RCV word as long as the ATC-601 display is correct.
SWITCH DISPLAYED ALTITUDE SWITCH DISPLAYED ALTITUDE
Initial 5,900 FT [4460] C4 (OFF) 6,000 FT [4420]
A1 (SEL) 23,600 FT [5460] B1 (SEL) 3,600 FT [4560]
A2 (SEL) 7,600 FT [6460] B2 (SEL) 5,600 FT [4660]
A4 (OFF) -400 FT (0460] B4 (OFF) 6,600 FT [4060]
C1 (SEL) none (blank; this is invalid) D2 (SEL) 119,600 FT [4462]
C2 (OFF) 5,800 FT [4440] D4 (SEL) 55,600 FT [4464]
For addtional information on Gillham code structure, refer to paragraph 5.7 in this section.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-50
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
5.0 CSDB
tuning
test
This test cannot be performed using a DATATRAC 400/400H because these instruments are not
capable of transmitting or receiver CSDB data. However, as an acceptable alternative, you can use
a CTL-92/92A, connected to the test panel using the cable shown in figure 907.
Turn power off and connect CTL-92/92A to test panel. Be sure CTL-92/92A mode knob is set to
OFF.
Turn power on and set the CTL-92/92A mode knob to ALT.
On the CTL:
Set the CTL-92/92A to 5263 or any
desired ident code.
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT to
CSDB
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB
PORT 1
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to CSDB
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO CTL
Set SOURCE SELECT to CTL
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
The CODE 5263 depends on your selection on the CTL-
92/92A code select knobs. See note 1 under step 1.2
above. The ALT display depends on the altitude
selection on the test panel ARINC 572 ALT IN switches.
Be sure that the ACT display, on the CTL-92/92A does
not flash. A flashing ACT indicates that the control
feedback label 1F data, from the TDR, does not agree
with the CLT-92/92A output label 1E data to the TDR.
Only one of the two data CTL input ports is being used;
pins U/V.
On the test panel:
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB
PORT 2
Be sure that the ACT display, on the CTL-92/92A, does
not flash. A flashing ACT at either port selection
indicates that output port has failed. If both ports flash,
there may be a problem with the test panel wiring or the
CTL input.
5.1 CSDB
altitude
test
In this altitude test configuration, Gillham altitude data is being supplied to the CTL (ARINC 572 ALT
IN to CTL). The CTL converts this data to CSDB and supplies it to the TDR via the CSDB data
output port (only 1 port is used; pins S/R). The CSDB altitude data is being read on the control bus
input (SOURCE SELECT to CTL). You can verify this by setting the CTL mode switch to ON. If you
suspect a problem with the altitude data, check the following:
On the test panel:
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO TDR
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to ARINC 572
Set SOURCE SELECT to SEL
The ATC-601 ALT display should be the same as
above since the ultimate source of altitude information
is the same in both tests. If it is different here, suspect
a problem with one or more of the altitude discrete
inputs to the CTL. If you encounter such a problem,
you can identify the defective discrete by returning
these three switches to the settings above and then
performing the ARINC 572 switching sequence shown
following step 4.0 above.
On test panel:
Set power to OFF
Disconnect the CTL-92/92A from the
test panel
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT -
ARINC PORT to PA
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to ARINC
429 PORT A
6/ 15/ 1995 5-51
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 103. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
6.0 ARINC
429
Altitude
Test
On ATC-601: select
ATCRBS REPLY TEST and press RUN to
indicate TEST RUNNING --------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch to OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429
PORT A
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to ON
Setup screen ------>
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHzLbl
SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
... no data present ...
-ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0100
On test panel:
Set POWER to ON
EXT STBY to OPR
The XFEED OUT lamp turns on. The ATC-601 REPLY
lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
The ATC-601 screen shows: --->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
(The CODE 5263 depends on your selection in the 031
XMT 1 word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above.)
DATATRAC ( ) RCV 1 screen shows: ----
--->
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0200
(ignore any other displayed labels)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-52
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 103. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
6.1 ARINC
Control
Discretes
Tests
(contd)
On the test panel:
Be sure the SOURCE SELECT switch
is set to SEL.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On the test panel:
Set the REP ALT SEL switch to PB
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: At this point the UUT is configured to report
altitude data from port B. There is none so the display
blanks.
On the test panel:
Move the parallel connection from the
PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
jack to the ALTERNATE DIGITAL
ALTITUDE SOURCE jack.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This verifies that UUT is configured to report
altitude data being supplied on port B.
On the test panel:
Set the REP ALT SEL switch to PA
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: UUT is returned to port A. This series of steps
has verified that the Reporting Altitude discrete is
switchable.
On the test panel:
Set the SOURCE SELECT switch to
CTL
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This switches the UUT to the altitude data
supplied on the control port.
On the test panel:
Disconnect the parallel connection from
the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE jack. (Wait about 5 seconds)
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains.
Note: This verifies the previous step; that altitude is
being drawn from the control port; all other sources are
disconnected.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set the SOURCE SELECT switch to
SEL.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: This verifies that the Source Select Discrete is
switchable.
On test panel:
Reconnect the parallel connection to
the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE jack.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains
blanked.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-53
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 103. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
6.1
(contd)
ARINC
Control
Discretes
Tests
(contd)
On test panel:
Set the AUTO ALT switch to SEL
(-003 UUT units only)
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This enables the automatic altitude port select
feature and verifies that the UUT does switch to
alternate port B even though port A is the selected port.
On test panel:
Set the AUTO ALT switch to OFF
(-003 UUT units only)
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: This enables the AUTO ALT discrete is
switchable.
On the DATATRAC:
Set the XMT 1 label 031 word to
-------->
-ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 95 66 E1 98 00 1 0100
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This digitally switches the UUT to port B. If this
test is correct while the earlier test of port B altitude
failed, suspect a problem with the Reporting Altitude
Select discrete. If both tests failed, suspect a problem
with the altitude data receivers.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY.
Set the POWER switch OFF.
Set the AUTO ALT switch to OFF.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set the XMT 1 label 031 word to ------>
-ON-------------XMT 1 ----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 15 66 C1 98 00 1 0100
If you wish, you can set the XMT 1 label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV 1
label 203 word data field will follow the XMT 1 word exactly while the ATC-601, set to the ATCRBS REPLY TEST mode, will
show the altitude to the nearest 100 feet. When set to the MODE UF0 TEST, the ATC-601 displays altitude to the nearest 25
feet. The label 203 bit values are shown in note 2 following step 1.2.
To simulate any altitude up to about 131,000 feet:
1. Select the desired altitude.
2. Find the data bit with the maximum bit value less than the selected altitude. Make a note of that bit number.
3. Subtract that bit value from your selected value.
4. Find the next bit with the maximum bit value less than the remainder. Make a note of that bit number.
5. Subtract that bit value from your remainder.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the remainder is 0.
In the XMT 1 label 203 data word, set all noted bits to 1. You should see your selected altitude, to the nearest 100 feet,
displayed on the ATC-601.
7.0 ARINC
575
Altitude
Test
On test panel:
SOURCE SELECT: SEL
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set screen ------>
Note: The binary data format is retained
here to emphasize the similarity between
ARINC 429 and ARINC 575. If you are
more comfortable with the Hex data
format, feel free to use it instead.
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
... no data present ...
-ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
031 01 0000000111011111011 00 1 0100
203 01 0010001010101010100 00 1 0100
6/ 15/ 1995 5-54
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 103. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
7.0
(con-
td)
ARINC
575
Altitude
Test
(contd)
On test panel:
Connect parallel control cable to
PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
jack.
Set POWER switch to ON.
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR.
On ATC-601:
Select ATCRBS REPLY TEST and
press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING.
ATC-601 screen -------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=35,500 FT [5524]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to
ARINC 575
On DATATRAC:
Set XMT 1 label 203 word
-------->
(just change the SSM to 00)
-ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
203 01 0010001010101010100 00 1 0100
ATC-601 screen -------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=17,700 FT [3740]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
DATATRAC screen --------->
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
203 01 0001000101010101010 11 1 0100
| | | | | | |
/ / / / / / /
| | | | | | |
-ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
203 01 0010001010101010100 00 1 0100
In addition to testing the altitude type select discrete, this test illustrates the differences between
ARINC 429 and ARINC 575 data. Notice that the bits in the RCV 1 label 203 word (above) are offset
to the right by one bit from the XMT 1 label 203 word and the SSM code is 11 as opposed to the 00 in
the XMT 1 word. In ARINC 575, the LSB is bit 13; in ARINC 429 the LSB is bit 12. In ARINC 575,
bits 30 and 31 determine the sign; 00 being positive.
Notice also, that the altitude displayed on the ATC-601 corresponds to the code in the RCV 1 word;
not the XMT 1 word. This is also due to the UUT being configured for ARINC 575 and thus the bit
values are offset by 1 bit position which has the effect of changing the altitude by a factor of 1/2.
On test panel:
Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to
ARINC 429
On DATATRAC:
Set XMT 1 label 203 word ---->
-ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
203 01 0010001010101010100 11 1 0100
ATC-601 screen:
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=35,500 FT [5524]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
6/ 15/ 1995 5-55
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
8.0 Mode S
Address
Discretes
Test
On the test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set all test panel mode s address switches to SEL except switch P1-56; set it to OFF.
Set POWER switch ON
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S ALL CALL TEST ------->
** MODE S ALL CALL TEST - NO REPLY **
ALL CALL ADDRESS = [ ] TAIL
NUMBER =
Press RUN to start
On ATC 601:
Press RUN
Note screen ----->
** MODE S ALL CALL TEST - PASSED **
ALL CALL ADDRESS = FFFFFE [77777776]
TAIL NUMBER =
****** TEST RUNNING *****
The remainder of this step should be seen as optional unless you have reason to suspect a failure in
one or more of the address discrete lines. The procedure will require a few minutes because of the
delay involved in cycling power between each switch setting.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 6.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = DB6DB6 [66666666]
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 4.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = 924924 [44444444]
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 0, except the eighth triad
which is set to 1.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = 000001 [00000001]
6/ 15/ 1995 5-56
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
9.0 TCAS /
NO TCAS
Discrete
Select
and
TCAS
Bus Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as STEP 1.1.
ATC-601 is not needed for this test but can be left on.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After data appears on the RCV 1 display,
press RCV and then ENT and use the
down arrow key to scroll the words so
that you can see the 350 word.
After a few seconds the RCV 1 portion of the
DATATRAC ( ) screen shows:
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 00 00 01 17 11 1 0200
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to TCAS
On DATATRAC ( ):
Press RCV and then ENT
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
After a few seconds the RCV 1 portion of the
DATATRAC ( ) screen shows: (use down arrow key to
scroll words)
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 68 B3 01 17 11 1 0200
|<---diagnostic code B3
This display shows a diagnostic B3 which is interpreted: TCAS Bus Inactive. This verifies that the
discrete properly configures the unit for operation with a TCAS. However, no TCAS data is being
supplied in this step, therefore, the unit declares a B3 diagnostic.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-57
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
9.0
(contd)
TCAS
Bus Test,
XPDR to
TCAS
Connect the DATATRAC RCV 1 to the
TCAS OUT jack. Verify that the data
word labels are detectable as shown -->.
Note: Except for the diagnostic code in
the label 350 data word, the data content
is not important. It is quite likely that the
data will be different. The presence of
the data word labels shown verifies that
the TCAS data bus output is active and
appears to be normal.
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)----100 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
275 00 80 00 00 BD 00 1 0150
276 10 80 F8 02 7D 00 1 0150
350 01 68 B3 01 17 11 1 0150
Notice the higher speed. Other labels may also be
present.
TCAS to
XPDR
Bus Test
Note: In this step you need the capability of transmitting data to two separate input ports
simultaneously and at different speeds; the 031 control word must be low speed (12.5-kbps) while
the TCAS label 274 data words must be high speed (100-kbps). All DATATRAC instruments, as
well as the JC Air 429E, can transmit at either of these speeds but only the DATATRAC 400 can do
so on two separate ports simultaneously. Otherwise, you will need two simulators. If you do not
have this capability, you may not be able to verify the integrity of the TCAS bus input port.
If you are using a DATATRAC 400, or
have access to a second bus simulator,
connect your second transmitter port or
data bus simulator to the TCAS IN and
setup as shown -------->:
-ON-------------XMT 2 -----------100 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
274 00 18 00 00 3D 00 1 0100
Note: Be sure to set the higher speed.
On bus reader RCV display:
Note: The objective is to verify that the
UUT recognizes a valid TCAS label 274
word and declares this by removing the
diagnostic B3.
After a few seconds, the 350 word shows:
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 68 00 01 17 11 1 0150
|<---diagnostic code 00
On the bus reader:
Set the XMT 2 word to OFF
After a few seconds, notice that the B3 diagnostic
returns.
Note: Disconnect XMT 2 from the TCAS
IN jack and reconnect RCV 1 to the
DATA BUS OUTPUT port.
Final step
in this
test, all
setups
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to NO
TCAS
On DATATRAC ( ):
Press RCV and then ENT
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
After a few seconds, the original 350 word returns:
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 00 00 01 17 11 1 0200
6/ 15/ 1995 5-58
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
10.0 Side 1/
Side 2
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Be sure SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch is set to
SIDE 1.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as STEP 9.0.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen -->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light and the ATC-601 shows:
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch to SIDE 2
Set POWER switch to ON
Note that unit does not reply (X FEED OUT lamp and
REPLY lamps are off and no altitude is displayed on
ATC-601). Wait about 10 seconds.
Note: UUT does not respond because the SDI and side
strapping do not agree.
Note: Be sure to allow adequate time for the CPU to
reinitialize properly between power off and power on.
The SIDE 1/2 strap is one of several that are monitored
only at processor initialization. Therefore, if this tests
fails, cycle power again but allow more time between
power off and power on.
On DATATRAC ( ):
On XMT 1, label 031 word, set the SDI
to 10 and press ENTER
Notice that unit begins to reply almost immediately
(XFEED OUT lamp turns on and ATC-601 REPLY lamp
lights).
Note: UUT responds because the SDI and side
strapping agree.
On DATATRAC ( ):
On XMT 1, label 031 word, set SDI to
01 and press ENTER.
Notice that unit stops replying (X FEED OUT lamp and
ATC-601 REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch to SIDE 1
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
l amps l i ght and the ATC-601 shows that the UUT i s
repl yi ng.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-59
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
11.0 AIR/
GND
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
TDR ALT SOURCE: EXT DIRECT
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as STEP 9.0.
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S UF4 TEST screen ----->
** MODE S UF4 TEST - NO REPLY **
DF FS= DR= UM= AC=
ADDRESS=
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
ATC-601 screen shows ----->:
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light and the ATC-601 shows:
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
DF 4 FS=0 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: Initially the screen will show FS=2 for about 2
seconds and then change to FS=0.
On test panel:
Set AIR/GND switch to GND
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 shows:
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
DF 4 FS=1 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Of particular significance here is the FS (flight status) indication.
For a detailed description of each of these message fields, refer to the Theory of Operation section.
On test panel:
Set AIR/GND switch to AIR
After a few seconds, notice that the ATC-601 FS field
again shows 0.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-60
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
12.0 DL ANT/
SGL ANT
Discrete
Test
(TDR-94D
only)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as STEP 9.0.
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST
screen ----->
Be sure the ATC-601 is connected to the
top antenna port.
** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to DL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
You can watch the PERIOD display for a
time.
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 2.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
See the note at the end of this step for test tolerances.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to SGL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows:
** SQUITTER TEST - FAILED **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: This test is intended to fail. When the UUT is set
for single antenna operation, there is no transmission
from the top antenna port. Therefore, if this test
indicates PASSED, recheck all switch settings or
suspect a problem with the SGL/DL ANT select strap.
It should not pass.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to stop the test.
Remove rf terminator from bottom
antenna connector
Connect ATC-601 cable to bottom
antenna connector
Connect rf terminator to top antenna
connector
6/ 15/ 1995 5-61
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
12.0 DL ANT
/SGL
ANT
Discrete
Test
(contd)
(TDR-94D
only)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to start the test.
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 1.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to DL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 2.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: The PERIOD value tends to vary somewhat in all cases. When the UUT is set for dual antenna
operation and the ATC-601 is monitoring the top or the bottom antenna port, the value can vary from
1.6 to 2.4. When the TDR-94D is set for single antenna operation, or the UUT is a TDR-94, there is
no transmission from the top antenna port and and the transmission PERIOD from the bottom
antenna port can vary from 0.6 to 1.4.
13.0 Burst
Tune and
Cross-
Feed In
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT to PA
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to ARINC 429
Set SOURCE SELECT to SEL
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST
screen ----->
If necessary, reconnect ATC-601 to top
antenna connector, with terminator on
bottom connector.
** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT and
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to IN
Notice that both X FEED lamps are lighted.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to OFF
(With the cursor on the 1, press ENT)
Notice that the X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps turns off (X FEED IN stays on).
6/ 15/ 1995 5-62
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
13.0
(contd)
Burst
Tune and
Cross-
Feed In
Discrete
Test
(contd)
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to ON
Notice that the X FEED IN and OUT and REPLY lamps
are lighted.
On test panel:
Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to OUT
Set BURST TUNE switch to ON
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to OFF
Notice that UUT continues to reply. Watch the unit for
a few seconds.
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE switch to OFF
Notice that UUT stops replying (X FEED OUT and
REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE switch to ON
Notice that UUT does not reply (X
FEED OUT and REPLY lamps do not light).
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to ON
Notice that UUT replys (X FEED OUT and REPLY lamps
are on).
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE switch to OFF
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to OFF
Notice that UUT stops replying (X FEED OUT and
REPLY lamps are off).
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE switch to ON
On DATATRAC ( ):
Set XMT 1 to ON
X FEED OUT lamp flashes while XMT 1 is on .
On test panel:
Set XMT 1 to OFF
X FEED OUT lamp remains off when XMT is OFF.
14.0 Output
Port
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE switch to OFF
Set SOURCE SELECT switch to SEL
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
CONTROL DATA PORT SEL: PA
OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429 PORT A
On DATATRAC ( ):
The same as STEP 1.1
Set XMT 1 to ON
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST
screen ----->
** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUTand
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to
ARINC 429 PORT B
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
display does not change.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-63
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
15.0 Control
Data
Input Port
Select
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set SOURCE SELECT switch to SEL
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
CONTROL DATA SELECT: ARINC
PORT PA
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as for STEP 9.0.
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST
screen ----->
** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUTand
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch
to ARINC PORT PB
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUTand REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
display does not change.
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch
to ARINC PORT PC
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
display does not change.
16.0 Manual
STBY
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch to ARINC PORT PA
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as for STEP 9.0.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen
---------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUTand
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Note that X FEED OUT lamp and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps turn off and ATC-601 indicates NO REPLY. See
note below.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
Note that X FEED OUT lamp and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light almost immediately and ATC-601 indicates
PASSED.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-64
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
17.0 Max Air-
speed
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
Be sure that all three MAX AIRSPEED switches are set to OFF.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as for STEP 9.0.
(The DATATRAC is used here only for
tuning data.)
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S UF0 TEST screen >
** MODE S UF0 TEST - NO REPLY **
DF VS= RI= AC=
ADDRESS=
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT lamp
and the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the
unit is replying.
Note the ATC-601 screen ----------->
** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **
DF 0 VS=0 RI=8 AC= 32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Exercise the MAX AIRSPEED switches on the test panel and verify the correct RI indication as
shown in the following list. Cycle power and allow about 2 or 3 seconds of OFF time and about 5
seconds for processor initialization and ATC-601 response time between each switch setting.
MAX AIRSPEED SWITCH RI VALUE
BIT 15 BIT 16 BIT 17
OFF OFF OFF 8
SEL OFF OFF 9
OFF SEL OFF A
SEL SEL OFF B
OFF OFF SEL C
SEL OFF SEL D
OFF SEL SEL E
SEL SEL SEL F (not an assigned configuration)
It is worth noting that in this test mode the ATC-601 displays the altitude to the nearest 25 feet.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-65
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
18.0 Ext Sup-
pression
Test
On test panel:
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as for STEP 9.0.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen -----
->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Connect scope channel A to the test
panel SUPPR test points.
Connect scope channel B to the REPLY
VIDEO BNC connector on the ATC-601.
Set the scope to display both channels
Note a (approx) 30s pulse on channel A.
Note a reply waveform on channel B. If your scope is
able, you will see the individual reply code pulses on
channel B. You may also see the occasional squitter
transmission which appears as a much longer series of
pulses at about 1 transmission every 2 sec. Of
particular importance, however, is that the channel A
(suppression) pulse is about 30 s long during ATCRBS
reply, and brackets the 21 s ATCRBS reply. During
squitter transmission, the suppression pulse extends to
bracket the squitter transmission. The squitter
transmission is a DF11 reply about 72 s long.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-66
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
19.0 ADLP
Select,
Discrete
Strap
Test
On test panel:
Be sure DATALINK switch is set to NO
ADLP.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as for STEP 9.0.
DATATRAC RCV 1 screen ------>
Note: The ATC-601 is not needed for
this test but it can remain connected and
operating.
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 60 00 01 17 11 1 0100
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set DATALINK switch to ADLP.
Be sure DATALINK SELECT switch is
set to A/B.
Set POWER switch to ON.
DATATRAC RCV 1 screen ------>
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 64 A2 01 17 11 1 0100
|<---diagnostic code A2
Note: The diagnostic A2 identifies an inactive ADLP
bus. This test verifies that the ADLP enable discrete is
functional.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF.
Set DATALINK switch to NO ADLP.
Set POWER switch to ON.
DATATRAC RCV 1 screen ------>
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 60 00 01 17 11 1 0100
|<---diagnostic code 00
Note: The Airborne Datalink system is not fully implemented at this time. If and when an ADLP
(Airborne DataLink Processor) becomes available and operational, suitable procedures will be
provided to verify the integrity of the ADLP input/output ports. At this point, therefore, verification of
the ADLP SELECT strap is seen as sufficient to prevent nuisance diagnostics that can occur if the
select input should be defective. You will notice that the DATALINK SELECT A/B, C/D function is
also not tested.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-67
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
20.0 Remote
IDENT
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Same as initial setup
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as for STEP 9.0.
On ATC-601:
Setup for ATCRBS REPLY test
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Press and release the REMOTE IDENT
switch.
On DATATRAC ( ):
Note RCV screen ----->:
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 75 66 91 98 11 1 0200
|<----Ident bit
Note: The 9 should appear in the data field only while
the switch is being pressed. This, together with the ID
display on the ATC-601, verifies that the REMOTE
IDENTdiscrete input is functional.
On ATC-601:
Notice the ID display. ID should
display for about 18 seconds.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=ID5263 ALT= 32,800 FT [1344]
|<----ID display
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On Datatrac ( ):
Set the label 031 XMT 1 word:
-ON--------------XMT 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 15 66 91 98 00 1 0100
On DATATRAC RCV 1 and on ATC-601
screens:
You should see the same displays as immediately
above. If the test failed using the REMOTE IDENT
switch, but succeeds here, then suspect a failure in the
discrete input or the test panel.
On Datatrac ( ):
Set the label 031 XMT word:
-ON--------------XMT 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 95 66 81 98 00 1 0100
6/ 15/ 1995 5-68
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
21.0 Self Test On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
AIR/GND: AIR
SELF TEST: ENABLE: OFF
On DATATRAC ( ):
Same setup as for STEP 9.0.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST
---------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT lamp
and the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the
unit is replying. The ATC-601 screen indicates PASSED.
On DATATRAC ( ):
screen shows: --------->
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
031 01 F5 66 81 98 11 1 0200
203 01 64 00 01 C1 11 1 0200
350 01 60 00 01 17 11 1 0200
(You may need to press INC to display all three labels.)
In the next few steps, watch the
DATATRAC RCV screen carefully.
On the test panel:
Press and hold the SELF TEST
pushbutton for about 1 sec.
After a few seconds, notice that the DATATRAC ( ) and
ATC-601 screens do not change except that the
DATATRAC briefly shows *s to the left of the 0200 time
displays in the RH column. (The test panel TEST lamp
lights while you hold the switch but otherwise there is
no change.)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-69
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-11 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 400 or DATATRAC 400H Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
21.0 Self Test
(contd)
On test panel:
Set the AIR/GND switch to GND
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON
Press and hold the SELF-TEST button
for about 1 s
Note: The test panel TEST lamp lights
while you hold the switch. This has no
bearing on UUT operation, however. If
the lamp does not light, check the test
panel.
On the DATATRAC ( ), press RCV (either
once or twice) to return to the setup
screen, followed by ENT, to clear the
screen of any extraneous labels.
Self-test Displays:
After a few seconds, notice that the X FEED OUT lamp
turns off briefly while the ATC-601 screen shows +s or
-s in most of the data fields, followed by blank fields.
After a few seconds, notice that the X FEED OUT
lamps turns on again and the ATC-601 screen returns
to the normal display.
On the DATATRAC ( ), notice that the SSMs change to
10 and then back to 11.You should try to be especially
watchful of the 350 data word and try to catch any
diagnostic codes that may be displayed during the self-
test sequence.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
OFF.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice that the self-test displays as described above do
not appear..
Note: This verifies that self test is properly inhibited by
the self-test inhibit discrete.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON.
Set the AIR/GND switch to AIR.
Wait about 5 seconds *.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice that the self-test displays as described above do
not appear..
Note: This verifies that self test is properly inhibited by
the AIR/GND discrete.
*Note: The CPU must be allowed sufficient time to complete at least one software cycle in order to
recognize the change in the AIR/GND discrete. If you press the SELF TEST switch in less than
about 3 seconds of setting the AIR/GND switch to AIR, the unit may execute self-test as though it
were not inhibited. This should be seen as normal.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON.
Set the AIR/GND switch to GND.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice the self-test displays as described above
reappear.
Note: This verifies that the self-test inhibit and AIR/GND
discretes are switchable.
This completes this test sequence. Successful completion of this series provides reasonable
assurance that the unit is operational. However, this test does not satisfy the requirements of a Final
Performance Test which must be performed after any repair operation.
Turn off all power, disconnect the equipment, and return it to its normal storage location. Return the
UUT to its original shipping container, or equivalent, if it is to remain in storage. Otherwise, prepare
it for installation.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-70
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.5.10 Procedures Usi ng The Atl anti c I nstruments
DataTrac 200 Databus Anal yzer
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
1.0 Setup Note: If you are using a Test Panel built according to instruction provided in a previous edition of this
manual, it may be necessary to upgrade the panel. Refer to the Special Tools and Fixtures Section.
If not already done, connect equipment as shown in figure 5-2.
Connect DATATRAC 200 as follows and using cables shown in the Special Tools and Fixtures
paragraph.
ARINC 429 XMT to test panel DIGITAL CONTROL port,
Parallel connect XMT to test panel PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE PORT,
ARINC 429 RCV to test panel DATA BUS READER port.
Connect the ATC-601 to the UUT bottom antenna connector.
Connect an rf termination to the top antenna port.
Connect power to test panel power jacks - observe proper polarity.
Preset the switches as shown in paragraph 5.4.5.6. above. Be sure POWER switch is OFF and EXT
STBY switch is at STBY.
1.1 Setup Turn the DATATRAC 200 on, intialize for
ARINC 429, and set the RCV, and XMT
screen ----->
(See notes 1 and 2 that follow test step
1.2)
Lbl SI 29-Hex RCV-11 SM P MSEC
>> NO DATA RECEIVED
Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSRC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 11 1 100
On test panel, set switches as shown in paragraph 5.4.4. above.
Turn on
TDR-94/94D
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
Monitor current. If OK:
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
Monitor current.
If the unit has been in service and there is a possibility of
an over-current condition, monitor the power supply
current output. The setup should draw no more than 1.5
A. Typically it draws about 0.9 to 1.1 A when the UUT is
transmitting.
Setup
(power-up)
Turn the ATC-601 on and press SELECT
for the screen -------------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - NOT RUN **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
1.2 UUT power
on and
ARINC 429
tuning test
ATC-601 screen ---------> ** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
To change the CODE, see note 1 below.
To change the ALT, see note 2 below.
The DATATRAC 200 RCV display becomes
--------->
Lbl SI 29-Hex RCV-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 559A0 11 1 0200
203 01 20000 11 1 0200
350 01 00000 11 1 0200
Note: Any other labels displayed are irrelevant to this
test. Use the INC key to scroll the display. See Note 3
below.
On the ATC-601, press RUN UUT responds to interrogations as indicated by a lighted
XFEED OUT lamp on the test panel and a lighted REPLY
lamp on the ATC-601.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-71
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
Note 1. You can change the (octal) CODE=XXXX display by changing data bits 18 through 29 in the label 031 data word (XMT
field of the DATATRAC 200) as follows:
ATC-601 octal digit: First Second Third Fourth
Bit: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15
Data: Par SSM |<-----Data -------> ----->| Pad Pad Pad
DATATRAC Hex Bits: First Second Third Fourth
DATATRAC Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
DATATRAC (Hex): 5 5 9 8
Binary: 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0
Octal value: 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Produces an ATC-601 CODE: 5 2 6 3
Bits 11 through 17, of the label 031 control word, are assigned the following functions:
DATATRAC Hex bits: Fifth
Bit: 14 13 12 11 10 9
Bit values: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
DATATRAC (Hex): 0
| | Pad | |<- |<--SDI
Assignment: | | |<--Altitude reporting, 1 = OFF
| |<--Ident, 1 = ON
|<--Altitude port select, 1 = B
Note 2: You can set the XMT label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV label 203 word
data field will reflect the XMT word while the ATC-601 will show the altitude to the nearest 100 feet. The label 203 word data
bit values are as follows:
DATATRAC (Hex) *: | lst | | 2nd |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22
Alt value:(sign bit; 0 = +) 65536 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024
(in feet)
DATATRAC (Hex) *: | 3rd | | 4th | | 5th |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09
Alt value 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ** ** **
(in feet)
Determine the altitude by totaling the bit value of all bits set to 1.
* The first (lst) Hex Data bit sets data bits 26 through 29. Since bit 29 must always be a 0, this Hex bit must not be set to a
hex number greater than 7. The fifth (5th) bit includes part of the SI, bit 10, therefore you will see it change whenever the SI
is set to any value other than 01. ** Bits 9, 10, and 11 are not used in the altitude definitions.
Note 3: You will see a label 371 data word. This is the ARINC 429 Specific Equipment Identification word which is
structured the same as other ARINC 429 words but conveys the following information:
Bits 11 through 18 identify the equipment type. The code for ATC transponders is 18 therefore bits 14 and 15 are 1; the
others are 0. Bits 19 through 24 convey a binary code identifying the equipment manufacturer. Collins is 6. Therefore bits
20 and 21 are 1; all others are 0. Bits 24 through 29 are reserved for purposes to be defined.
When ARINC 572 altitude data is active, you will see a label 200 data word. This word reflects the ARINC 572 (Gillham code)
altitude data. This word is structured the same as other ARINC 429 words, except bits 9 and 10 are part of the data field; i.e.,
there is no SDI. Bits 9,10, and 11 reflect the D1, D2, and D4 code bits respectively. Bits 13, 14, and 15 reflect the C-bits,
bits 17, 18, and 19 reflect the B-bits, and 21, 22, and 23 reflect the A-bits.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-72
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
2.0 Test set, Auto
Test
On ATC-601:
Press RUN/STOP to stop
Press AUTO TEST
Press RUN to start
Note: This test requires a few sec-
onds to run. It will stop automati-
cally.
Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
On UUT:
Move the test set rf cable to the UUT top antenna connector and the rf termination to the
bottom.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
On ATC-601:
Repeat the AUTO TEST
Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
Note. The AUTO TEST sequence will indicate FAILED even when certain tests result in a NO REPLY condition. The NO REPLY
conditions are the result of no ADLP (Airborne Data Link Processor) data in this setup. This same condition is likely to occur
when using the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testing an installation not equipped with an ADLP. To verify that the test can
be seen as successful, proceed as follows:
When the test sequence is completed and the ATC-601 stops, as indicated by INTERR and REPLY lamps off, you will likely
see a screen as follows:
** AUTO TEST - FAILED **
MODES TESTED - A,C,S FREQ: 1089.92 Mhz
MODES PASSED - A,C,S ERP: 55 Dbm
MODES FAILED - -> MTL: -77 Dbm
DIVERSITY ISOLATION: >40 dB
Press RUN to start
(The FREQ, ERP, and MTL values can vary from UUT to UUT and to a lesser degree on UUT temperature.)
Verify the test results as follows:
On the ATC-601, use the SELECT up arrow or down arrow key to scroll through the following list of tests performed; the
numbers are for reference purposes only and do not appear on the test set screen. If you use the down arrow, you will see
the list in the order shown; from test 1 through test 19. If you use the up arrow key, you will see the list in reverse order,
starting at test 19. You will likely notice that all tests passed except tests 13, 14, and 15 which had a NO REPLY.
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
1.0
** REPLY DELAY TEST - PASSED ** MODE S: 128.00 (0.25) s
ITM A: 128.00 (0.25) s
(All others): 3.00 (0.50) s
2.0
** REPLY JITTER TEST - PASSED ** MODE S: =< 0.05 s
ITM: =< 0.06 s
(All others): =< 0.1 s
3.0
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - PASSED ** F1 TO F2 SPACING: 20.3 (0.1) s
All PULSE WIDTH: 0.45 (0.1) s
6/ 15/ 1995 5-73
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
4.0
** SLS LEVEL TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with F2 (SLS) pulse at 9 dB below F1.
UUT should reply to this interrogation. Then UUT is interro-
gated with F2 equal to F1. UUT should not reply. PASSED
indicates correct response to both tests.
5.0
** ATC ONLY ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
The TDR-94/94D should not reply to this mode a and mode
c only interrogation. PASSED indicates a correct (NO)
response.
6.0
** MODE S ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
The TDR-94/94D should reply to this interrogation. PASSED
indicates a correct response. UUT address previously
determined in mode s interrogation, is sent to UUT in UF4
(Uplink Format 4) and verified in DF4 (Downlink Format 4)
reply.
7.0
** INVALID ADDRESS TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with two addresses, both of which are
different from the correct address. PASSED indicates UUT
did not reply to interrogation.
8.0
** SPR ON/OFF TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated first with SPR ON and verifies a proper
reply, then with SPR OFF and verifies no reply. PASSED
indicates UUT responded correctly.
9.0
** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with mode S UF0, verifying correct
altitude as compared to previous mode c reply, correct
address as compared to DF11 address, and correct format.
PASSED indicates correct UUT response.
10.0
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF4, verifying correct altitude as
compared to previous mode c reply, correct address as
compared to DF11 reply, and correct format. PASSED
indicates correct UUT response.
11.0
** MODE S UF5 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF5, verifying the correct ID code
as compared to previous mode a reply, correct address as
compared to DF11 reply, and correct format. PASSED
indicates correct UUT response.
12.0
** MODE S UF11 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF11, verifying correct address as
compared to previous response, and correct format.
PASSED indicates correct UUT response.
13.0
** MODE S UF16 TEST - NO REPLY **
(See test 15.)
14.0
** MODE S UF20 TEST - NO REPLY **
(See test 15.)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-74
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
STEP TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
15.0
** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY **
UUT is interrogated with UF16, UF20, and UF21. These
formats are all related to the airborne data link function. This
function has not been implemented. The TDR-94/94D will
not reply to these interrogation formats. NOT REPLY should
not be seen as a failure.
16.0
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
When set for daul antenna operation, the TDR-94D transmits
a squitter pulse once each second, alternating between top
and bottom antenna ports. The ATC-601 verifies that one
squitter pulse is received every 1.6 to 2.4 seconds. The test
panel ANT SGL/DL switch must be in the DL position.
When set for single antenna operation, or when testing a
TDR-94, only the bottom antenna port is used. In this case
the ATC-601 verifies that one squitter pulse is received every
0.6 to 1.4 seconds. When you change the ANT SGL/DL
switch, you must cycle power to the UUT in order for it to
take effect. PASSED indicates a correct UUT response.
17.0
** FREQUENCY TEST - PASSED **
Freq: 1090 (1) MHz
18.0
** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED **
ATC-601 monitors squitter pulses on active antenna port (as
in test 16) and then monitors for intervening squitter pulses
that are not greater than 20 dB below the active squitter.
This test will always fail when the UUT is a TDR-94 (non
diversity) because squitter is transmitter every second on the
same antenna port. If you are testing a TDR-94D and the DL
ANT/SGL ANT switch is set to SGL ANT, the test will also
fail because this causes the unit to operate like a TDR-94.
PASSED indicates a correct response from a TDR-94D.
19.0
** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED **
ATC-601 verifies that the MTL difference between mode a
and mode c responses is < 1.0 dB. At this point, another
press of the arrow key will display the first item; either 1.0 or
18.0, depending on which arrow was used.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-75
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TI TLE PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
3.0 Power
output
and Rcvr
Sensi -
ti vi ty Test
On test panel sel ect:
Set EXT STBY swi tch to STBY
Set POWER swi tch OFF
On ATC-601:
Sel ect POWER TEST
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING ----
----->
** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
ANTENNA UNITS ERP MTL STATUS
NO REPLY
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: If necessary, press SELECT (or SLEW) to select Top Antenna. Be sure that the ATC-601 rf
cable is connected to the top antenna port and the rf termination is connected to the bottom port.
On DATATRAC 200: set screen ------>
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
>> NO DATA RECEIVED
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 11 1 100
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
After a few seconds, the ATC-601
shows ---->
On ATC-601:
Press RUN/STOP to stop the test.
** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
ANTENNA UNITS ERP MTL STATUS
Top dBm 55.7 -76.0 PASSED
***** TEST RUNNING *****
If a failure is detected, a small arrow will be shown to
the left of the offending parameter(s). Make a note of
the test results, if a record is needed, and label it as
applicable to the UUT bottom antenna port. The data
displayed here will be overwritten on the next test.
If the UUT is a TDR-94, skip this step.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
On TDR-94D mount:
Swap the rf cable connection and ter-
mination on the UUT antenna ports. (Rf
cable to bottom port and termination to
top antenna port.)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING
Wait a few seconds then press RUN/STOP
to stop the test.
You should see a similar display on the ATC-601 ex-
cept this data is applicable to the top antenna port. The
data can be slightly different. See below for test
tolerances and an explanation of a possible failure
indication due to high sensitivity.
Note: You may also select bottom antenna screen on
the ATC-601.
Note: You may see a marginal test failure if the UUT is
relatively cold. In this case allow the unit to warm up a
few minutes and then repeat the test.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-76
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
3.0
(cont-
d)
Power
output and
Rcvr
Sensi-tivity
Test
(contd)
The test tolerances are:
ERP: > 48.5 dBm and < 57.0 dBm
MTL: -73.0 (4.0) dBm
The ATC-601 will indicate that the UUT has FAILED if the MTL is more than -77.0 dBm or less than -
71 dBm. Collins prefers, however, that a FAILURE should be reported only if the MTL is less than -
71 dBm. Therefore, if you have a unit displaying an MTL of -77.1 or more, you should see that value
as acceptable. Obviously, an MTL indication approaching -80 dBm or more may be cause for
suspecting a problem with test set calibration.
You may also see a failure because the ERP, Effective Radiated Power or Peak Pulse Power , is
more than 57 dBm. Power measurements taken with a ramp tester can be confusing. The various
test equipment manufacturers use different dimensions for displaying the test results, the test
specifications are not always clear on how the test is to be performed to produce the specified result,
and the test method; direct or radiation, yields different results. As in the case of MTL, an ERP
slightly greater than 57 dBm ( e.g., 59 dBm max), using the direction connection method, should not
be seen as cause for unit rejection.
DO-181 specifies the transponder power output at the antenna. Testing a unit on the bench by direct
connection to the antenna port yields a power reading at the transmitter output. The difference is,
of course, antenna cable and connector losses.
DO-181 specifies transponder power output in watts and dBW. The IFR ATC-601 displays power in
dBm (ERP). The TIC-48/-49 displays power in watts. The following chart may be useful for proper
test evaluation:
Watts dBW dBm TDR-94/94D Spec
50 16.99 46.99
70 18.45 48.45 (Min for airplanes limited to 15 000 ft and 175 kts.)
100 20.00 50.00
125 20.97 50.97 Minimum at antenna (ramp testing)
150 21.76 51.76
200 23.01 53.01
250 23.98 53.98 Minimum direct (on bench)
300 24.77 54.77
350 25.44 55.44
400 26.02 56.02
450 26.53 56.53
500 26.99 56.99 Maximum at antenna
6/ 15/ 1995 5-77
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
4.0 Gillham
Altitude
Test
On ATC-601: select
ATCRBS REPLY TEST ----------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
On test panel select:
Set POWER switch to OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 572
ARINC 572 ALT IN: TO TDR
On DATATRAC 200:
Set XMT label 203 word to OFF
Set RCV and XMT screen
------>
Lbl SI 29-Hex RCV-11 SM P MSEC
>> NO DATA RECEIVED
Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
On test panel:
Set all ARINC 572 switches to OFF:
Then set A4, C2, C4, and B4 to SEL.
Set POWER to ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
The XFEED OUT lamp turns on. The ATC-601 REPLY
lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
DATATRAC 200 RCV screen shows:
-------------------->
Lbl SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 11 1 100
203 01 05C30 11 1 100
(ignore any other displayed labels)
On ATC-601:
Press RUN. Screen shows:
-------------------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=5,900 FT [4460]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
(The CODE 5263 depends on your selection in the 031
XMT word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above)
At this step you are asked to toggle each of the ARINC 572 switches and verify the altitude display. You should also watch
the RCV data word on the DATATRAC 200 display. By cycling each switch between OFF and SEL you should see the ATC-
601 display and the DATATRAC 200 and 203 data words change. If the displays do not change for a particular switch, this
would indicate either an open or a shorted code line. If the wrong altitude is shown that code line may be effecting another
line; i.e., causing two or more inputs to change simultaneously. In either case the UUT, the test panel, or the interconnecting
cable needs repair.
Set each switch as shown in the listing below to the (position) shown, and back, and verify the altitude display at both
positions. The altitude display should always revert to the initial display when the switch is returned to its original position.
There is no serious need to verify the correctness of the RCV word as long as the ATC-601 display is correct.
SWITCH DISPLAYED ALTITUDE SWITCH DISPLAYED ALTITUDE
Initial 5,900 FT [4460] C4 (OFF) 6,000 FT [4420]
A1 (SEL) 23,600 FT [5460] B1 (SEL) 3,600 FT [4560]
A2 (SEL) 7,600 FT [6460] B2 (SEL) 5,600 FT [4660]
A4 (OFF) -400 FT (0460] B4 (OFF) 6,600 FT [4060]
C1 (SEL) none (blank; this is invalid) D2 (SEL) 119,600 FT [4462]
C2 (OFF) 5,800 FT [4440] D4 (SEL) 55,600 FT [4464]
6/ 15/ 1995 5-78
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
Gillham Code, Altitude Listing:
GILLHAM CODE SWITCHES
ATC-601 ALT DISPLAY D2 D4 A1 A2 A4 B1 B2 B4 C1 C2 C4
-1000 FT 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 FT 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
500 FT 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
1000 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0
1300 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0
1500 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
1800 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
2000 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
2600 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
2700 FT 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
3000 FT 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
4000 FT 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
6000 FT 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
6800 FT 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
8000 FT 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
10000 FT 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
12000 FT 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 0
14000 FT 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
14800 FT 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
16000 FT 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0
16100 FT 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
16200 FT 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0
18000 FT 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
20000 FT 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1 0
22000 FT 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 1 0
25000 FT 0 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0
30000 FT 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0
30800 FT 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
35000 FT 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
40000 FT 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0
45000 FT 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 1 0
50000 FT 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
66000 FT 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
67500 FT 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
In all cases, set the applicable switch to SEL for those pulses identified by a logic 1.
For addtional information on Gillham code structure, refer to paragraph 5.7 in this section.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-79
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
5.0 CSDB tun-
ing and
altitude test
On ATC-601:
Press RUN/STOP to stop the interrogations
On test panel:
Set POWER OFF
On DATATRAC 200:
Turn POWER to OFF
Wait a few seconds, then turn POWER to ON
At the initial screen, select CSDB (enter C and press ENT)
At the DATA RECEIVER SETUP screen, press 2 (for HEX DATA) and press ENT (this brings up the
RCV DATA screen)
Press XMT to show the TRANSMITTER SETUP screen (default values should be correct)
Press ENT (this brings up the combined screen)
Note screen ---------->
LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX RCV DATA MSEC
>> NO DATA RECEIVED
LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX XMT DATA MSEC
(Note cursor is under the B in the XMT LBL field)
On the back of the DATATRAC 200:
Move the cables (HI and LO) connected to the 429 TX to CSDB TX
Move the cables (HI and LO) connected to the 429 RX to CSDB RX
On DATATRAC 200:
Enter 1E (this is the CSDB
tuning word label)
DATATRAC responds with a
default field of 0s and 100 below
MSEC
Change XMT data field as shown
------------->
(Be sure to press INC)
LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX XMT DATA MSEC
1E 10011001 63 52 44 13 100
|||||||| || || ||<||<-Gillham altitude *
|||||||| ||<||<-ATC code *
|||||| |<- SI; 01 = side 1, 10 = side 2
||||||<-Test; 1 = on
|||||<-ATC ident; 1 = on
||||<-Altitude reporting; 1 = on
|||<-Mode; 1 = standby
||<-Pad (not used)
|<-Validity; 1 = valid
* Refer to paragraph 5.6.3.2 for code description.
On ATC-601: select
ATCRBS REPLY TEST
and press RUN to indicate TEST
RUNNING
----------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST NO REPLY **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
6/ 15/ 1995 5-80
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
5.0
(contd)
CSDB tuning
and altitude
test (contd)
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT to CSDB
Set ALTITUDE DATA, ALTITUDE TYPE SELECT to CSDB (CTL)
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB PORT 1
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO CTL
Set SOURCE SELECT to CTL
On the test panel CONTROL CONNECTOR J1, connect two jumpers:
From Pin To Pin
26 41
25 8 Note: These jumpers are not required if MOD 1 has been installed in the
test panel.
Set POWER switch ON
DATATRAC 200 screen -->
LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX RCV DATA MSEC
1F 11011001 63 52 44 13 0100
A0 10000001 20 20 00 00 0100
F3 00000001 00 00 00 00 0100
LBL 7-STAT-0 HEX XMT DATA MSEC
1E 10011001 63 52 44 13 100
On test panel:
Set the OUTPUT PORT SELECT
switch to CSDB PORT 2.
Notice that the same data is displayed. (The data may
flicker somwhat while you are switching; ignore that.)
Important points:
The 1F RCV word is a reflection of the 1E XMT word
The A0 RCV word is irrelavent here, the hex data shown above can be different
The F3 word is the diagnostic word and should indicate no faults; HEX DATA is all 0s. Bits 1
and 0 of the status byte are the SI bits and indicate that the UUT is set for side 1 (01) which
must be true of all word labels.
The ATC-601 screen shows:
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT= 32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Important points:
Notice that the CODE agrees with the HEX XMT DATA 1E word except that the hex digital pair
groupings are reversed in order. That is, the XMT and RCV words show 63 52 while the ATC-
601 shows 5263. In the altitude field, the XMT and RCV words show 44 13 while the ATC-601
shows 1344.
6.0 ARINC 429
Altitude Test
On ATC-601: select
ATCRBS REPLY TEST and press RUN
to indicate TEST RUNNING --------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set the POWER switch to OFF
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to ARINC 429
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to ARINC 429 PORT A
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch to PA
On DATATRAC 200:
Move the TX and RX leads to the ARINC ports.
Reinitialize the unit for ARINC 429 operation.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-81
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
6.0
(contd)
ARINC
429 Alti-
tude Test
(contd)
On DATATRAC 200:
Set XMT to ON
Setup screen ------>
Lbl SI 29-Hex RCV-11 SM P MSEC
>> NO DATA RECEIVED
Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 11 1 100
On test panel:
Set POWER to ON
EXT STBY to OPR
Be sure REP ALT switch is at PA
POWER indicator comes on immediately and after a
few seconds the XFEED OUT lamp turns on. The ATC-
601 REPLY lamp indicates that UUT is responding to
interrogations.
The ATC-601 screen shows: --->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
(The CODE 5263 depends on your selection in the 031
XMT word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above.)
DATATRAC 200 RCV screen shows:
------->
Lbl SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSRC
031 01 559A0 11 1 0200
203 01 20000 11 1 0200
350 01 00000 11 1 0200
(ignore any other displayed labels, and the order is not
important)
6.1 ARINC
Altitude
Control
Disc-retes
Tests
On the test panel:
Be sure the SOURCE SELECT switch
is set to SEL.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On the test panel:
Set the REP ALT SEL switch to PB
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: At this point the UUT is configured to report
altitude data from port B. There is none so the display
blanks.
On the test panel:
Move the parallel connection from the
PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
jack to the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTI-
TUDE SOURCE jack.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This verifies that UUT is configured to report
altitude data being supplied on port B.
On the test panel:
Set the REP ALT SEL switch to PA
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: UUT is returned to port A. This series of steps
has verified that the Reporting Altitude discrete is
switchable.
On the test panel:
Set the SOURCE SELECT switch to
CTL
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This switches the UUT to the altitude data sup-
plied on the control port.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-82
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
6.1
(contd)
ARINC
Alltitude
Control
Disc-retes
Tests
(contd)
On the test panel:
Disconnect the parallel connection from
the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE jack. (Wait about 5 seconds)
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains.
Note: This verifies the previous step; that altitude is
being drawn from the control port; all other sources are
now disconnected.
On test panel:
Set the SOURCE SELECT switch to
SEL.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: This verifies that the Source Select Discrete is
switchable.
On test panel:
Reconnect the parallel connection to
the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE jack.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains
blanked.
On test panel:
Set the AUTO ALT switch to SEL
(-003 UUT units only)
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This enables the automatic altitude port select
feature and verifies that the UUT switches to alternate
port B even though port A is selected (REP ALT at PA).
On test panel:
Set AUTO ALT switch to OFF.
(-003 UUT units only)
Notice that ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: This verifies that the AUTO ALT discrete is
switchable.
On the DATATRAC:
Set the XMT label 031 word to
-------->
Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSRC
031 01 55988 00 1 100
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This digitally switches the UUT to port B. If this
test is correct while the earlier test of port B altitude
failed, suspect a problem with the Reporting Altitude
Select discrete. If both tests failed, suspect a problem
with the altitude data receivers.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY.
Set the POWER switch OFF.
On DATATRAC 200:
Set the XMT label 031 word to
--------->
Lbl SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSRC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
6/ 15/ 1995 5-83
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
The remainder of the step is optional. Testing for various digital altitude inputs is primarily software verification and therefore
unnecessary. If the UUT responds to one altitude word input it will likely respond to all.
If you wish, you can set the XMT label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV label 203
word data field will follow the XMT word exactly while the ATC-601, set to the ATCRBS REPLY TEST mode, will show the altitude
to the nearest 100 feet. When set to the MODE UF0 TEST, the ATC-601 displays altitude to the nearest 25 feet. The label
203 bit values are shown in note 2 following step 1.2.
To simulate any altitude up to about 131,000 feet:
1. Select the desired altitude.
2. Find the data bit with the maximum bit value less than the selected altitude. Make a note of that bit number.
3. Subtract that bit value from your selected value.
4. Find the next bit with the maximum bit value less than the remainder. Make a note of that bit number.
5. Subtract that bit value from your remainder.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the remainder is 0.
In the XMT label 203 data word, set all noted bits to 1. You should see your selected altitude, to the nearest 100 feet,
displayed on the ATC-601.
7.0 ARING
575 Alti-
tude Test
On test panel:
SOURCE SELECT: SEL
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On DATATRAC 200:
Set screen ------>
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
>> NO DATA RECEIVED
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 10000 00 1 100
On test panel:
Connect parallel control cable to PRI-
MARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
jack.
Set POWER switch to ON.
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR.
On ATC-601:
Select ATCRBS REPLY TEST and
press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING.
ATC-601 screen -------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to
ARINC 575
On DATATRAC:
Set XMT label 203 word
-------->
(just change the SM to 00)
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 0100
203 01 10000 00 1 0200
ATC-601 screen -------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=16,400 FT [3230]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
6/ 15/ 1995 5-84
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
7.0
(con-
td)
ARINC
575 Alti-
tude Test
(contd)
DATATRAC screen --------->
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
203 01 10000 11 1 100
(ignore any other displayed words)
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 00 1 100
In addition to testing the altitude type select discrete, this test illustrates the differences between
ARINC 429 and ARINC 575 data. Notice that the msb in the RCV label 203 word (above) are offset
by one bit from the XMT label 203 word and the SSM code is 11 as opposed to the 00 in the XMT word.
In ARINC 575, the LSB is bit 13; in ARINC 429 the LSB is bit 12. In ARINC 575, bits 30 and 31
determine the sign; 00 being positive.
Notice also, that the altitude displayed on the ATC-601 corresponds to the code in the RCV word; not
the XMT word. This is also due to the UUT being configured for ARINC 575 and thus the bit values
are offset by 1 bit position which has the effect of changing the altitude by a factor of 1/2.
On test panel:
Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to
ARINC 429
On DATATRAC:
Set XMT label 203 word ---->
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 11 1 100
(Set SM to 11) ATC-601 screen:
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
6/ 15/ 1995 5-85
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
8.0 Mode S
Address
Disc-retes
Test
On the test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set all test panel mode s address switches to SEL except switch P1-56; set it to OFF.
Set POWER switch ON
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S ALL CALL TEST ------->
** MODE S ALL CALL TEST - NO REPLY **
ALL CALL ADDRESS = [ ] TAIL
NUMBER =
Press RUN to start
On ATC 601:
Press RUN
Note screen ----->
** MODE S ALL CALL TEST - PASSED **
ALL CALL ADDRESS = FFFFFE [77777776]
TAIL NUMBER =
****** TEST RUNNING *****
The remainder of this step will require a few minutes because of the delay involved in cycling power
between each switch setting.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 6.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = DB6DB6 [66666666]
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 4.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = 924924 [44444444]
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 0, except the eighth triad
which is set to 1.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = 000001 [00000001]
6/ 15/ 1995 5-86
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
9.0 TCAS /
NO TCAS
Discrete
Select
and
TCAS
Bus Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On DATATRAC 200:
Set XMT words as shown ----->:
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 55980 00 1 100
203 01 20000 11 1 100
ATC-601 is not needed for this test but can be left on.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After data appears on the RCV display,
press RCV and then INC to scroll the
words so that you can see the 350 word.
After a few seconds the RCV portion of the DATATRAC
200 screen shows:
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
350 01 00000 11 1 0200
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to TCAS
On DATATRAC 200:
Press RCV and then ENT
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
After a few seconds the RCV portion of the DATATRAC
200 screen shows: (use INC key to scroll words)
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
350 01 45980 11 1 0200
Refer to paragraph 5.7.2 for a more detailed discussion. The 45980 display translates into a
diagnostic B3 which is interpreted: TCAS Bus Inactive. This verifies that the discrete properly
configures the unit for operation with a TCAS. However, no TCAS data is being supplied in this step,
therefore, the unit declares a B3 diagnostic.
TCAS
Bus Test,
XPDR to
TCAS
Connect the DATATRAC RCV to the
TCAS OUT jack. Verify that the data
word labels are detectable as shown -----
--->.
Note: Except for the diagnostic code in
the label 350 data word, the data content
is not important. It is quite likely that the
data will be different. The presence of
the data word labels shown verifies that
the TCAS data bus output is active and
appears to be normal.
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
275 00 00000 00 1 0150
276 10 07C00 00 1 0150
350 01 45980 11 1 0150
Notice the higher speed. Other labels may also be
present.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-87
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
9.0
(contd)
TCAS to
XPDR
Bus Test
Note: In this step you need the capability of transmitting data to two separate input ports simulta-
neously and at different speeds; the 031 control word must be low speed (12.5-kbps) while the
TCAS label 274 data word must be high speed (100-kbps). All DATATRAC instruments, as well as
the JC Air 429E, can transmit at either of these speeds but only the DATATRAC 400 can do so on
two separate ports simultaneously. Otherwise, you will need two simulators. If you do not have this
capability, you may not be able to verify the integrity of the TCAS bus input port.
If you are using a DATATRAC 400, or
have access to a second bus simulator,
connect your second transmitter port or
data bus simulator to the TCAS IN and
setup as shown -------->:
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
274 00 C0000 00 1 0100
Note: Be sure to set the higher speed.
On bus reader RCV (1) display:
Note: The objective is to verify that the
UUT recognizes a valid TCAS label 274
word and declares this by removing the
diagnostic B3.
After a few seconds, the 350 word shows:
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
350 01 00000 11 1 0150
Note: This verifies that the unit is able to receognize a
valid TCAS label 274 word and declare that by remov-
ing the B3 diagnostic code.
On the bus reader:
Set the XMT (2) word to OFF
After a few seconds, notice that the B3 diagnostic
returns.
Note: Disconnect XMT (2) from the
TCAS IN jack and CONNECT IT TO THE
PRIMARY DIGITAL CONTROL.
Reconnect RCV to the DATA BUS
OUTPUT port.
Final step
in this
test, all
setups
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to NO
TCAS
On DATATRAC 200:
Press RCV and then ENT
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
After a few seconds, the original 350 word returns:
-----------------RCV--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 00 00 01 17 11 1 0200
6/ 15/ 1995 5-88
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
10.0 Side 1/
Side 2
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Be sure SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch is set to
SIDE 1.
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as in step 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen
------>
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light and the ATC-601 shows:
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch to SIDE 2
(wait a few seconds, then)
Set POWER switch to ON
Notice that UUT does not reply (X FEED OUT lamp and
REPLY lamps are off and no altitude is displayed on
ATC-601). Wait about 10 seconds.
Note: UUT does not respond because the SI and side
strapping do not agree.
Note: If you do not allow sufficient time for the CPU to
power down, it may not recognize the power interruption
and fail to re-initialize properly. The SIDE 1/2 strap is
one of several that is not monitored except at initial-
ization. Therefore, if this test fails, cycle power again
but allow more time between power-off and power-on.
On DATATRAC 200:
On XMT, label 031 word, set the SI to
10 and press INC
Notice that unit begins to reply almost immediately
(XFEED OUT lamp turns on and ATC-601 REPLY lamp
lights).
Note: UUT responds because SI and side strapping
agrees.
On DATATRAC 200:
On XMT, label 031 word, set SI to 01
and press INC.
Notice that unit stops replying (X FEED OUT lamp and
ATC-601 REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch to SIDE 1
(wait a few seconds)
Set POWER switch to ON
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light and the ATC-601 shows that the UUT is
replying.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-89
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
11.0 AIR/
GND
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Same as initial setup
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for step 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S UF4 TEST screen
-------->
** MODE S UF4 TEST - NO REPLY **
DF FS= DR= UM= AC=
ADDRESS=
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch OPR
Set AIR/GND switch AIR
ATC-601 screen shows ----->:
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light and the ATC-601 shows:
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
DF 4 FS=0 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: Initially the screen may show FS=2 for about 2
seconds and then change to FS=0.
On test panel:
Set AIR/GND switch to GND
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 shows:
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
DF 4 FS=1 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Of particular significance here is the FS (flight status) indication.
For a detailed description of each of these message fields, refer to the Theory of Operation section.
On test panel:
Set AIR/GND switch to AIR
After a few seconds, notice that the ATC-601 FS field
again shows 0.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-90
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
12.0 DL ANT/
SGL ANT
Discrete
Test
(TDR-94D
only)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for step 1.1.
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST
screen ----->
Be sure the ATC-601 is connected to the
top antenna port.
** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to DL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
You can watch the PERIOD display for a
time. After PASSED appears, press
RUN/STOP to stop the test.
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 2.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
See the note at the end of this step for test tolerances.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to SGL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
After FAILED (or PASSED) appears, press
RUN/STOP to stop the test.
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows:
** SQUITTER TEST - FAILED **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: This test is intended to fail. When the UUT is set
for single antenna operation, there is no transmission
from the top antenna port. Therefore, if this test
indicates PASSED, recheck all switch settings, or suspect
a problem with the SGL/DL ANT select strap. It should
not pass.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to stop the test.
Remove rf terminator from bottom
antenna connector
Connect ATC-601 cable to bottom
antenna connector
Connect rf terminator to top antenna
connector
6/ 15/ 1995 5-91
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
12.0 DL ANT
/SGL
ANT Dis-
crete Test
(contd)
(TDR-94D
only)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON.
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to start the test.
After PASSED appears, press RUN/STOP
to stop the test.
After 15 to 20 seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows:
See note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 1.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to DL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
After PASSED appears, press RUN/STOP
to stop the test.
After 15 to 20 seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows:
See note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 2.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: The PERIOD value tends to vary somewhat in all cases. When the UUT is set for dual antenna
operation and the ATC-601 is monitoring the top or the bottom antenna port, the value can vary from
1.6 to 2.4. When the UUT is set for single antenna operation there should be no transmission from
the top antenna port and the transmission PERIOD from the bottom antenna port can vary from 0.6 to
1.4.
13.0 Burst
Tune and
Cross-
Feed In
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
CONTROL DATA PORT SEL:
PB
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for step 1.1.
On ATC-601, set for ATCRBS REPLY
TEST screen ----->
If necessary, reconnect ATC-601 to top
antenna connector, with terminator on
bottom antenna connector.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT and
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to IN
Notice that both X FEED lamps are lighted.
On DATATRAC 200:
Set XMT to OFF
Note: The easiest method of interrupting
the data input is simply to disconnect it
from the test panel.
Notice that the X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps turns off (X FEED IN stays on).
6/ 15/ 1995 5-92
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
13.0
(con-
td)
Burst
Tune and
Cross-
Feed In
Discrete
Test
(contd)
On DATATRAC 200:
Set XMT to ON (reconnect the control
input)
Notice that the X FEED IN and OUT and REPLY lamps
are lit.
On test panel:
Set XFEED switch to OUT.
Set BURST switch to BURST
Notice that XFEED IN lamp turns off and that UUT
replies (X FEED OUT and REPLY lamps turn on).
On test panel:
Disconnect the DATATRAC XMT input
from the test panel.
Notice that UUT continues to reply (X
FEED OUT and REPLY lamps stay on).
On DATATRAC 200:
Set BURST switch to OFF
Notice that UUT stops replying (X FEED OUT and
REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel:
Set BURST switch to BURST
Notice that UUT does not reply (X FEED OUT and
REPLY lamps remain off).
On test panel:
Reconnect the DATATRAC XMT to the
test panel
Notice that UUT replies (X FEED OUT and REPLY
lamps turn on).
On test panel:
Set BURST switch to OFF
14.0 Output
Port Dis-
crete Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429 PORT A
On DATATRAC 200:
Set for the same screen as for test 1.1
On ATC-601, set for ATCRBS REPLY
TEST screen ----->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUTand
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit
is replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates
PASSED.
On test panel:
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to
ARINC 429 PORT B
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
display does not change.
On test panel:
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to
ARINC 429 PORT A
6/ 15/ 1995 5-93
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
15.0 Control
Data
Input Port
Select
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set SOURCE SELECT switch to SEL
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
CONTROL DATA SELECT: ARINC
PORT PA
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for step 1.1.
On ATC-601, set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST
screen ----->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT and
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch
to ARINC PORT PB
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUTand REPLY lights are on and ATC-601 dis-
play does not change.
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch
to ARINC PORT PC
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
display does not change.
16.0 Manual
STBY
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch to ARINC PORT PA
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for step 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST
screen ---------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUTand
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Note that X FEED OUT lamp and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps turn off and ATC-601 indicates NO REPLY. See
note below.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
Note that X FEED OUT lamp and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light almost immediately and ATC-601 indicates
PASSED.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-94
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
17.0 Max Air-
speed
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
Be sure that all three MAX AIRSPEED switches are set to OFF (opposite of SEL).
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for step 1.1.
(The DATATRAC is used here only for
tuning data.)
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S UF0 TEST screen ------>
** MODE S UF0 TEST - NO REPLY **
DF VS= RI= AC=
ADDRESS=
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT lamp
and the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the
unit is replying.
Note the ATC-601 screen ----------->
** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **
DF 0 VS=0 RI=8 AC= 32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Exercise the MAX AIRSPEED switches on the test panel and verify the correct RI indication as
shown in the following list. Cycle power between each switch change. Allow about 2 or 3 seconds
OFF time and about 5 seconds for processor initialization and ATC-601 response time between each
switch setting.
MAX AIRSPEED SWITCH RI VALUE
BIT 15 BIT 16 BIT 17
OFF OFF OFF 8
SEL OFF OFF 9
OFF SEL OFF A
SEL SEL OFF B
OFF OFF SEL C
SEL OFF SEL D
OFF SEL SEL E
SEL SEL SEL F (not an assigned configuration)
It is worth noting that in this test mode the ATC-601 displays the altitude to the nearest 25 feet.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-95
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
18.0 Ext Sup-
pression
Test
On test panel:
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for test 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen -----
->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Connect scope channel A to the test
panel SUPPR test points.
Connect scope channel B to the REPLY
VIDEO BNC connector on the ATC-601.
Set the scope to display both channels
Note a (approx) 30s pulse on channel A.
Note a reply waveform on channel B. If your scope is
able, you will see the individual reply code pulses on
channel B. You may also see the occasional squitter
transmission which appears as a much longer series of
pulses at about 1 transmission every 2 sec. Of particu-
lar importance, however, is that the channel A (sup-
pression) pulse is about 30 s long during ATCRBS
reply, and brackets the 21 s ATCRBS reply. During
squitter transmission, the suppression pulse extends to
bracket the squitter transmission. The squitter trans-
mission is a DF11 reply about 72 s long.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-96
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
19.0 ADLP
Select,
Discrete
Strap
Test
On test panel:
Be sure DATALINK switch is set to NO
ADLP.
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for test 1.1.
DATATRAC RCV screen ------>
Note: The ATC-601 is not needed for
this test but it can remain connected and
operating.
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
350 00 60000 11 1 0200
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set DATALINK switch to ADLP.
Be sure DATALINK SELECT switch is
set to A/B.
Set POWER switch to ON.
DATATRAC RCV screen ------>
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
350 00 25100 11 1 0200
Note: The diagnostic A2 identifies an inactive ADLP
bus. This test verifies that the ADLP enable discrete is
functional.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF.
Set DATALINK switch to NO ADLP.
Set POWER switch to ON.
DATATRAC RCV screen ------>
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
350 01 60000 11 1 0200
Note: The Airborne Datalink system is not fully implemented at this time. If and when an ADLP
(Airborne DataLink Processor) becomes available and operational, suitable procedures will be
provided to verify the integrity of the ADLP input/output ports. At this point, therefore, verification of
the ADLP SELECT strap is seen as sufficient to prevent nuisance diagnostics that can occur if the
select input should be defective. You will notice that the DATALINK SELECT A/B, C/D function is
also not tested.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-97
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
20.0 Remote
IDENT
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Same as initial setup
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for test 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Setup for ATCRBS REPLY test
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Press and release the REMOTE IDENT
switch.
On DATATRAC 200:
Note RCV screen ----->:
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
031 00 55984 11 1 0200
|<----Ident bit
Note: The 4 should appear in the data field only while
the switch is being pressed. This verifies that the dis-
crete input is functional.
On ATC-601:
Notice the ID display. ID should dis-
play for about 18 seconds.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=ID5263 ALT= 32,800 FT [1344]
|<----ID display
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On Datatrac 200:
Set the label 031 XMT word:
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 00 55984 00 1 100
On DATATRAC RCV and on ATC-601: You should see the same displays as immediately
above. If the test failed using the REMOTE IDENT
switch, but succeeds here, then suspect a failure in the
discrete input or the test panel.
On Datatrac 200:
Set the label 031 XMT word:
LBL SI 29-HEX XMT-11 SM P MSEC
031 00 55980 00 1 100
6/ 15/ 1995 5-98
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
21.0 Self Test On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
AIR/GND: AIR
SELF TEST: ENABLE: OFF
On DATATRAC 200:
Same setup as for test 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST
---------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT lamp
and the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the
unit is replying. The ATC-601 screen indicates PASSED.
On DATATRAC 200:
screen shows: --------->
LBL SI 29-HEX RCV-11 SM P MSEC
031 01 559A0 11 1 0200
203 01 00000 11 1 0200
350 01 00000 11 1 0200
(You may need to press INC to display all three labels.)
In the next few steps, watch the
DATATRAC RCV screen carefully.
On the test panel:
Press and hold the SELF TEST
pushbutton for about 1 sec.
After a few seconds, notice that the DATATRAC and
ATC-601 screens do not change. (The test panel TEST
lamp lights while you hold the switch but otherwise
there is no change.)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-99
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-12 Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the DATATRAC 200 Databus Analyzer (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
21.0 Self Test
(contd)
On test panel:
Set the AIR/GND switch to GND
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON
Press and hold the SELF-TEST button
for about 1 s
Note: The test panel TEST lamp lights
while you hold the switch. This has no
bearing on UUT operation, however. If
the lamp does not light, check the test
panel.
On the DATATRAC 200, press RCV
(either once or twice) to return to the
setup screen, followed by ENT, to clear
the screen of any extraneous labels.
Self-test Displays:
After a few seconds, notice that the X FEED OUT lamp
turns off briefly while the ATC-601 screen shows +s or
-s in most of the data fields, followed by blank fields.
After a few seconds, notice that the X FEED OUT
lamps turns on again and the ATC-601 screen returns
to the normal display.
On the DATATRAC, notice that the SMs change to 10
and then back to 11. This instrument has a tendency to
retain superceded data words, therefore, you may need
to clear the screen repeatedly to be sure that you are
viewing current data. You should try to be especially
watchful of the 350 data word and try to catch any
diagnostic codes that may be displayed during the self-
test sequence.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
OFF.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice that the self-test displays as described above do
not appear..
Note: This verifies that self test is properly inhibited by
the self-test inhibit discrete.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON.
Set the AIR/GND switch to AIR.
Wait about 5 seconds *.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice that the self-test displays as described above do
not appear..
Note: This verifies that self test is properly inhibited by
the AIR/GND discrete.
*Note: The CPU must be allowed sufficient time to complete at least one software cycle in order to
recognize the change in the AIR/GND discrete. If you press the SELF TEST switch in less than
about 3 seconds of setting the AIR/GND switch to AIR, the unit may execute self-test as though it
were not inhibited. This should be seen as normal.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON.
Set the AIR/GND switch to GND.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice the self-test displays as described above reap-
pear.
Note: This verifies that the self-test inhibit and AIR/GND
discretes are switchable.
This completes this test sequence. Successful completion of this series provides reasonable
assurance that the unit is operational. However, this test does not satisfy the requirements of a
Detailed Performance Test which must be performed after any repair operation.
Turn off all power, disconnect the equipment, and return it to its normal storage location. Return the
UUT to its original shipping container, or equivalent, if it is to remain in storage. Otherwise, prepare
it for installation.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-100
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.5.11 Procedures usi ng the J cAI R 429E Transmi tter/Recei ver
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
1.0 Setup Note: If you are using a Test Panel built according to instruction provided in a previous edition of this
manual, it may be necessary to upgrade the panel. Refer to paragraph 5-8.
If not already done, connect equipment as shown in figure 5-2 using cables shown in figure 5-9.
TX to test panel DIGITAL CONTROL port,
Parallel connect TX to test panel PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE PORT,
RX to test panel DATA BUS READER port.
Connect the ATC-601 to the UUT bottom antenna connector.
Connect an rf termination to the TOP antenna port (TDR-94D only).
Connect power to test panel power jacks - observe proper polarity.
Preset the switches as shown in paragraph 5.4.5.6 above. Be sure POWER switch is OFF and EXT
STBY switch is at STBY.
On test panel, set the MODE S ADDRESS switches to any combination except all OFF or all to SEL.
If all switches are set OFF or all set SEL, a diagnostic code FF will result.
1.1 Setup Turn the JcAIR 429E on and set the TX 1
and TX 2 screens ----->
031 01 1566C1 00
203 01 640001 11
Turn on
TDR-94/94D
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
Monitor current. If OK:
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
Monitor current.
If the unit has been in service and there is a possibility of
an over-current condition, monitor the power supply
current output. The setup should draw no more than 1.5
A. Typically it draws about 0.9 to 1.1 A when the UUT is
transmitting.
Setup
(power-up)
Turn the ATC-601 on and press SELECT
for the screen -------------->
See Note in next cell below.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - NOT RUN **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
1.2 ARINC 429
tuning test
On the ATC-601, press RUN
ATC-601 screen --------->
Note: When power is applied and proper
control data is supplied, the TDR-94/94D
should turn on the XFEED OUT lamp
almost immediately. The FAULT MON
lamp may be off for a few seconds and
then turn on. A lighted FAULT MON lamp
should generally be seen as a no-fault
indication. See table 109.
UUT responds to interrogations as indicated by a lighted
XFEED OUT lamp on the test panel and a lighted REPLY
lamp on the ATC-601.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
To change the CODE, see note 1 below.
To change the ALTITUDE, see note 2 below.
The JcAIR 429E RX displays show
--------->
203 01 E40000 11
031 01 F56681 11
350 01 600001 11
Note: Any other labels displayed are irrelevant to this
test. See Note 3 below.
6/15/1995 5-101
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TI TLE PROCEDURE DESI RED RESULTS
Note 1. You can change the (octal ) CODE=XXXX display by changing data bits 18 through 29 in the label 031 data word (TX
field of the JcAIR 429E) as follows:
ATC-601 digit: First Second Third Fourth
Bit: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Data: Par SSM |<-----Data -------> ----->| Pad
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
JcAIR 429E (Hex): | 1 | | 5 | | 6 | | 6 |
Binary: 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Octal val ue: 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Produces CODE: 5 2 6 3
Bi ts 11 through 17, of the l abel 031 control word, are assi gned the fol l owi ng functi ons:
JcAI R 429E (Hex) bi ts: 5th 6th
Bit: 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
Bit values: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| | | | Pad | |<- |<--SDI
Assignment: Pad Pad | | |<--Altitude reporting, 1 = OFF
| |<--Ident, 1 = ON
|<--Altitude port select, 1 = B
Note 2: You can set the TX label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV 1 label 203 word
data field will reflect the TX word while the ATC-601 will show the altitude to the nearest 100 feet. The label 203 word data bit
values are as follows:
JcAIR 429E digit *: lst | 2nd | | 3rd |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21
Alt value:(sign bit; 0 = +) 65536 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512
(in feet)
JcAIR 429E digit *: | 4th | | 5th | | 6th |
Hex value: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bit: 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 09
Alt value 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 ** ** **
(in feet)
Determine the altitude by totaling the bit values of all bits set to 1.
* The left-most Hex Data bit (bit 1) is determined by the parity bit 32, the SSM bits 31 and 30, and sign bit 29. Since bit 29
must always be a 0, this Hex bit must always be an odd number. **= Not used
Note 3: You may see a label 371 data word. This is the ARINC 429 Specific Equipment Identification word which is
structured the same as other ARINC 429 words but conveys the following information:
Bits 11 through 18 identify the equipment type. The code for ATC transponders is 18 therefore bits 14 and 15 are 1; the
others are 0. Bits 19 through 24 convey a binary code identifying the equipment manufacturer. Collins is 6. Therefore bits
20 and 21 are 1; all others are 0. Bits 24 through 29 are reserved for purposes to be defined.
When ARINC 572 altitude data is active, you will see a label 200 data word. This word reflects the ARINC 572 (Gillham code)
altitude data. This word is structured the same as other ARINC 429 words, except bits 9 and 10 are part of the data field; i.e.,
there is no SDI. Bits 9,10, and 11 reflect the D1, D2, and D4 code bits respectively. Bits 13, 14, and 15 reflect the C-bits,
bits 17, 18, and 19 reflect the B-bits, and 21, 22, and 23 reflect the A-bits.
6/15/1995 5-102
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
2.0 Test set, Auto
Test
On ATC-601:
Press RUN/STOP to stop
Press AUTO TEST
Press RUN to start
Note: Thi s test requi res a few
seconds to run. I t wi l l stop
automati cal l y.
Ensure that al l tests pass. See note bel ow.
On test panel :
Set EXT STBY swi tch to STBY
Set POWER swi tch OFF
On UUT:
Move the test set rf cabl e to the UUT top antenna connector and the rf termi nati on to the
bottom.
On test panel :
Set POWER swi tch ON
Set EXT STBY swi tch to OPR
On ATC-601:
Repeat the AUTO TEST
Ensure that all tests pass. See note below.
Note. The AUTO TEST sequence will indicate FAILED even when certain tests result in a NO REPLY condition. The NO
REPLY conditions are the result of no ADLP (Airborne Data Link Processor) data in this setup. This same condition is likely
to occur when using the ATC-601 as a ramp tester when testing an installation not equipped with an ADLP. To verify that the
test can be seen as successful, proceed as follows:
When the test sequence is completed and the ATC-601 stops, as indicated by INTERR and REPLY lamps off, you will likely
see a screen as follows:
** AUTO TEST - FAILED **
MODES TESTED - A,C,S FREQ: 1089.92 Mhz
MODES PASSED - A,C,S ERP: 55 Dbm
MODES FAILED - -> MTL: -77 Dbm
DIVERSITY ISOLATION: >40 dB
Press RUN to start
(The FREQ, ERP, and MTL values can vary from UUT to UUT and to a lesser degree on UUT temperature.)
Verify the test results as follows:
On the ATC-601, use the SELECT up arrow or down arrow key to scroll through the following list of tests performed; the
numbers are for reference purposes only and do not appear on the test set screen. If you use the down arrow, you will see
the list in the order shown; from test 1 through test 19. If you use the up arrow key, you will see the list in reverse order,
starting at test 19. You will likely notice that all tests passed except tests 13, 14, and 15 which had a NO REPLY.
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
1.0
** REPLY DELAY TEST - PASSED **
MODE S: 128.00 (0.25) s
ITM A: 128.00 (0.25) s
(All others): 3.00 (0.50) s
2.0
** REPLY JITTER TEST - PASSED **
MODE S: =< 0.05 s
I TM: =< 0.06 s
(Al l others): =< 0.1 s
3.0
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST - PASSED **
F1 TO F2 SPACING: 20.3 (0.1) s
All PULSE WIDTH: 0.45 (0.1) s
6/15/1995 5-103
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIPTION
4.0
** SLS LEVEL TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with F2 (SLS) pulse at 9 dB below F1.
UUT should reply to this interrogation. Then UUT is
interrogated with F2 equal to F1. UUT should not reply.
PASSED indicates correct response to both tests.
5.0
** ATC ONLY ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
The TDR-94/94D should not reply to this mode a and mode
c only interrogation. PASSED indicates a correct (NO)
response.
6.0
** MODE S ALL-CALL TEST - PASSED **
The TDR-94/94D should reply to this interrogation. PASSED
indicates a correct response. UUT address previously
determined in mode s interrogation, is sent to UUT in UF4
(Uplink Format 4) and verified in DF4 (Downlink Format 4)
reply.
7.0
** INVALID ADDRESS TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with two addresses, both of which are
different from the correct address. PASSED indicates UUT
did not reply to interrogation.
8.0
** SPR ON/OFF TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated first with SPR ON and verifies a proper
reply, then with SPR OFF and verifies no reply. PASSED
indicates UUT responded correctly.
9.0
** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with mode S UF0, verifying correct
altitude as compared to previous mode c reply, correct
address as compared to DF11 address, and correct format.
PASSED indicates correct UUT response.
10.0
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF4, verifying correct altitude as
compared to previous mode c reply, correct address as
compared to DF11 reply, and correct format. PASSED
indicates correct UUT response.
11.0
** MODE S UF5 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF5, verifying the correct ID code
as compared to previous mode a reply, correct address as
compared to DF11 reply, and correct format. PASSED
indicates correct UUT response.
12.0
** MODE S UF11 TEST - PASSED **
UUT is interrogated with UF11, verifying correct address as
compared to previous response, and correct format.
PASSED indicates correct UUT response.
13.0
** MODE S UF16 TEST - NO REPLY **
(See test 15.)
14.0
** MODE S UF20 TEST - NO REPLY **
(See test 15.)
6/15/1995 5-104
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
NO. TEST NAME AND RESULT TEST SPECIFICATION / DESCRIIPTION
15.0
** MODE S UF21 TEST - NO REPLY **
UUT is interrogated with UF16, UF20, and UF21.
These formats are all related to the airborne data link
function. This function has not been implemented.
The TDR-94/94D will not reply to these interrogation
formats. NO REPLY should not be seen as a failure.
16.0
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
When set for daul antenna operation, the TDR-94D
transmits a squitter pulse once each second, alternating
between top and bottom antenna ports. The ATC-601
verifies that one squitter pulse is received every 1.6 to
2.4 seconds. The test panel ANT SGL/DL switch must
be in the DL position. When set for single antenna
operation, or when testing a TDR-94, only the bottom
antenna port is used. In this case the ATC-601 verifies
that one squitter pulse is received every 0.6 to 1.4
seconds. When you change the ANT SGL/DL switch,
you must cycle power to the UUT in order for it to take
effect. PASSED indicates a correct UUT response.
17.0
** FREQUENCY TEST - PASSED **
Freq: 1090 (3) MHz
18.0
** DIVERSITY TEST - PASSED **
ATC-601 monitors squitter pulses on active antenna
port (as in test 16) and then monitors for intervening
squitter pulses that are not greater than 20 dB below
the active squitter. This test will always fail when the
UUT is a TDR-94 (non diversity) because squitter is
transmitter every second on the same antenna port. If
you are testing a TDR-94D and the DL ANT/SGL ANT
switch is set to SGL ANT, the test will also fail because
this causes the unit to operate like a TDR-94. PASSED
indicates a correct response from a TDR-94D.
19.0
** MTL DIFFERENCE TEST - PASSED **
ATC-601 verifies that the MTL difference between mode
a and mode c responses is < 1.0 dB. At this point,
another press of the arrow key will display the first item;
either 1.0 or 18.0, depending on which arrow was used.
6/15/1995 5-105
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
3.0 Power
output and
Rcvr
Sensitivity
Test
On test panel select:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
On ATC-601:
Select POWER TEST
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING ---
------>
** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
ANTENNA UNITS ERP MTL STATUS
NO REPLY
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: If necessary, press SELECT (or SLEW) to select Top Antenna. Be sure that the ATC-601 rf
cable is connected to the top antenna port and the rf termination is connected to the bottom port.
On JcAIR 429E: set TX screen ---
--->
031 01 1566C1 00
203 01 640001 11
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
After a few seconds, the ATC-601
shows ---->
On ATC-601:
Press RUN/STOP to stop the test.
** POWER TEST - Top Antenna **
ANTENNA UNITS ERP MTL STATUS
Top dBm 55.7 -76.0 PASSED
***** TEST RUNNING *****
If a failure is detected, a small arrow will be shown to
the left of the offending parameter(s). Make a note of
the test results, if a record is needed, and label it as
applicable to the UUT bottom antenna port. The data
displayed here will be overwritten on the next test.
If the UUT is a TDR-94, skip this step.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
On TDR-94D mount:
Swap the rf cable connection and
termination on the UUT antenna ports.
(Rf cable to bottom port and termination
to top antenna port.)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING
Wait a few seconds then press
RUN/STOP to stop the test.
You should see a similar display on the ATC-601
except this data is applicable to the top antenna port.
The data can be slightly different. See below for test
tolerances and an explanation of a possible failure
indication due to high sensitivity.
Note: You may also select bottom antenna screen on
the ATC-601.
Note: You may see a marginal test failure if the UUT is
relatively cold. In this case allow the unit to warm up a
few minutes and then repeat the test.
6/15/1995 5-106
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
3.0
(con-
td)
Power
output and
Rcvr
Sensitivity
Test
(contd)
The test tolerances are:
ERP: > 48.5 dBm and < 57.0 dBm
MTL: -73.0 (4.0) dBm
The ATC-601 will indicate that the UUT has failed if the MTL is more than -77.0 dBm or less than -71
dBm. Collins prefers, however, that a failure should be reported only if the MTL is less than -71
dBm. Therefore, if you have a unit displaying an MTL of -77.1 or more, you should see that value as
acceptable. Obviously, an MTL indication approaching -80 dBm or more may be cause for
suspecting a problem with test set calibration.
You may also see a failure because the ERP, Effective Radiated Power or Peak Pulse Power , is
more than 57 dBm. Power measurements taken with a ramp tester can be confusing. The various
test equipment manufacturers use different dimensions for displaying the test results, the test
specifications are not always clear on how the test is to be performed to produce the specified result,
and the test method; direct or radiation, yields different results. As in the case of MTL, an ERP
slightly greater than 57 dBm ( e.g., 59 dBm max), using the direction connection method, should not
be seen as cause for unit rejection.
DO-181 specifies the transponder power output at the antenna. Testing a unit on the bench by direct
connection to the antenna port yields a power reading at the transmitter output. The difference is,
of course, antenna cable and connector losses.
DO-181 specifies transponder power output in watts and dBW. The IFR ATC-601 displays power in
dBm (ERP). The TIC-48/-49 displays power in watts. The following chart may be useful for proper
test evaluation:
Watts dBW dBm TDR-94/94D Spec
50 16.99 46.99
70 18.45 48.45 (Min for airplanes limited to 15 000 ft and 175 kts.)
100 20.00 50.00
125 20.97 50.97 Minimum at antenna (ramp testing)
150 21.76 51.76
200 23.01 53.01
250 23.98 53.98 Minimum direct (on bench)
300 24.77 54.77
350 25.44 55.44
400 26.02 56.02
450 26.53 56.53
500 26.99 56.99 Maximum at antenna
To convert milliwatts to dBm, or watts to dBW:
a. For calculators with log
(10)
(usually written log or LOG): P
(dBW)
= 10 x LOG(P).
b. For calculators with log
(e)
(usually written ln or LN): P
(dBW)
= 10 x [LN(P) / LN(10)]
In both cases, P must be in watts. For dBm, P must be in milliwatts; for example:
450 watts = 450 000 milliwatts.
To convert from dBm to milliwatts or dBW to watts:
a. For calculators equipped with LOG : P = INVLOG (P
(dBW)
/ 10)
b. For calculators equipped with LN : P = INVLN [(P
(dBW)
/ 10) x 2.30259]
The result P will be in milliwatts if you use P
(dBm)
, or watts if you use P
(dBW)
.
Most scientific calculators have both the LN (natural logarithm - base e) and the LOG (logarithm base
10) capabiliity. Likewise, most have an INV (inverse) function. Thus you must press INV and then
LN or LOG for the INVLN or INVLOG function.
6/15/1995 5-107
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
4.0 Gillham
Altitude
Test
On ATC-601: select
ATCRBS REPLY TEST ----------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
Press RUN to start
On test panel select:
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 572
ARINC 572 ALT IN: TO TDR
Set SOURCE SEL switch to SEL
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX screen ------>
031 01 1566C1 00
On test panel:
Set POWER to OFF
Set all ARINC 572 switches to OFF:
Then set A4, C2, C4, and B4 to SEL.
Set POWER to ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
On ATC-601:
Press RUN.
The XFEED OUT lamp turns on. The ATC-601 REPLY
lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
JcAIR 429E RCV 1 screen shows: ---------
----------->
203 01 E0B861 11
031 01 F56681 11
(ignore any other labels)
ATC-601 Screen shows:
-------------------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=5900 FT [4460]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
(The CODE 5263 depends on your selection in the 031
TX word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above)
At this step you are asked to toggle each of the ARINC 572 switches and verify the altitude display. You should also watch
the RX data word on the JcAIR 429E display. By cycling each switch between OFF and SEL you should see the ATC-601
display and the JcAIR 429E 203 data word change. If the displays do not change for a particular switch, this would indicate
either an open or a shorted code line. If the wrong altitude is shown, this would suggest that the code line is affecting another
line; i.e., causing two or more inputs to change simultaneously. In either case the UUT, the test panel, or the interconnecting
cable needs repair.
Set each switch as shown in the listing below to the (position) shown, and back, and verify the altitude display at both
positions. The altitude display should always revert to the initial display when the switch is returned to its original position.
There is no serious need to verify the correctness of the RCV word provided the ATC-601 display is correct.
SWITCH DISPLAYED ALTITUDE SWITCH DISPLAYED ALTITUDE
Initial 5,900 FT [4460] C4 (OFF) 6,000 FT [4420]
A1 (SEL) 23,600 FT [5460] B1 (SEL) 3,600 FT [4560]
A2 (SEL) 7,600 FT [6460] B2 (SEL) 5,600 FT [4660]
A4 (OFF) -400 FT (0460] B4 (OFF) 6,600 FT [4060]
C1 (SEL) none (blank; this is invalid) D2 (SEL) 119,600 FT [4462]
C2 (OFF) 5,800 FT [4440] D4 (SEL) 55,600 FT [4464]
For additional information on Gillham code structure, refer to paragraph 5.7 below.
6/15/1995 5-108
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
5.0 CSDB
tuning
test
This test cannot be performed using a JcAIR 429E because these instruments are not capable of
transmitting or receiver CSDB data. However, as an acceptable alternative, you can use a CTL-
92/92A, connected to the test panel using the cable shown in figure 907.
Turn power off and connect CTL-92/92A to test panel. Be sure CTL-92/92A mode knob is set to
OFF.
Disconnect the JCAIR 429E from the test panel.
Turn power on and set the CTL-92/92A mode knob to ALT.
On the CTL:
Set the CTL-92/92A to 5263 or any
desired ident code.
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT to
CSDB
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB
PORT 1
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to CSDB
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO CTL
Set SOURCE SELECT to CTL
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
The CODE 5263 depends on your selection on the CTL-
92/92A code select knobs. See note 1 under step 1.2
above. The ALT display depends on the altitude
selection on the test panel ARINC 572 ALT IN switches.
Be sure that the ACT display, on the CTL-92/92A does
not flash. A flashing ACT indicates that the control
feedback label 1F data, from the TDR, does not agree
with the CLT-92/92A output label 1E data to the TDR.
Only one of the two data CTL input ports is being used;
pins U/V.
On the test panel:
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to CSDB
PORT 2
Be sure that the ACT display, on the CTL-92/92A, does
not flash. A flashing ACT at either port selection
indicates that output port has failed. If both ports flash,
there may be a problem with the test panel wiring or the
CTL input.
5.1 CSDB
altitude
test
In this altitude test configuration, Gillham altitude data is being supplied to the CTL (ARINC 572 ALT
IN to CTL). The CTL converts this data to CSDB and supplies it to the TDR via the CSDB data
output port (only 1 port is used; pins S/R). The CSDB altitude data is being read on the control bus
input (SOURCE SELECT to CTL). You can verify this by setting the CTL mode switch to ON. If you
suspect a problem with the altitude data, check the following:
On the test panel:
Set ARINC 572 ALT IN to TO TDR
Set ALT TYPE SELECT to ARINC 572
Set SOURCE SELECT to SEL
The ATC-601 ALT display should be the same as
above since the ultimate source of altitude information
is the same in both tests. If it is different here, suspect
a problem with one or more of the altitude discrete
inputs to the CTL. If you encounter such a problem,
you can identify the defective discrete by returning
these three switches to the settings above and then
performing the ARINC 572 switching sequence shown
following step 4.0 above.
On test panel:
Set power to OFF
Disconnect the CTL-92/92A from the test panel
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT - ARINC PORT to PA
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT to ARINC 429 PORT A
Reconnect the JcAIR 429E from the test panel.
6/15/1995 5-109
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
6.0 ARINC
429
Altitude
Test
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch to OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429
PORT A
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX screen ------>
031 01 1566C1 00
203 01 640001 11
On ATC-601: select
ATCRBS REPLY TEST and press RUN to
indicate TEST RUNNING --------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER to ON
Set EXT STBY to OPR
The XFEED OUT lamp turns on. The ATC-601 REPLY
lamp indicates that UUT is responding to interrogations.
The ATC-601 screen shows: --->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
(The CODE 5263 depends on your selection in the 031
TX word. See note 1 under step 1.2 above.)
JcAIR 429E RX screen shows:
------->
203 01 640001 11
(ignore any other displayed labels)
6.1 ARINC
Altitude
Control
Disc-retes
Tests
On the test panel:
Be sure the SOURCE SELECT switch
is set to SEL.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32 800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On the test panel:
Set the REP ALT SEL switch to PB
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: At this point the UUT is configured to report
altitude data from port B. There is none so the display
blanks.
On the test panel:
Move the parallel connection from the
PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
jack to the ALTERNATE DIGITAL
ALTITUDE SOURCE jack.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This verifies that UUT is configured to report
altitude data being supplied on port B.
On the test panel:
Set the REP ALT SEL switch to PA
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: UUT is returned to port A. This series of steps
has verified that the Reporting Altitude discrete is
switchable.
On the test panel:
Set the SOURCE SELECT switch to
CTL
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This switches the UUT to the altitude data
supplied on the control port.
6/15/1995 5-110
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
6.1
(contd)
ARINC
Control
Disc-retes
Tests
(contd)
On the test panel:
Disconnect the parallel connection from
the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE jack. (Wait about 5 seconds)
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains.
Note: This verifies the previous step; that altitude is
being drawn from the control port; all other sources are
disconnected.
On JcAIR 429E:
Set the SOURCE SELECT switch to
SEL.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: This verifies that the Source Select Discrete is
switchable.
On test panel:
Reconnect the parallel connection to
the ALTERNATE DIGITAL ALTITUDE
SOURCE jack.
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display remains
blanked.
On test panel:
Set the AUTO ALT switch to SEL
(-003 UUT units only)
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This enables the automatic altitude port select
feature and verifies that the UUT does switch to
alternate port B even though port A is the selected port.
On test panel:
Set the AUTO ALT switch to OFF
(-003 UUT units only)
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display blanks.
Note: This verifies that the AUTO ALT discrete is
switchable.
On the JcAIR 429E:
Set the TX label 031 word to
-------->
031 01 9566E1 00
Notice that the ATC-601 altitude display returns.
Note: This digitally switches the UUT to port B. If this
test is correct while the earlier test of port B altitude
failed, suspect a problem with the Reporting Altitude
Select discrete. If both tests failed, suspect a problem
with the altitude data receivers.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY.
Set the POWER switch OFF.
On JcAIR 429E:
Set the TX label 031 word to:
--------->
031 01 1566C1 00
6/15/1995 5-111
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
The remainder of the step is optional. Testing for various digital altitude inputs is primarily software verification and therefore
unnecessary. If the UUT responds to one altitude word input it will likely respond to all.
If you wish, you can set the TX label 203 data field bits 12 through 28 to any combination of 1 and 0. The RCV 1 label 203
word data field will follow the TX word exactly while the ATC-601, set to the ATCRBS REPLY TEST mode, will show the altitude
to the nearest 100 feet. When set to the MODE UF0 TEST, the ATC-601 displays altitude to the nearest 25 feet. The label
203 bit values are shown in note 2 following step 1.2.
To simulate any altitude up to about 131,000 feet:
1. Select the desired altitude.
2. Find the data bit with the maximum bit value less than the selected altitude. Make a note of that bit number.
3. Subtract that bit value from your selected value.
4. Find the next bit with the maximum bit value less than the remainder. Make a note of that bit number.
5. Subtract that bit value from your remainder.
6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until the remainder is 0.
In the TX label 203 data word, set all noted bits to 1. You should see your selected altitude, to the nearest 100 feet, displayed
on the ATC-601.
7.0 ARINC
575
Altitude
Test
On test panel:
SOURCE SELECT: SEL
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On JcAIR 429E:
Set screen ------>
031 01 1566C1 00
203 01 640001 11
On test panel:
Connect parallel control cable to
PRIMARY DIGITAL ALTITUDE SOURCE
jack.
Set POWER switch to ON.
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR.
On ATC-601:
Select ATCRBS REPLY TEST and
press RUN to indicate TEST RUNNING.
ATC-601 screen -------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to
ARINC 575
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX label 203 word -------->
(just change the SSM to 00)
203 01 040001 00
ATC-601 screen -------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=16,400 FT [3230]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
6/15/1995 5-112
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
7.0
(con-
td)
ARINC
575
Altitude
Test
(contd)
JcAIR 429E RX screen --------->
203 01 620001 11
In addition to testing the altitude type select discrete, this test illustrates the differences between
ARINC 429 and ARINC 575 data. Notice that the second data bit in the RX label 203 word (above)
one-half the bit value of the corresponding bit in the TX label 203 word and the SSM code is 11 as
opposed to the 00 in the TX word. In ARINC 575, the LSB is bit 13; in ARINC 429 the LSB is bit 12.
In ARINC 575, bits 30 and 31 determine the sign; 00 being positive.
Notice also, that the altitude displayed on the ATC-601 corresponds to the code in the RX word; not
the TX word. This is also due to the UUT being configured for ARINC 575 and thus the bit values
are offset by 1 bit position which has the effect of changing the altitude by a factor of 1/2.
On test panel:
Set ALT TYPE SELECT switch to
ARINC 429
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX label 203 word ---->
031 01 1566C1 00
203 01 640001 11
ATC-601 screen:
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelavent)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
6/15/1995 5-113
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS OR SETUP SCREEN
8.0 Mode S
Address
Discretes
Test
On the test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set all test panel mode s address switches to SEL except switch P1-56; set it to OFF.
Set POWER switch ON
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S ALL CALL TEST ------->
** MODE S ALL CALL TEST - NO REPLY **
ALL CALL ADDRESS = [ ] TAIL
NUMBER =
Press RUN to start
On ATC 601:
Press RUN
Note screen ----->
** MODE S ALL CALL TEST - PASSED **
ALL CALL ADDRESS = FFFFFE [77777776]
TAIL NUMBER =
****** TEST RUNNING *****
The remainder of this step should be seen as optional unless you have reason to suspect a failure in
one or more of the address discrete lines. The procedure will require a few minutes because of the
delay involved in cycling power between each switch setting.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 6.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = DB6DB6 [66666666]
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 4.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = 924924 [44444444]
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF.
Set each triad of address switches for
an octal digit 0, except the eighth triad
which is set to 1.
Set POWER switch ON.
After a few seconds, UUT begins to reply and shortly
thereafter the ATC-601 screen shows the following
address:
ALL CALL ADDRESS = 000001 [00000001]
6/15/1995 5-114
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
9.0 TCAS /
NO TCAS
Discrete
Select
and
TCAS
Bus Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as STEP 1.1.
ATC-601 is not needed for this test but can be left on.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After unit begins operating, display the
350 word.
The JcAIR 429E RX screen shows:
350 01 600001 11
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to TCAS
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
The JcAIR 429E RX screen shows:
350 01 68B301 11
|<---diagnostic code B3
The diagnostic code B3 indicates a TCAS bus failure.
Bit 28 in the data word is also set which produces the 8
in the display. See paragraph 5.B. below.
Refer to paragraph 5.B. for a more detailed discussion. This display shows a diagnostic B3 which is
interpreted: TCAS Bus Inactive. This verifies that the discrete properly configures the unit for
operation with a TCAS. However, no TCAS data is being supplied in this step, therefore, the unit
declares a B3 diagnostic.
TCAS
Bus Test,
XPDR to
TCAS
Connect the JcAIR 429E RX to the
TCAS OUT jack. Verify that the data
word labels are detectable as shown -----
--->.
Note: Except for the diagnostic code in
the label 350 data word, the data content
is not important. It is quite likely that the
data will be different. The presence of
the data word labels shown verifies that
the TCAS data bus output is active and
appears to be normal.
275 00 800000 00
276 10 80F802 00
350 01 68B301 11
|<---diagnostic code B3
Set the JcAIR 429E for high speed. Other labels may
also be present.
6/15/1995 5-115
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
9.0
(contd)
TCAS to
XPDR
Bus Test
Note: In this step you need the capability of transmitting data to two separate input ports
simultaneously and at different speeds; the 031 control word must be low speed (12.5-kbps) while
the TCAS label 274 data words must be high speed (100-kbps). All JcAIR 429E instruments can
transmit at either of these speeds but not on two separate ports simultaneously. If you do not have
this capability, you may not be able to verify the integrity of the TCAS bus input port.
If you have access to a second JcAIR
429E, connect your second transmitter
port or data bus simulator to the TCAS
IN and setup as shown -------->:
274 00 180000 00
Note: Be sure to set for high speed.
On bus reader RCV display:
Note: The objective is to verify that the
UUT recognizes a valid TCAS label 274
word and declares this by removing the
diagnostic B3.
After a few seconds, the 350 word shows:
350 01 680001 11
|<---diagnostic code 00
On the bus reader:
Set the XMT 2 word to OFF
After a few seconds, notice that the B3 diagnostic
returns.
Note: Disconnect XMT 2 from the TCAS
IN jack and reconnect RCV 1 to the
DATA BUS OUTPUT port.
Final step
in this
test, all
setups
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set TCAS/NO TCAS switch to NO
TCAS
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
After a few seconds, the original 350 word returns:
350 01 000001 11
6/15/1995 5-116
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
10.0 Side 1/
Side 2
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Be sure SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch is set to
SIDE 1.
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen -----
->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light and the ATC-601 shows:
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=5263 ALT=32,800 FT [1344]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch to SIDE 2
Set POWER switch to ON
Note that unit does not reply (X FEED OUT lamp and
REPLY lamps are off and no altitude is displayed on
ATC-601). Wait about 10 seconds.
Note: UUT does not respond because the SDI and side
strapping do not agree.
Note: Be sure to allow adequate time for the CPU to
reinitialize properly between power off and power on.
The SIDE 1/2 strap is one of several that are monitored
only at processor initialization. Therefore, if this tests
fails, cycle power again but allow more time between
power off and power on.
On JcAIR 429E:
On TX, label 031 word, set the SDI to
10
Notice that unit begins to reply almost immediately
(XFEED OUT lamp turns on and ATC-601 REPLY lamp
lights).
Note: UUT responds because the SDI and side
strapping agree.
On JcAIR 429E:
On TX, label 031 word, set SDI to 01.
Notice that unit stops replying (X FEED OUT lamp and
ATC-601 REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set SIDE 1/SIDE 2 switch to SIDE 1
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light and the ATC-601 shows that the UUT is
replying.
6/15/1995 5-117
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
11.0 AIR/
GND
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
TDR ALT SOURCE: EXT DIRECT
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S UF4 TEST screen ----->
** MODE S UF4 TEST - NO REPLY **
DF FS= DR= UM= AC=
ADDRESS=
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
ATC-601 screen shows ----->:
After a few seconds, X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light and the ATC-601 shows:
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
DF 4 FS=0 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: Initially the screen will show FS=2 for about 2
seconds and then change to FS=0.
On test panel:
Set AIR/GND switch to GND
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 shows:
** MODE S UF4 TEST - PASSED **
DF 4 FS=1 DR=00 UM=00 AC=32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Of particular significance here is the FS (flight status) indication.
For a detailed description of each of these message fields, refer to the Theory of Operation section.
On test panel:
Set AIR/GND switch to AIR
After a few seconds, notice that the ATC-601 FS field
again shows 0.
6/15/1995 5-118
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
12.0 DL ANT/
SGL ANT
Discrete
Test
(TDR-94D
only)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST
screen ----->
Be sure the ATC-601 is connected to the
top antenna port.
** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to DL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
Watch the PERIOD display for a time.
You will notice it changing somewhat but
it should remain at or near 2 seconds.
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 2.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
See the note at the end of this step for test tolerances.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to SGL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows:
** SQUITTER TEST - FAILED **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: This test is intended to fail. When the UUT is set
for single antenna operation, there is no transmission
from the top antenna port. Therefore, if this test
indicates PASSED, recheck all switch settings or
suspect a problem with the SGL/DL ANT select strap.
It should not pass.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to stop the test.
Remove rf terminator from bottom
antenna connector
Connect ATC-601 cable to bottom
antenna connector
Connect rf terminator to top antenna
connector
6/15/1995 5-119
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
12.0
(contd)
DL ANT
/SGL
ANT
Discrete
Test
(contd)
(TDR-94D
only)
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
On ATC-601:
Press RUN to start the test.
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 1.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set DL ANT/SGL ANT switch to DL
ANT
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen shows: See
note below.
** SQUITTER TEST - PASSED **
PERIOD = 2.00 SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Note: The PERIOD value tends to vary somewhat in all cases. When the UUT is set for dual antenna
operation and the ATC-601 is monitoring the top or the bottom antenna port, the value can vary from
1.6 to 2.4. When the TDR-94D is set for single antenna operation, or the UUT is a TDR-94, there is
no transmission from the top antenna port and and the transmission PERIOD from the bottom
antenna port can vary from 0.6 to 1.4.
13.0 Burst
Tune and
Cross-
Feed In
DiscreteT
est
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST
screen ----->
If necessary, reconnect ATC-601 to
bottom antenna connector, with
terminator on top (TDR-94D only)
connector.
** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as STEP 1.1.
On test panel:
CONTROL DATA SELECT: PA
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
SOURCE SELECT: SEL
Be sure that X FEED IN/OUT switch is
set to OUT
Be sure that BURST TUNE switch is
set to OFF.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT and
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to IN
Notice that both X FEED lamps are lighted.
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX to OFF
(The easiest way to turn TX off is to
disconnect it from the test panel)
Notice that the X FEED OUT and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps turns off (X FEED IN stays on).
6/15/1995 5-120
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
13.0
(contd)
Burst
Tune and
Cross-
Feed In
Discrete
Test
(contd)
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX to ON
Notice that the X FEED IN and OUT and REPLY lamps
are lighted.
On test panel:
Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to OUT
Set BURST TUNE to ON
On JcAIR 429E:
Set TX to OFF
Notice that UUT continues to reply. Watch the unit for
a few seconds. (The X FEED IN lamp extinguishes
because the switch turns it off.)
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE switch to OFF
Notice that UUT stops replying (X FEED OUT and
REPLY lamps turn off).
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE to ON
Notice that UUT does not reply (X
FEED OUT and REPLY l amps do not l i ght).
On JcAI R 429E:
Set TX to ON
Notice that UUT replys (X FEED OUT and REPLY lamps
are on).
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE to OFF
On JcAIR 429E: Set TX to OFF
Notice that UUT stops replying (X FEED OUT and
REPLY lamps are off).
On JcAIR 429E: Set TX to ON X FEED OUT lamp and the REPLY lamp turns on again.
On test panel:
Set X FEED IN/OUT switch to IN
Set BURST TUNE switch to ON.
Set TX to ON
X FEED OUT lamp flashes .
14.0 Output
Port
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set BURST TUNE to OFF
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set X FEED IN/OUT to OUT
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
CONTROL DATA SEL: PA
OUTPUT PORT SELECT: ARINC 429 PORT A
On JcAIR 429E:
The same as STEP 1.1
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to ON
Both X FEED OUT and REPLY lamps are on.
JcAIR 429E RCV screen ----->
031 01 F56681 11
Note: Be sure that the JcAIR screen flashes somewhat.
This indicates that the screen is being updated. A non-
flashing screen usually indicates that obsolete data is
being displayed.
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST After a few seconds, the ATC-601 screen data indicates
PASSED.
On test panel:
Set OUTPUT PORT SELECT switch to
ARINC 429 PORT B
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and JCAIR screen
does not change.
6/15/1995 5-121
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
15.0 Control
Data
Input Port
Select
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
Set SOURCE SELECT switch to SEL
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
CONTROL DATA SELECT: ARINC
PORT PA
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as for STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601, set for SQUITTER TEST
screen ----->
** SQUITTER TEST - NO REPLY **
PERIOD = SECONDS
TAIL NUMBER =
SQUITTER ADDRESS= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT and
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch
to ARINC PORT PB
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUTand REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
display does not change.
On test panel:
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch
to ARINC PORT PC
Notice that there is no change in the test result; X
FEED OUT and REPLY lights are on and ATC-601
display does not change.
16.0 Manual
STBY
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Set POWER switch OFF
Set CONTROL DATA SELECT switch to ARINC PORT PA
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as for STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen
---------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUTand
the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the unit is
replying. The ATC-601 screen data indicates PASSED.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to STBY
Note that X FEED OUT lamp and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps turn off and ATC-601 indicates NO REPLY. See
note below.
On test panel:
Set EXT STBY switch to OPR
Note that X FEED OUT lamp and ATC-601 REPLY
lamps light almost immediately and ATC-601 indicates
PASSED.
6/15/1995 5-122
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
17.0 Max Air-
speed
Test
On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
Be sure that all three MAX AIRSPEED switches are set to OFF.
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as for STEP 1.1.
(The JcAIR 429E is used here only for
tuning data.)
On ATC-601:
Set for MODE S UF0 TEST screen --->
** MODE S UF0 TEST - NO REPLY **
DF VS= RI= AC=
ADDRESS=
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT lamp
and the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the
unit is replying.
Note the ATC-601 screen ----------->
** MODE S UF0 TEST - PASSED **
DF 0 VS=0 RI=8 AC= 32,775 FT
ADDRESS=000001
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Exercise the MAX AIRSPEED switches on the test panel and verify the correct RI indication as
shown in the following list. Cycle power and allow about 2 or 3 seconds of OFF time and about 5
seconds for processor initialization and ATC-601 response time between each switch setting.
MAX AIRSPEED SWITCH RI VALUE
BIT 15 BIT 16 BIT 17
OFF OFF OFF 8
SEL OFF OFF 9
OFF SEL OFF A
SEL SEL OFF B
OFF OFF SEL C
SEL OFF SEL D
OFF SEL SEL E
SEL SEL SEL F (not an assigned configuration)
It is worth noting that in this test mode the ATC-601 displays the altitude to the nearest 25 feet.
6/15/1995 5-123
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
18.0 Ext Sup-
pression
Test
On test panel:
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as for STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST screen -->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
Connect scope channel A to the test
panel SUPPR test points.
Connect scope channel B to the REPLY
VIDEO BNC connector on the ATC-601.
Set the scope to display both channels
Note a (approx) 30s pulse on channel A.
Note a reply waveform on channel B. If your scope is
able, you will see the individual reply code pulses on
channel B. You may also see the occasional squitter
transmission which appears as a much longer series of
pulses at about 1 transmission every 2 sec. Of
particular importance, however, is that the channel A
(suppression) pulse is about 30 s long during ATCRBS
reply, and brackets the 21 s ATCRBS reply. During
squitter transmission, the suppression pulse extends to
bracket the squitter transmission. The squitter
transmission is a DF11 reply about 72 s long.
6/15/1995 5-124
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
19.0 ADLP
Select,
Discrete
Strap
Test
On test panel:
Be sure DATALINK switch is set to NO
ADLP.
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as for STEP 1.1.
JcAIR 429E RX screen ------>
Note: The ATC-601 is not needed for
this test but it can remain connected and
operating.
350 01 600001 11
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF
Set DATALINK switch to ADLP.
Be sure DATALINK SELECT switch is
set to A/B.
Set POWER switch to ON.
JcAIR 429E RX screen ------>
350 01 64A201 11
|<---diagnostic code A2
Note: The diagnostic A2 identifies an inactive ADLP
bus. This test verifies that the ADLP enable discrete is
functional. The 4 reflects bit 27 in the data word which
is also set indicating an ADLP bus failure.
On test panel:
Set POWER switch to OFF.
Set DATALINK switch to NO ADLP.
Set POWER switch to ON.
JcAIR 429E RX screen ------>
350 01 600001 11
|<---diagnostic code 00
Note: The Airborne Datalink system is not fully implemented at this time. If and when an ADLP
(Airborne DataLink Processor) becomes available and operational, suitable procedures will be
provided to verify the integrity of the ADLP input/output ports. At this point, therefore, verification of
the ADLP SELECT strap is seen as sufficient to prevent nuisance diagnostics that can occur if the
select input should be defective. You will notice that the DATALINK SELECT A/B, C/D function is
also not tested.
6/15/1995 5-125
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
20.0 Remote
IDENT
Discrete
Test
On test panel:
Same as initial setup
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as for STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Setup for ATCRBS REPLY test
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set the POWER switch to ON
Set the EXT STBY switch to OPR
Press and release the REMOTE IDENT
switch.
On JcAIR 429E:
Notice RX screen ----->:
031 01 756691 11
|<----Ident bit
Note: The 9 should appear in the data field only while
the switch is being pressed. This, together with the ID
display on the ATC-601, verifies that the REMOTE
IDENTdiscrete input is functional.
On ATC-601:
Notice the ID display. ID should
display for about 18 seconds.
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE=ID5263 ALT= 32,800 FT [1344]
|<----ID display
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On JcAIR 429E:
Set the label 031 TX word:
031 01 156691 00
On JcAIR 429E RX and on ATC-601
screens:
You should see the same displays as immediately
above. If the test failed using the REMOTE IDENT
switch, but succeeds here, then suspect a failure in the
discrete input or the test panel.
On JcAIR 429E:
Set the label 031 TX word:
031 01 956681 00
6/15/1995 5-126
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
21.0 Self Test On test panel:
Set POWER switch OFF
ALT TYPE SELECT: ARINC 429
AIR/GND: AIR
SELF TEST: ENABLE: OFF
On JcAIR 429E:
Same setup as for STEP 1.1.
On ATC-601:
Set for ATCRBS REPLY TEST
---------->
** ATCRBS REPLY TEST **
(lines 2-4 are irrelevant)
CODE= ALT= [ ]
***** TEST RUNNING *****
On test panel:
Set POWER switch ON
After a few seconds, the test panel X FEED OUT lamp
and the ATC-601 REPLY lamps light indicating that the
unit is replying. The ATC-601 screen indicates PASSED.
On JcAIR 429E:
RX screen shows: --------->
031 01 F56681 11
203 01 640001 11
350 01 600001 11
In the next few steps, watch the JcAIR
429E RX screen carefully.
On the test panel:
Press and hold the SELF TEST
pushbutton for about 1 sec.
After a few seconds, notice that the ATC-601 screen
does not change The JcAIR 429E RX display may go
blank.
6/15/1995 5-127
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-13. Acceptance Test Procedures,
Using the JcAIR 429E Transmitter/Receiver (Cont).
STEP TITLE PROCEDURE DESIRED RESULTS
21.0 Self Test
(contd)
On test panel:
Set the AIR/GND switch to GND
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON
Press and hold the SELF-TEST button
for about 1 s
Note: The test panel TEST lamp lights
while you hold the switch. This has no
bearing on UUT operation, however. If
the lamp does not light, check the test
panel.
Self-test Displays:
After a few seconds, notice that the X FEED OUT lamp
turns off briefly while the ATC-601 screen shows +s or
-s in most of the data fields, followed by blank fields.
After a few seconds, notice that the X FEED OUT
lamps turns on again and the ATC-601 screen returns
to the normal display.
On the JcAIR 429E notice that the SM changes to 10
and then back to 11.You should try to be especially
watchful of the 350 data word and try to catch any
diagnostic codes that may be displayed during the self-
test sequence.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
OFF.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice that the self-test displays as described above do
not appear..
Note: This verifies that self test is properly inhibited by
the self-test inhibit discrete.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON.
Set the AIR/GND switch to AIR.
Wait about 5 seconds *.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice that the self-test displays as described above do
not appear..
Note: This verifies that self test is properly inhibited by
the AIR/GND discrete.
*Note: The CPU must be allowed sufficient time to complete at least one software cycle in order to
recognize the change in the AIR/GND discrete. If you press the SELF TEST switch in less than
about 3 seconds of setting the AIR/GND switch to AIR, the unit may execute self-test as though it
were not inhibited. This should be seen as normal.
On the test panel:
Set the SELF TEST/ENABLE switch to
ON.
Set the AIR/GND switch to GND.
Press and hold the SELF TEST button
for about 1 s.
Notice the self-test displays as described above
reappear.
Note: This verifies that the self-test inhibit and AIR/GND
discretes are switchable.
This completes this test sequence. Successful completion of this series provides reasonable
assurance that the unit is operational. However, this test does not satisfy the requirements of a Final
Performance Test which must be performed after any repair operation.
Turn off all power, disconnect the equipment, and return it to its normal storage location. Return the
UUT to its original shipping container, or equivalent, if it is to remain in storage. Otherwise, prepare
it for installation.
6/15/1995 5-128
maintenance 523-0775657
5.4.5.11.1 J cAI R 429E Transmi tter/Recei ver, Operati ng I nstructi ons
Thi s paragraph provi des i nstructi ons that may be hel pful
i n operati ng the JcAI R 429E Transmi tter /Recei ver. I t i s
i ntended for those who may be unfami l i ar wi th i ts
operati on and may need some hel p.
I f you are fami l i ar wi th the JcAI R 429E:
Set the TX 1 output to: 031 01 156681 00; thi s
produces an ATC code: 5236.
Set the TX 2 output to: 203 01 640000 11; thi s
produces an al ti tude: 32,800 ft.
These are the TX hex val ues used most often i n the
procedures of Tabl e 5-13.
Setup and Operati ng I nstructi ons i f you are unfami l i ar wi th the operati on of the JcAi r 429E:
Duri ng the course of thi s procedure, do not turn power off to the JcAI R 429E. Al l entered data i s l ost.
Prel i mi nary setup
Set: TX Parity to ODD
TX Speed to LO
RX Speed to LO
Display to Hex
TX label and word setup for this procedure
1. When screen shows: 0 RX LABELS, press TX/RX
2. Screen shows: 0 TX LABELS
3. Press up arrow key
4. Screen shows: TX 1 INACTIVE
5. Press EDIT/DEL
6. Screen shows a blinking cursor on an otherwise blank screen
7. Enter 031
8. Press ENT
9. Screen shows: 031 BCN ATC CODE
10. Press LAB/DAT
11. Screen shows: 031 00 000000 00
12. Press EDIT/DEL
13. Screen shows a blinking cursor on an otherwise blank screen
14. Enter 6-digit Hex code as desired or 156681
15. Press ENT
16. Screen shows: 031 01 956681 00 (The parity bit causes the change from 1 to 9 in the first digit)
17. Press TX/RX until screen shows 1 TX LABELS
18. Press up arrow until screen shows TX 2 INACTIVE
19. Press EDIT/DEL
20. Screen shows a blinking cursor on an otherwise blank screen
21. Enter 203
22. Press ENT
23. Screen shows: 203 ALTITUDE
24. Press LAB/DAT
25. Screen shows: 203 00 000000 00
26. Press EDIT/DEL
27. Screen shows a blinking cursor on an otherwise blank screen
28. Enter E40000
29. Press ENT
30. Screen shows: 203 01 E40000 11
6/15/1995 5-129
maintenance 523-0775657
RX labels setup for this procedure:
Note: The procedures below may not be needed depending on the software version of the JcAIR 429E being used. The objective
of the test is to capture (trap) ARINC 429 labels 031, 203, and 350 words. Consult the JcAIR 429E Operators Manual for detailed
instructions if needed.
1. If the JcAIR 429E is not already on, turn POWER switch to ON
2. If necessary, press TX/RX until screen shows: 0 RX LABELS
3. Press TRAP
4. Screen shows a blinking cursor on an otherwise blank screen
5. Enter 031
6. Press ENT
7. Screen shows: 031 SDI? _ (blinking cursor)
8. Enter 01
9. Press ENT
10. Screen shows: 0 RX LABELS
Note: This screen tends to blink slightly indicating that the display is being updated. If data is being received, the left digit will
increment (quite rapidly) to a maximum of 255 indicating the number of words that have been captured.
11. Press TRAP until screen again shows a blinking cursor
12. Repeat steps 3 through 11 but enter 203 at step 5. (At step 10, the display will show:
1 RX LABELS)
13. Repeat steps 3 through 11 but enter 350 at step 5. (At step 10, the display will show:
2 RX LABELS)
14. Press ENT twice.
To change altitude:
1. Press TX/RX until the screen shows: 2 TX LABELS (The 2 is an integer indicating the number of TX labels that are entered)
2. Press the up arrow key until the screen shows: 203 ALTITUDE
3. Press LAB/DAT until the screen shows: 203 01 E40000 11 (The six-digit hex code will be the most recently entered code)
4. Press EDIT/DEL
5. Screen shows a blinking cursor on an otherwise blank screen
6. Enter the necessary hex value for the desired altitude or E41BB1 (33,654 ft) (see note 2 under step 1.4 below)
7. Press ENT
8. Screen shows: 203 01 641BB1 11
This entry will cause the ATC-601 to show 33,700 FT..
6/15/1995 5-130
maintenance 523-0775657
To change ATC code:
1. Press TX/RX until the screen shows: 2 TX LABELS (The 2 is an integer indicating the number of TX labels that are entered)
2. Press the up arrow key until the screen shows: 031 BCN ATC CODE
3. Press LAB/DAT
4. Screen shows: 031 BCN ATC CODE
4. Press EDIT/DEL
5. Screen shows a blinking cursor on an otherwise blank screen
6. Enter the necessary hex value for the desired ATC code or 5263
7. Press ENT
8. TX screen shows: 031 01 0E5C01 00
9. RX screen shows: 031 01 0E5C01 00
This entry will cause the ATC-601 to show CODE=6352
Note: You can set the JcAIR DISPLAY switch to Eng to show the 4-digit code. The ATC-601 CODE and JcAIR 429E Eng code
displays should always agree.
10. Reset the TX 031 and 203 words to the Initial Setup
To view captured data:
1. Press TX/RX until the screen shows: 3 RX LABELS
2. Press up arrow to select the desired word label/title:
031 BCN ATC CODE
203 ALTITUDE
350 MAINT DATA 1
3. Press LAB/DAT
4. Screen shows the selected word/data (only one at a time):
031 01 156681 00
203 01 640000 11
350 01 000001 11
To select a different word:
5. Press LAB/DAT
6. Press up arrow or down arrow to select one word label/title as shown in 2. above:
7. Press LAB/DAT to view the data
8. Screen shows the selected word data as in 4 above.
6/15/1995 5-131
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5 MAI NTENANCE DI AGNOSTI C
DATA RETRI EVAL AND ANALYSI S
5.5.1 I ntroducti on
Thi s paragraph provi des detai l ed i nformati on
rel ated to the di agnosti c data stored i n the
TDR-94/94D transponder. I t i s i ntended to
support the procedures found i n tabl e 5-6.
The stored data consi sts of faul t and
mai ntenance data whi ch i s stored i n
nonvol ati l e memory. Memory space, for thi s
purpose, i s al l ocated accordi ng to tabl e 5-14.
Noti ce that there are two categori es of data:
general mai ntenance and di agnosti c data.
Tabl e 5-14 shows structure of the di agnosti c
data.
Memory space consi sts of 256 bytes of
NVRAM. The general mai ntenance data
buffers use 14 bytes and the remai nder i s
used for di agnosti c data storage. Each
di agnosti c occurrence uses 10 bytes. Thus,
there i s space for 24 di agnosti c occurrences.
I f more than 24 occurrences are detected, the
most recent i s retai ned as fol l ows:
I n -002 uni ts, the most recent occurrence i s
overwri tten. That i s, occurrences 1 through
23 are retai ned whi l e the 24th occurrence i s
overwri tten when a new occurrence i s
detected.
I n -003 uni ts, the ol dest occurrence i s
overwri tten.
Table5-14. Maintenanceand Diagnostic Data Memory Structure
GENERAL MAI NTENANCE DATA BUFFERS
DATA DESCRI PTI ON BYTES USED
Poi nter to next di agnosti c code l ocati on 2
Power-on cycl e counter 2
Total di agnosti c counter 1
Total power-on ti mer (mi nutes) 1
Power-on ti mer (hours) 2
Last POC di agnosti c counter 1
Current POC ti mer 1
Last mai ntenance date 4
DI AGNOSTI C DATA BUFFERS
Ti me from l ast power on 1
Di agnosti c code 1
(not used) 1
Transmi tter temperature (degrees Cel si us) 1
Current power-on cycl e count buffer 2
Ai r/ground state at ti me of di agnosti c 1
Ti me at end of power-on cycl e 1
Al ti tude at ti me of di agnosti c 1
Al ti tude at ti me of di agnosti c 1
5/ 5/ 1993 5-132
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.2 General Di agnosti c Formats
Mai ntenance di agnosti c data i s provi ded on
the ARI NC 429 output buses onl y. The
mai ntenance data i s provi ded on a l abel 351
data word when requested by an ARI NC 429
l abel 277 data word at any of the ARI NC 429
i nput ports. Unl ess a total downl oad i s
requested, the output i s based on a one-
response for one-request basi s. I n al l cases,
no data i s provi ded unl ess the Ai r/ground
di screte i s at a l ogi c 0; that i s, the ai rpl ane i s
on the ground. No stored di agnosti c data i s
provi ded on any of the CSDB buses. Thi s
procedure uses the Atl anti c I nstruments,
DataTrac 400 DataTrac 400H, DataTrac 200
Databus Readers, or the JcAI R 429E Trans-
mi tter/Recei ver for data request and recei ve.
For the sake of brevi ty, i n these procedures
the term "bus reader" shoul d be understood
to appl y to ei ther of these i nstruments. I f
you have or prefer an equi val ent i nstrument,
feel free to use i t. Some procedural
adaptati on may be requi red. Control ports A,
B, or C can be used.
The general format of the mai ntenance re-
quest and response data i s as fol l ows:
BI T NO. BI T DESI GNATI ON
1 - 8 MSB - LSB LABEL (see note 1)
9 Hex faul t code B0
10 Hex faul t code B1
11 Hex faul t code B2
12 Hex faul t code B3
13 Hex faul t code B4
14 Hex faul t code B5
15 Hex faul t code B6
16 Hex faul t code B7
17 Hex faul t code B8
18 Hex faul t code B9
19 Hex faul t code B10
20 Hex faul t code B11
21 Hex faul t code B12
22 Hex faul t code B13
23 Hex faul t code B14
24 Hex faul t code B15
25 Hex faul t code B16
26 Hex faul t code B17
27 Hex faul t code B18
28 Hex faul t code B19
29 PAD
30 Test type (see note 2)
31 Test type (see note 2)
32 Pari ty
Note 1: Label structure:
Bi t: 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
Val ue: 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 2
Label 277: 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 1
Label 351: 1 0 0 1 0 1 1 1
See al so paragraph 5.7.4.8
Note 2: Test type defi ni ti on:
BI T 31 BI T 30 DEFI NI TI ON
0 0 Software rev status, request
or response
0 1 RAM memory output, re
quest or response;
requi res 4-di gi t address code
for speci fi c data
1 0 Last mai ntenance date, l oad
command *
1 1 Detai l ed di agnosti c data,
request or response.
Requi res 2-di gi t hex code(**)
for speci fi c data
* Users are CAUTIONED not to use thi s
code. Thi s code wi l l destroy some of the
stored di agnosti c data. I t i s i ntended for use
onl y after bench repai r. See paragraph
5.5.11.
** Hex code l i sti ng:
Hex Requested data
01 Contents of total power-on cycl e coun-
ter buffer
02 Contents of total faul t counter buffer
03 Contents of total power-on ti mer
(hours) buffer
04 Contents of total power-on ti mer
(mi nutes) buffer
05 Contents of l ast power-on cycl e faul t
counter buffer
06 Not defi ned
07 Contents of l ast mai ntenance date
buffer
08-0F Not defi ned
10 Downl oad of the di agnosti c codes
detected duri ng the most recent
power-on cycl e (i f any- see bel ow)
11-1X Downl oad of the di agnosti c codes de-
tected duri ng precedi ng power-on cy-
cl es, where 11 i s the next to the most
recent and 1X i s the request code that
produces a 00EOF (End Of Fi l e) re-
sponse.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-133
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.3 Software Revi si on Status (SRS)
Reporti ng
The software revi si on status i s of
questi onabl e val ue for fi el d use. I t i s
presented here so that i f a need or purpose
devel ops i t can be accessed.
5.5.3.1 SRS Word Defi ni ti on
Upon recei pt of a l abel 277 request for
di agnosti c data, wi th bi ts 31 and 30 set to 00,
the TDR-94D responds wi th a l abel 351 word
wi th the fol l owi ng structure:
1: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
2: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| | | | \ | | / \ | | / \ | | / | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | \ | | / \ | | /
| \ / \__BCD month \ BCD day / \ BCD yr /
| \__SSM bits, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
Descri pti on:
Bi t 32: Pari ty bi t: Thi s bi t i s set to a 1 when
the total of the other 31 bi ts set to 1 i s 0 or
an even number.
Bi ts 31 and 30: SSM bi ts: 11 i mpl i es a
request for di agnosti c data.
Bi ts 29 - 25: BCD month: Bi t 29 gi ves the
tens val ue; 0 or 1. Bi ts 28 -25 gi ve the uni ts
val ue; 0 - 9.
Bi ts 24 - 17: BCD day: Bi ts 24 - 21 gi ve the
tens val ue; 0 - 3. Bi ts 17 - 20 gi ve the uni ts
val ue; 0 - 9.
Bi ts 16 - 9: BCD year: Bi ts 16 - 13 gi ve the
tens val ue; 8,9,0. Bi ts 12 - 9 gi ve the uni ts
val ue; 0 - 9.
5.5.3.2 SRS Data Request
Note: The AI R/GND swi tch, i n the test
panel , must be i n the GND posi ti on and
TEST I NHI BI T must be off. That i s, pi n P2-
38 must be open.
Set the bus reader XMT for a l abel 277 data
word as fol l ows:
DataTrac:
ON--------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 11-----User Data--- SSM Par msec
277 00 60 00 00 FD 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E:
277 00 600000 11
I t i s i mportant that the SM (SSM) i s set to 11.
The SDI i s set automati cal l y when data i s
entered i nto the 5th and 6th di gi ts of the data
fi el d. These are the onl y XMT di gi ts that wi l l be
manual l y changed i n thi s procedure.
Response exampl e:
DataTrac:
----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par Tmin
351 10 09 12 90 97 11 1 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 10 091290 11
Thi s i ndi cates that the SRS of thi s uni t i s:
9 December 1990.
I t i s i mportant to set the bus reader to the
proper di spl ay format for easy data
i nterpretati on.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-134
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.4 Memory Exami nati on Request
and Response (MERR)
Thi s paragraph i s provi ded for i nformati on
purposes onl y. Memory al l ocati on, wi thi n the
memory bl ocks, i s control l ed dynami cal l y by
the operati ng software and therefore i s
di ffi cul t predi ct. Data necessary for
mai ntenance can be obtai ned more easi l y by
the procedures i n the rest of thi s paragraph.
5.5.4.1 MERR, General Word Defi ni ti on
The memory exami nati on request word l abel 277
i s defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \ / | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad | || || || || |
| | \<-------------- 00000H to 0FFFFH --------------> /
| | (memory locations)
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
The response word l abel 351 i s defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<-Pad->/ \<--Data in requested location------>/
| \__SSM, 11 implies memory examination request
\__Parity
5/ 5/ 1993 5-135
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.5 Total Power-on Cycl e Count
(TPOCC) Buffer
Each ti me the TDR-94/94D i s turned on, the
TPOCC buffer i s i ncremented. Therefore,
thi s buffer contai ns the number of ti mes the
uni t has experi enced a power appl i cati on.
5.5.5.1 TPOCC General Word Defi ni ti on
The total power-on cycl e counter data request
word l abel 277 i s defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<------------Pad-------------> / \<----01H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a diagnostic data request
\__Parity
The response word l abel 351 i s defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \10,000S/ \1,000S / \ 100S / \ 10S / \units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to a diagnostic data request
\__Parity
5.5.5.2 TPOCC Buffer Exami nati on
Setup bus reader XMT screens as fol l ows:
DataTrac:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
277 01 00 00 00 FD 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E:
277 01 800001 11
The reader shoul d respond wi th a l abel 351 word
si mi l ar to thi s:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
351 10 00 30 56 97 11 1 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 10 003056 11
Thi s i ndi cates that the UUT has undergone 3,056
power-on cycl es.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-136
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.6 Total Faul t Counter (TFC) Buffer
Each ti me a di agnosti c condi ti on i s
recogni zed, the TFC buffer i s i ncremented.
Therefore, thi s buffer contai ns the number
di agnosti c condi ti ons the uni t has
experi enced.
5.5.6.1 TFC General Word Defi ni ti on
The TFC buffer data request word l abel 277 i s
defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<------------Pad--- -------->/ \<---02H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
The response word l abel 351 i s defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \10,000S/ \1,000S / \ 100S / \ 10S / \units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.6.2 TFC Buffer Exami nati on
Setup bus reader XMT screens as fol l ows:
DataTrac:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
277 10 80 00 02 FD 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E:
277 10 800002 11
The reader shoul d respond wi th a l abel 351 word
si mi l ar to thi s:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
351 10 60 01 02 97 11 1 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 10 600102 11
Thi s i ndi cates that the UUT has experi enced 102
di agnosti c condi ti ons.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-137
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.7 Total Power-on Ti mer (Hours)
(TPOTH) Buffer
Two data buffers are used to record the total
ti me the uni t i s i n operati on; an hours buffer
and a mi nutes buffer. As the uni t i s
operati ng, the mi nutes counter i s
conti nuousl y i ncremented. The hours buffer
i s i ncremented each ti me the mi nutes counter
overfl ows.
5.5.7.1 TPOTH General Word Defi ni ti on
The total TPOTH buffer data request word l abel
277 i s defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<----03H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
The response word l abel 351 i s defi ned as
fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \10,000S/ \1,000S / \ 100S / \ 10S / \units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.7.2 TPOTH Buffer Exami nati on
Setup bus reader XMT screens as fol l ows:
DataTrac:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
277 11 60 00 03 FD 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E:
277 11 600003 11
The reader shoul d respond wi th a l abel 351 word
si mi l ar to thi s:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
351 11 E0 03 57 97 11 1 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 11 E00357 11
Thi s exampl e shows that the TPTOH buffer
contai ns the val ue 357.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-138
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.8 Total Power-on Ti mer (Mi nutes)
(TPOTM) Buffer
The TPOTM buffer i s i ncremented each
mi nute that the uni t has power appl i ed.
Overfl ow of thi s buffer causes the TPOTH
buffer to be i ncremented.
5.5.8.1 TPOTM General Word Defi ni ti on
The total TPOTM buffer data request word l abel
277 i s defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---04H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
The response word l abel 351 i s defi ned as
fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \not used/ \ 10S / \units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.8.2 TPOTM Buffer Exami nati on
Setup bus reader XMT screens as fol l ows:
DataTrac:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
277 00 E0 00 04 FD 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E:
277 00 E00004 11
The reader shoul d respond wi th a l abel 351 word
si mi l ar to thi s:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
351 11 60 00 27 97 11 1 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 11 600027 11
Thi s i ndi cates that the uni t TPTOM buffer
contai ns the number 27.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-139
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.9 Last Power-on Cycl e (LPOC) Faul t
Counter Buffer
Thi s buffer contai ns the number of di agnosti c
condi ti ons detected duri ng the most recent
power-on cycl e.
5.5.9.1 LPOC General Word Defi ni ti on
The l ast LPOC faul t counter buffer data request
word l abel 277 i s defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---05H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
The response word l abel 351 i s defi ned as
fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \ 100s / \ 10s / \units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.9.2 LPOC Buffer Exami nati on
Setup bus reader XMT screens as fol l ows:
DataTrac:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
277 01 60 00 05 FD 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E:
277 01 600005 11
The reader shoul d respond wi th a l abel 351 word
si mi l ar to thi s:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
351 11 E0 00 07 97 11 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 11 E00007 11
Thi s i ndi cates that duri ng the most recent power-
on cycl e 7 di agnosti c condi ti ons were detected.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-140
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.10 Last Mai ntenance Date (LMD)
Buffer (Exami nati on)
Thi s buffer shoul d contai ns the most recent
mai ntenance date. Whether or not thi s date
accuratel y refl ects the date on whi ch the uni t
was most recentl y repai red or tested depends
upon whether the date was properl y entered.
5.5.10.1 LMD General Word Defi ni ti on
The LMD buffer data request word l abel 277 i s
defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---07H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
The response word l abel 351 i s defi ned as
fol l ows:
1: 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
2: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| | | | \ | | / \ | | / \ | | / | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | \ | | / \ | | /
| \ / \__BCD month \ BCD day / \ BCD yr /
| \__SSM bits, 11 implies response to a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.10.2 LMD Buffer Exami nati on
Setup bus reader XMT screens as fol l ows:
DataTrac:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
277 11 E0 00 07 FD 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E:
277 11 E00007 11
The reader shoul d respond wi th a l abel 351
word si mi l ar to thi s:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
351 01 70 06 91 97 11 1 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 01 700691 11
Thi s i ndi cates that the l ast mai ntenance date for
thi s uni t was October 6, 1991.
You need to recogni ze that the 7, here, i ncl udes
the SSM bi ts whi ch account for a val ue of 6 (4 +
2). Thus 7 - 6 = 1 whi ch means that bi t 29 i s a
1. Thi s sets the month at 10; October.
5.5.11 Last Mai ntenance Date (LMD) Buffer
(Update)
A method for updati ng the LMD buffer i s not
i ncl uded i n thi s manual . The LMD buffer shoul d
be changed onl y after a repai r acti on, uni t
modi fi cati on, or detai l ed test procedure has been
performed.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-141
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.12 Last Power-on Cycl e Faul ts
(LPOCF) Data Downl oad
Thi s process al l ows for retri eval of al l the
di agnosti cs detected duri ng the most recent
power-on cycl e. Thi s can be seen as an
extensi on to step 5.5.5. I n that step we
l earned the number of faul ts detected duri ng
the most recent power-on cycl e. I n thi s
sequence we wi l l l earn what those di agnosti c
codes are. I n thi s sequence you must watch
the l abel 351 word careful l y. The UUT may
transmi t several words, each wi th a di fferent
di agnosti c code, at 5-second i nterval s.
The fi rst transmi ssi on i s the contents of the
current Total Power-on Cycl e count buffer (as i n
5.5.5 above). Thi s i s fol l owed, i n 5-second
i nterval s, wi th a transmi ssi on of each
of the di agnosti c codes encountered duri ng the
most recent power-on cycl e (sel f-test). The
sequence i s automati c therefore you shoul d be
prepared to wri te down the data as i t appears.
The fi nal l abel 351 word i s l i kel y to be a word
si mi l ar to 07FFE whi ch does not transl ate i nto a
meani ngful di agnosti c code.
5.5.12.1 LPOCF General Word Defi ni ti on
The LPOCF data request word l abel 277 i s
defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---10H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
The fi rst response l abel 351 word i s defi ned
i n paragraph 5.5.5.
The second and subsequent response l abel 351
word(s) are defi ned as fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \not used/ \ Hex fault code /
| \__11 implies response to detailed diagnostic data request
\__Parity
5.5.12.2 LPOCF Data Downl oad
Setup bus reader XMT screens as fol l ows:
DataTrac:
ON------------XMT 1----------12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
277 00 E0 00 10 FD 11 1 0100
JcAI R 429E:
277 00 E00010 11
The reader shoul d respond wi th a l abel 351 word
si mi l ar to thi s:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
351 11 E0 00 B3 97 11 1 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 11 E000B3 11
Thi s exampl e i ndi cates that thi s uni t
experi enced a di agnosti c code B3 at the l ast
power on cycl e. One of the 351 l abel words
may i ndi cate an FF l abel whi ch. Thi s code i s
not defi ned and so you can i gnore i t.
You may l i kel y encounter a di agnosti c code B3 on
the bench. Thi s di agnosti c i s i nterpreted as
"TCAS bus i nacti ve".
5/ 5/ 1993 5-142
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.13 Conti nue Fl i ght Faul t (CFF) Data
Downl oad
Thi s paragraph can be seen as an extensi on
of the previ ous paragraph 5.5.12. I n that
paragraph onl y those di agnosti cs detected
duri ng the most recent power-on cycl e are
reveal ed. I n thi s paragraph, 5.5.12, al l of the
di agnosti cs stored i n NVRAM and detected
duri ng precedi ng power-on cycl es are
exami ned.
5.5.13.1 CFF General Word Defi ni ti on
The data format i s the same as i n paragraph
5.5.12 except that the hex data i n the l abel
277 i nterrogati on word i s i ncremented from
10H to 1XH. Of course, i f you have al ready
exami ned the 10H, i n paragraph 5.5.12, you
can begi n here wi th 11H. The UUT responds by
sendi ng each stored code for a 5-second peri od.
Conti nue i ncrementi ng the hex data unti l the
UUT sends an end of fi l e data fi el d = 00EOFH.
Thi s i s di spl ayed on the DataTrac and JcAI R
429E as 000EOF. Remember, you onl y need to
change di gi ts 5 and 6 i n the data fi el ds of both
the DataTrac and JcAI R readers. The SDI and
pari ty bi ts wi l l change automati cal l y.
5.5.13.2 CFF General Procedures
The di agnosti c condi ti ons detected duri ng the
precedi ng 16 (maxi mum) power-on cycl es can be
revi ewed by i nterrogati ng the UUT wi th a l abel
277 data word, wi th SSM set to 10 and the data
i n the bi t fi el d, bi ts 9 through 16 set to 1X as
fol l ows (assumi ng no. 1 bei ng the most recent):
Buffer 277 Word DataTrac 200/400/400H, 277 Word Setup JcAIR 429E, 277 word
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SM Par msec
1 10H 277 00 E0 00 10 FD 11 1 0100 277 00 E00010 11
2 11H 277 01 60 00 11 FD 11 1 0100 277 01 600011 11
3 12H 277 10 60 00 12 FD 11 1 0100 277 10 600012 11
4 13H 277 11 E0 00 13 FD 11 1 0100 277 11 E00013 11
5 14H 277 00 60 00 14 FD 11 1 0100 277 00 600014 11
6 15H 277 01 E0 00 15 FD 11 1 0100 277 01 E00015 11
7 16H 277 10 E0 00 16 FD 11 1 0100 277 10 E00016 11
8 17H 277 11 60 00 17 FD 11 1 0100 277 11 600017 11
9 18H 277 00 60 00 18 FD 11 1 0100 277 00 600018 11
10 19H 277 01 E0 00 19 FD 11 1 0100 277 01 E00019 11
11 1AH 277 10 E0 00 1A FD 11 1 0100 277 10 E0001A 11
12 1BH 277 11 60 00 1B FD 11 1 0100 277 11 60001B 11
13 1CH 277 00 E0 00 1C FD 11 1 0100 277 00 E0001C 11
14 1DH 277 01 60 00 1D FD 11 1 0100 277 01 60001D 11
15 1EH 277 10 60 00 1E FD 11 1 0100 277 10 60001E 11
16 1FH 277 11 E0 00 1F FD 11 1 0100 277 11 E0001F 11
Any of the above can produce a response:
DataTrac:
ON------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
LBL SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
351 11 E0 30 57 97 11 1 0200
351 11 E0 0E 0F 97 11 1 0200
JcAI R 429E:
351 11 E03057 00
351 11 E00E0F 00
The UUT shoul d respond wi th at l east two
l abel 351 data words. The fi rst i s the
contents of the Total Power-on Counter buffer
whi ch may be a rel ati vel y l arge number
dependi ng on the l ength of ti me the uni t has
been i n servi ce.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-143
maintenance 523-0775657
Speci al note for -002 uni ts:
I n -002 uni ts, onl y the i nternal di agnosti c
condi ti ons resul ti ng i n a fai l ure-warn
condi ti on and i mproper mode S address
di agnosti c condi ti ons are stored.
The mode S address di agnosti c can easi l y
occur when the uni t i s turned on wi th al l
address l i nes open or shorted to ground.
Consequentl y you may frequentl y noti ce a
0000FF hex code as the second 351 word. I t
i s al so possi bl e that i n some uni ts you may
encounter a Total Power-on Ti mer (Hours)
buffer wi th an unreal i sti cal l y l arge number.
Earl y uni ts were not properl y cl eared at
producti on. I n these cases, of course, the
data i s of no val ue.
5.5.14 Fast Faul t (FF) Data Downl oad
The feature used i n thi s paragraph i s
i ntended for use wi th a data storage devi ce
whi ch i s capabl e of capturi ng and stori ng
data transmi tted i n rapi d sequence. The
DataTrac 400/400H i s capabl e of thi s functi on.
After downl oadi ng the data, i t can then be
further downl oaded, usi ng procedures and
software suppl i ed wi th the DataTrac 400/400H,
onto a PC for detai l ed anal ysi s and permanent
storage. The DataTrac 200 i s capabl e of
capturi ng the data but l acks the means of
transferri ng i t for external storage and
i nterpretati on. A manual anal ysi s i s seen as
i neffi ci entl y l abori ous and ti me consumi ng and
therefore i s not recommended. However, i f thi s
i s not seen as prohi bi ti ve, refer to paragraph
5.5.14 for the Sl ow Faul t Data Downl oad.
5.5.14.1 FF General Word Defi ni ti on
The FF data request word l abel 277 i s defi ned as
fol l ows:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/ \__|__|__/
| | | | | | | |
| | \<--------Pad------------> / \<---50H--->/
| \__SSM, 11 implies a request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5.5.14.2 FF Data Downl oad
Descri pti on
When the 277 l abel word as descri bed i n
paragraph 5.5.14.1 i s sent to the UUT, i t
responds as fol l ows:
a. Power-on cycl e counter buffer as descri bed
i n paragraph 5.5.5 above.
b. Total faul t counter buffer as descri bed i n
paragraph 5.5.6 above.
c. Total power-on ti mer (hours) buffer as
descri bed i n paragraph 5.5.7 above.
d. Total power-on ti mer (mi nutes) buffer as
descri bed i n paragraph 5.5.8 above.
e. Last power-on cycl e faul t counter buffer as
descri bed i n paragraph 5.5.9 above.
f. Last mai ntenance date buffer as descri bed
i n paragraph 5.5.10 above.
The UUT then transmi ts a break i ndi cator usi ng
the same format as descri bed i n paragraph 5.5.7
(power-on ti mer (hours)), except the data i s set to
00FFFF.
Fol l owi ng thi s the UUT transmi ts the ni ne (9)
faul t data bytes for the l ast recorded di agnosti c
i n the fol l owi ng sequence and formats:
g. Current Power-on Cycl e count buffer as
descri bed i n 5.5.5 above.
h. Di agnosti c code as descri bed i n paragraph
5.5.9 above.
i . Ti me from l ast power-on usi ng the fol l owi ng
format:
5/ 5/ 1993 5-144
maintenance 523-0775657
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \ 1 Hr / \10 min / \ 1 min /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
j. Transmi tter temperature at ti me of
di agnosti c usi ng the fol l owi ng format:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \ 100s / \ 10s / \ units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
k. Ai r/ground state at ti me the di agnosti c
was detected, usi ng the fol l owi ng format:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | FAH = in air /
| | Pad \not used/ \not used/ \not used/ \ FDH = on ground /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
l . Ti me at end of power-on cycl e as descri bed
i n transmi ssi on i . above.
m. Al ti tude at ti me of di agnosti c usi ng the
fol l owi ng format:
32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
| \__/ | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | | | | | | | | | | | |
| | Pad \10,000s / \1000s / \ 100s / \ 10s / \ units /
| \__SSM, 11 implies response to request for diagnostic data
\__Parity
5/ 5/ 1993 5-145
maintenance 523-0775657
5.5.14.3 FF Data Downl oad Equi pment
Thi s feature i s i ntended for those wi th access
to an automated means of requesti ng,
capturi ng, and anal yzi ng the data. Such
faci l i ti es are at l east parti al l y avai l abl e from
sources other than Col l i ns and you are
encouraged to acqui re and use them. For
exampl e:
Atl anti c I nstruments suppl i es hardware
and software, operati ng wi th the DataTrac
400/400H, for automati cal l y capturi ng and
downl oadi ng the data onto a PC.
Avi oni ca I nc., 3830, SW 130th Ave., Mi ami
FL 33175, suppl i es a l aptop computer
equi pped wi th appropri ate hardware and
software to downl oad, store, and di spl ay
di agnosti c data from a number of Col l i ns
uni ts i ncl udi ng the TDR-94/94D Mode S
Transponder as wel l as the TTR-920 TCAS
Transmi tter/Recei ver.
5.5.15 Sl ow Faul t (SF) Data Downl oad
Thi s data downl oad feature i s basi cal l y the
same as that descri bed i n paragraph 5.5.13
except that the hex fi el d i n the data request
word i s set to 51H (i nstead of 50H). Thi s wi l l
cause the UUT to transmi t the same data as
descri bed i n paragraph 5.5.13 except that i t
i s transmi tted one data fi l e at a ti me at 5
seconds i nterval s.
5.5.15.1 SF General Word Defi ni ti on
Same as 5.5.13.1 except hex data i s set to 51H.
5.5.15.2 SF Data Downl oad Procedure
Use the fol l owi ng chart, reproduced i n a quanti ty
requi red, to record the data as i t appears on your
databus reader. Set the bus reader for the
proper di spl ay format for di rect i nterpretati on of
the data as descri bed i n the precedi ng
paragraphs.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-146
maintenance 523-0775657
* * * * * * * Dupl i cate thi s sheet as requi red * * * * * * *
Date: _______________UUT Type: _____( ) TDR-94: Part No: 622-9352-
UUT Type: _____( ) TDR-94D: Part No: 622-9210-
UUT Serno: _____________
Customer: _________________________________________
Data taken by: ____________________________________(Your name)
TDR-94/94D Diagnostic Data Record
Di agnosti c Code I nterpretati on
Power-on Cycl e Counter: _________ _______________________
Total Faul t Counter: _________ _______________________
Total Power-on Ti mer (Hrs): _________ _______________________
Total Power-on Ti mer (Mi n): _________ _______________________
Last Power-on Faul t Counter: _________ _______________________
Exi sti ng Last Mai ntenance Date: _________ _______________________
New Last Mai ntenance Date: * _________ _______________________
Break: ___ 0FFFFF
Current Power-on Cycl e Count: _________ _______________________
Di agnosti c Code: _________ _______________________
Ti me From Last Power-on: _________ _______________________
Xmi tter Temp at Di ag: _________ _______________________
Ai r/Gnd State at Di ag: _________ _______________________
Ti me at end of Power-on Cycl e: _________ _______________________
Al ti tude at Di ag: _________ _______________________
* To be changed onl y after repai r, modi fi cati on, or detai l ed (bench) test.
Power-on cycl e di agnosti cs (1 = most recent):
1:___________, 2:___________, 3:_____________, 4:____________, 5:____________,
6:___________, 7:____________, 8:____________, 9:___________, 10:___________,
11:__________, 12:___________, 13:___________, 14:____________, 15:___________,
16:____________, 17:___________, 19:___________, 20:___________, 21:____________,
22:___________, 23:____________, 24:____________
Comments:
______________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
5/ 5/ 1993 5-147
maintenance 523-0775657
5.6 NUMBER SYSTEM CONVERSI ON
AND DATA WORD DESCRI PTI ONS
Thi s paragraph provi des detai l ed descri pti ons
of the vari ous data formats used i n the TDR-
94/94D. These formats use a vari ety of
numberi ng systems i ncl udi ng bi nary, octal ,
and hexadeci mal . Paragraph 5.6.1 provi des a
procedure for conversi on between these
numberi ng systems. I f you are fami l i ar wi th
a conversi on process, you shoul d feel free to
use that process.
5.6.1 Octal -to-Bi nary-to-Hexadeci mal ,
and Back
There are many rel ati vel y i nexpensi ve hand-
hel d cal cul ators wi th number conversi on
capabi l i ty avai l abl e.
I f you have one of these, use i t. Otherwi se,
thi s paragraph descri bes a rel ati vel y si mpl e
method of converti ng between the
Hexadeci mal and Octal numberi ng systems.
Thi s i s useful for Mode S transponder testi ng
because the data systems used i n the mode s
transponder use al l three systems. For
exampl e, the mode s address i s typi cal l y as-
si gned as an ei ght-di gi t octal number. Thi s
octal number i s transl ated i nto a bi nary
number for address strappi ng at i nstal l ati on.
Duri ng testi ng, qui te often thi s address i s
di spl ayed as a si x-di gi t hexadeci mal number.
Use the fol l owi ng l i sti ng to convert your
hexadeci mal or octal number to i ts bi nary
equi val ent.
Hex-to-Bi nary Conversi on Octal -to-Bi nary Conversi on
Hex Bi nary Hex Bi nary Octal Bi nary
0 0000 8 1000 0 000
1 0001 9 1001 1 001
2 0010 A 1010 2 010
3 0011 B 1011 3 011
4 0100 C 1100 4 100
5 0101 D 1101 5 101
6 0110 E 1110 6 110
7 0111 F 1111 7 111
Convert from the si x-di gi t hexadeci mal num-
ber to an ei ght-di gi t octal number as fol l ows:
Enter the hex number on the top (Hex) l i ne
of the fol l owi ng chart. Then enter the
equi val ent bi nary val ues for each hex
di gi t from the l i sti ng above i n the center
(Bi n) l i ne. Then use the l ower bi t val ues to
convert those bi nary bi ts, three bi ts at a
ti me, i nto the equi val ent octal number and
enter those numbers on the l ower (Oct) l i ne.
Hex:
Bi t Val : 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bi n:
Bi t Val : 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Oct:
5/ 5/ 1993 5-148
maintenance 523-0775657
Exampl e: Suppose the test set shows a hex
code 3AC421. Enter thi s code on the top l i ne.
Then wri te the equi val ent four di gi t bi nary
val ues (from the
hexadeci mal l i sti ng above) i n spaces bel ow
each hex di gi t. Then transl ate each three-
di gi t groupi ng of bi nary numbers i nto the
equi val ent octal number.
Hex: 3 A C 4 2 1
Bi t Val : 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Bi nary: 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
Bi t Val : 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1 4 2 1
Oct: 1 6 5 4 2 0 4 1
To convert from octal to hex, reverse the
above process by enteri ng the octal number
i nto the spaces on the l ower l i ne. Convert
each octal di gi t i nto i ts equi val ent bi nary
val ue. Then convert each four-di gi t groupi ng
i nto i ts equi val ent hex val ue as shown i n the
Hex-to-Bi nary conversi on l i sti ng above-l eft.
Wri te these numbers i nto the spaces on the
top l i ne.
The bi nary di gi ts, read from l eft to ri ght,
correspond to the mode s addressi ng swi tches
on the test panel . That i s, the far l eft di gi t
corresponds to swi tch and rear connector pi n
P1-33, the next P1-34, etc, to the far ri ght
whi ch i s P1-56. The swi tch set to the OFF
posi ti on corresponds to a 0; the swi tch set to
SEL corresponds to a 1. The suggested panel
l ayout shown i n fi gure 5-3 shows the mode s
swi tches l abel ed accordi ng to the octal di gi ts
that each control s. Thi s makes the octal code
easy to read from the swi tch posi ti ons by
addi ng the bi nary val ue of those swi tches i n
each 3-swi tch group set to SEL. You must
avoi d, however, the combi nati on wi th al l
swi tches up or al l swi tches down. These two
combi nati ons are not al l owed i n the mode s
addressi ng scheme and wi l l produce a tran-
sponder di agnosti c code FF i n TDR-94/94D
uni ts wi th CPN endi ng i n -002.
5.6.2 Di agnosti c Word, ARI NC 429 l abel
350, Defi ni ti on and Decodi ng Procedure
5.6.2.1 On DataTrac 400/400H
The di agnosti c codes l i sted i n tabl e 5-2 are
avai l abl e for vi ewi ng on the ARI NC 429 l abel
350 di agnosti c word. The DataTrac 400 i s
capabl e of di spl ayi ng thi s word i n a vari ety of
bi nary and hexadeci mal forms. The form
that i s sel ected i s l argel y a matter of
personal preference but the form chosen here
i s l abel ed BIN19L. Thi s paragraph shows
you how to decode the di agnosti c i nformati on
from thi s di spl ayed word.
Refer to the screen representati on bel ow.
Thi s shows the l abel 350 word from bi ts 29
through 11 as i t appears on the DataTrac
400/400H di spl ay set for a BIN19L di spl ay.
(The actual screen wi l l show other words and
thei r l abel s but thi s di scussi on focuses onl y
on the l abel 350 word.)
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 29--Binary Data--11 SSM Par msec
350 01 1000010110011000000 11 1 0200
Of course, you can al so sel ect the hex di spl ay
mode for a di rect di spl ay of the di agnosti c
code and avoi d the conversi on process.
-----------------RCV 1----------12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 70 B3 01 17 11 1 0200
||<---diagnostic code
Thi s di spl ay can be reproduced as fol l ows:
a. Wi th the ATC-601 set for ATCRBS RE-
PLY, set the test panel POWER swi tch to
OFF.
b. On the test panel , set the TCAS/NO
TCAS swi tch to TCAS.
c. On the DataTrac 400/400H, press RCV
and then press ENT. (Thi s cl ears the
di spl ay and prepares the anal yzer to
recei ve new data.)
d. On the test panel , set the POWER swi tch
to ON.
e. After a few seconds, the XFEED OUT
l amp l i ghts, the ATC-601 REPLY l amp
l i ghts, and the data i s di spl ayed on the
DataTrac 400/400H RCV 1 screen.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-149
maintenance 523-0775657
Note: I f the 350 word does not appear on the
DataTrac 400/400H screen i ni ti al l y, press
RCV (unti l the cursor i s at the l eft of HOLD),
then press the down arrow (or up arrow) key
to scrol l the data words unti l the 350 word
appears. Bi ts 17 through 24 are the ei ght
data bi ts that defi ne the 2-di gi t hexadeci mal
di agnosti c code as fol l ows:
Di agnosti c di gi t:
MSB LSB
Bi t: 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17
Bi n val ue: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Exampl e: 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1
Di ag: | < B >| | < 3 >|
I nterpretati on:TCAS bus i nacti ve (see tabl e
5-2)
The conversi on process i nvol ves transl ati ng
each of these four-bi t groupi ngs i nto the
equi val ent hexadeci mal val ue usi ng the
bi nary to hex conversi on l i st i n paragraph
5.6.1 above.
Bi ts 11 through 16, and 25 through 28
i denti fy speci fi c fai l ure condi ti ons. These are
defi ned bel ow.
Bi t DEFI NI TI ON Bi t DEFI NI TI ON
11 Xpdr fai l ure 16 Seri al control port c
fai l ure
12 RAM fai l ure 25 Seri al al ti tude port a
fai l ure
13 ROM fai l ure 26 Seri al al ti tude port b
fai l ure
14 Port b fai l ure 27 Seri al ADLP bus fai l -
ure
15 Port a fai l ure 28 Seri al TCAS bus fai l -
ure *
The defi ned fai l ure condi ti on exi sts when a
l ogi c 1 appears i n the correspondi ng bi t l oca-
ti on.
* Noti ce i n the screen exampl e above, bi t 28
i s al so set to 1.
I nci dental l y, i n the l abel 350 di agnosti c word,
bi t 29 i s defi ned as a PAD.
5.6.2.2 On DataTrac 200
The DataTrac 200 di spl ays the di agnosti c
code i n the HEX RCV fi el d i n the form of 5
hex di gi ts as fol l ows:
Hex: MSB 4 3 2 LSB
Data bi t: 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Bi t Val : 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 *
* bi t 10 i s not i ncl uded i n the di spl ay
I n the test procedures, a TCAS Bus fai l ure
di agnosti c i s i nduced produci ng a di agnosti c
code B3. Thi s
appears on the DataTrac 200 as a Hex code
45980. Thi s i s produced as fol l ows:
5/ 5/ 1993 5-150
maintenance 523-0775657
Hex bi t: MSB 4 3 2 LSB
Data bi t: 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Bi t Val : 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 *
Hex val ue: 4 5 9 8 0
Bi nary: 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bi t Val : 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Hex val ue: B 3
Thus, to properl y i nterpret a di agnosti c code
as di spl ayed on the DataTrac 200, you must
fi rst transl ate that code i nto i ts bi nary form,
extendi ng from bi t 11 through 29. Then
transl ate the two four-bi t groupi ngs, 18
through 21 for the LSB, and 22 through 25
for the MSB, i nto the hex di agnosti c code.
Then refer to tabl e 5-2 for the defi ned di ag-
nosti c.
I t i s i mportant to remember that bi ts 11
through 16, and 25 through 28, defi ne
speci fi c fai l ure condi ti ons as descri bed i n the
previ ous paragraph for the DataTrac 400.
There i s an easi er way to i nterpret the
di agnosti c code and that i s to sel ect the 32--
Hex Data--1 di spl ay format. Thi s wi l l gi ve
you a di spl ay:
-----------------RCV 1--(ALL)---12.5 KHz
Lbl SDI 32-Hex Data-1 SSM Par msec
350 01 68 B3 01 17 11 1 0200
||<---diagnostic code
I n thi s format you can read the di agnosti c
code di rectl y from the second pai r of hex
di gi ts (from the l eft).
Suppose the DataTrac 200 shows a HEX DA-
TA fi el d 47A80. You woul d i nterpret thi s
code as fol l ows:
Hex bi t: MSB 4 3 2 LSB
Data bi t: 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
Bi t Val : 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1 *
Hex val ue: 4 7 A 8 0
Bi nary: 0 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Bi t Val : 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Hex val ue: F 5
Thus a DataTrac 200, HEX DATA fi el d di spl ay
of 47A80 i s a di agnosti c code F5, whi ch i s
shown on tabl e 5-2 as Port Sel ects Changed.
5.6.3 Transponder Control Word Defi ni -
ti ons
Thi s paragraph descri bes the vari ous control
words used by the TDR-94/94D mode s tran-
sponder.
5.6.3.1 ARI NC 429, Label 031, 015, and
016, Control Words
I n ARI NC 429, the l abel i s formed by the
fi rst byte (fi rst 8 bi ts whi ch forms byte 0) of
the data word. The l abel i s descri bed i n
paragraph 5.6.5 bel ow.
The data word wi th l abel 031 i s the onl y con-
trol word used by the TDR-94/94D. Label
031 i s the standard ATCRBS control word.
Word l abel 016 has been redefi ned for ad-
dressi ng the TCAS di spl ays. Word l abel s
013 and 015 are TCAS rel ated words. Label s
016 and 015 are descri bed here onl y for
i nformati onal purposes. The TDR-94/94D
wi l l accept word l abel s 013, 015, and 016
5/ 5/ 1993 5-151
maintenance 523-0775657
and pass them through unchanged to the
TCAS computer. The data fi el d, bi ts 9
through 32, are descri bed as fol l ows:
Label 031:
Bi t No. Defi ni ti on
9 SDI Code (see note 1)
10 SDI Code (see note 1)
11 Al t Reporti ng, On/Off (1=on)
12 Pad
13 I dent, On/Off (1=on)
14 Al t Port Sel ected, (1=B)
15 Pad
16 Pad
17 Pad
18 Mode a, code D1
19 Mode a, code D2
20 Mode a, code D4
21 Mode a, code C1
22 Mode a, code C2
23 Mode a, code C4
24 Mode a, code B1
25 Mode a, code B2
26 Mode a, code B4
27 Mode a, code A1
28 Mode a, code A2
29 Mode a, code A4
30 SSM (see note 4)
31 SSM (see note 4)
32 Pari ty
Label 016:
Bi t No. Defi ni ti on
9 SDI Code (see note 1)
10 SDI Code (see note 1)
11 Al t Reporti ng, On/Off (1=on)
12 SPI (0=i dent off)
13 Di spl ay control (see note 2)
14 Di spl ay control (see note 2)
15 Sens l evel 0 (see note 3)
16 Sens l evel 1 (see note 3)
17 Sens l evel 2 (see note 3)
18 4096, code D1
19 4096, code D2
20 4096, code D4
21 4096, code C1
22 4096, code C2
23 4096, code C4
24 4096, code B1
25 4096, code B2
26 4096, code B4
27 4096, code A1
28 4096, code A2
29 4096, code A4
30 SSM (see note 4)
31 SSM (see note 4)
32 Pari ty
Label 015:
Bi t No. Defi ni ti on
9 SDI Code (see note 1)
10 SDI Code (see note 1)
11 Al ti tude l i mi t A 100
12 Al ti tude l i mi t A 200
13 Al ti tude l i mi t A 400
14 Al ti tude l i mi t A 800
15 Al ti tude l i mi t A 1600
16 Al ti tude l i mi t A 3200
17 Al ti tude l i mi t A 6400
18 Al ti tude l i mi t B 100
19 Al ti tude l i mi t B 200
20 Al ti tude l i mi t B 400
21 Al ti tude l i mi t B 800
22 Al ti tude l i mi t B 1600
23 Al ti tude l i mi t B 3200
24 Al ti tude l i mi t B 6400
25 spare
26 spare
27 spare
28 spare
29 spare
30 SSM (see note 4)
31 SSM (see note 4)
32 Pari ty
Note 1: See paragraph 5.6.4.1 bel ow
Note 2: The di spl ay control bi ts control the TCAS
di spl ay as fol l ows. Thi s i nformati on i s suppl i ed by a
TCAS control and i s passed through the transponder
unchanged.
BI T
14 13 Defi ni ti on
0 0 Pri mary and traffi c di spl ay
0 1 Pri mary di spl ay onl y
1 0 TCAS traffi c di spl ay onl y
1 1 No control functi on possi bl e
Note 3: Sensi ti vi ty l evel i s TCAS control i nformati on
that i s provi ded vi a an upl i nk message from a ground-
based control l er. Bi t combi nati on defi ni ti ons are as
fol l ows:
BI T
17 16 15 Defi ni ti on
0 0 0 SL 0 (Automati c)
0 0 1 SL 1 (STBY)
0 1 0 SL 2 (TA onl y)
0 1 1 SL 3
1 0 0 SL 4
1 0 1 SL 5
1 1 0 SL 6
1 1 1 SL 7
5/ 5/ 1993 5-152
maintenance 523-0775657
Note 4: SSM code defi ni ti ons are as fol l ows:
BI T Defi ni ti ons
31 30 Label 031 Label 016/015/013
0 0 Normal operati on Normal operati on
0 1 No computed data No computed data
1 0 Functi onal test Functi onal test
1 1 Not used Fai l ure warni ng
Label 013:
Bi t No. Defi ni ti on
9 SDI Code (see note 1)
10 SDI Code (see note 1)
11 Fl i ght l evel (0=rel ati ve, 1= absol ute)
12 Al ti tude sel ect (see note 2)
13 Al ti tude sel ect (see note 2)
14 spare
15 spare
16 spare
17 spare
18 User defi ned
19 User defi ned
20 User defi ned
21 User defi ned
22 0.5, TCAS range
23 1.0, TCAS range
24 2.0, TCAS range
25 4.0, TCAS range
26 8.0, TCAS range
27 16.0, TCAS range
28 32.0, TCAS range
29 64.0, TCAS range
30 SSM (see note 4 above)
31 S2SM (see note 4 above)
32 Pari ty
Note 1: See paragraph 5.6.4.1 bel ow
Note 2: TCAS Al ti tude sel ects:
BI T
13 12 Defi ni ti on
0 0 Normal (-A to +A)
0 1 Above (-A to +B)
1 0 Bel ow (-B to +A)
1 1 Unrestri cted
5.6.3.2 CSDB, Label 1E, Control Word
The TDR-94/94D uses CSDB word l abel 1E
for CSDB control . Al l CSDB words consi st of
6 bytes, wi th each bytes consi sti ng of 8 bi ts.
These bytes are typi cal l y i denti fi ed as bytes 0
through 5. Byte 0 i s the l abel byte, byte 1 i s
known as the status byte, and bytes 2
through 5 transmi t the object data. The
bytes are descri bed as fol l ows:
The fi rst ei ght bi ts form the fi rst byte and
contai n the word l abel :
Byte 0 i s the l abel byte:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Logi c: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
Hex: | 1 | | E |
Byte 1 i s the status byte:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Def: | | | | | | | < --| <--SI (*)
| | | | | | <--Test (1= on)
| | | | | <--ATC I dent (1=on)
| | | | <--Al t reporti ng (1=on)
| | | <--Mode (1 = standby)
| | <--Pad
| <--Code val i d (1 = val i d)
* For Source i denti fi er defi ni ti on, refer to
paragraph 5.6.4.2 bel ow.
Bytes 2 and 3 convey the ATC code:
Byte 2:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Val ue: - 4 2 1 - 4 2 1
Def: Pd | | | Pd | | |
< ATC C codes > < ATC D codes >
Byte 3:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Val ue: - 4 2 1 - 4 2 1
Def: Pd | | | Pd | | |
< ATC A codes > < ATC B codes >
Byte 4:
Bytes 4 and 5 convey the Gi l l ham code al ti tude
i nformati on:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Val ue: - 4 2 1 - 4 2 1
Def: Pd | | | Pd | | |
< ALT C codes > < Al t D codes >
Byte 5:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Val ue: - 4 2 1 - 4 2 1
Def: Pd | | | Pd | | |
< ALT A codes > < Al t B codes >
Refer to paragraph 5.7 for addi ti onal Gi l l ham
al ti tude code i nformati on.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-153
maintenance 523-0775657
5.6.3.3 CSDB, Label A0, Al ti tude Word
The TDR-94/94D uses CSDB word l abel A0
for CSDB al ti tude data; both pressure and
barometri c. As i n al l other CSDB words,
word l abel A0 consi sts of si x 8-bi t bytes,
i denti fi ed as bytes 0 through 5. Byte 0 i s the
l abel byte; byte 1 i s the status byte; bytes 2
and 3 transmi t the pressure al ti tude
i nformati on; bytes 4 and 5 transmi t the
barometri c al ti tude i nformati on. The
detai l ed structure i s as fol l ows:
Byte 0 i s the l abel byte:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Logi c: 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
Hex: | A | | 0 |
Byte 1 i s the status byte:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Def: | | | | | | | <- | <--SI (*)
| | | | | | <--Test (1 = on)
| | | | | <-- 1 = xsi de baro
| | | | <--Strut sw (1 = on gnd)
| | | <-- Rsvd for presel ect (**)
| | <--Baro al t val i d (1 = val i d)
| <--Pres al t val i d (1 = val i d)
* For Source i denti fi er defi ni ti on, refer to
paragraph 5.6.4.2 bel ow.
** Bi t 5 of byte 1 i s bi t 1 of a two-bi t matri x
for a al ti tude presel ect functi on. Bi t 2 i s i n
the same l ocati on of data word A1.
Bytes 2 and 3 convey pressure al ti tude:
Byte 2: part 1 of pressure al t data:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bi n wt: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Al t wt: | | | | <16 | | | | <1
| | | <32 | | | <2
| | <64 | | <4
| <128 | <8
Byte 3: part 2 of pressure al t data:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bi n wt: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Al t wt: | | | | <4096 | | | | <-256
| | | <8192 | | | <512
| | <16384 | | <1024
| < -32768 | <2048
Bytes 4 and 5 convey barometri c al ti tude:
Byte 4: part 1 of barometri c al t data:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bi n wt: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Al t wt: | | | | <16 | | | | <1
| | | <32 | | | <2
| | <64 | | <4
| <128 | <8
Byte 5: part 2 of barometri c al t data:
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bi n wt: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Al t wt: | | | | <4096 | | | | <-256
| | | <8192 | | | <512
| | <16384 | | <1024
| < -32768 | <2048
The bi t pattern for any al ti tude wi thi n the
range -8191 to +57343 feet, pressure or
barometri c, i s encoded usi ng twos
compl ement ari thmeti c wi th a 24576 foot
offset. Use the fol l owi ng conversi on methods
as you wi sh:
1. Sel ect the al ti tude to be encoded.
2. Subtract 24576 from that quanti ty.
3. I f the resul t i s negati ve, add 32768. *
4. Convert the resul t to bi nary usi ng the
al ti tude bi t wei ghts shown above.
* I f you use a cal cul ator to do the deci mal to
bi nary conversi on, you may not need to add
thi s quanti ty. I f i t uses 2s compl ement
ari thmeti c for the conversi on, you can i gnore
the addi ti on.
To decode a 16-bi t bi nary number i nto a
deci mal quanti ty:
1. Sel ect the bi nary quanti ty.
2. Convert the bi nary number i nto deci mal
usi ng the al ti tude bi t wei ghts shown above.
3. I f the MSB (bi t 7 of bytes 3/5) i s = 1,
subtract 8192. I f i t i s = 0, add 24576. **
4. The resul t i s the equi val ent deci mal
quanti ty.
** I f you use a cal cul ator to do the bi nary-to-
deci mal conversi on, you may not need to
subtract the 8192 i n step 3. But you must
add the 24576. (The 8192 i s the di fference
between the 32768 2s compl ement si gn factor
and the 24576 offset.)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-154
maintenance 523-0775657
5.6.4 SDI /SI Code Defi ni ti ons
5.6.4.1 ARI NC 429, SDI Defi ni ti on
I n ARI NC 429, bi ts 8 and 9, of al l word l a-
bel s, form the SDI code. The code defi ni ti ons
depend on the l abel as fol l ows:
BI TS DEFI NI TI ON FOR LABELS:
9 8 203/204 031/350/371
0 0 Al l -cal l Not used
0 1 Si de 1 Si de 1
1 0 Si de 2 Si de 2
1 1 Not used Not used
BI TS DEFI NI TI ON FOR LABEL:
9 8 013
0 0 both l eft and ri ght, RA/TA, bus #1 and #2
0 1 l eft, RA/TA, bus #1
1 0 ri ght, RA/TA, bus #2
1 1 not defi ned
5.6.4.2 CSDB, SI Defi ni ti on
I n CSDB, bi ts 0 and 1 of byte 1 form the
source i denti fi er and are defi ned as fol l ows:
BI TS DEFI NI TI ON FOR LABELS:
1 0 1E/1F/A0/F3
0 0 Not used
0 1 Si de 1
1 0 Si de 2
1 1 Not used
5.6.5 Octal Label Defi ni ti ons
I n ARI NC 429, the l abel i s expressed as an
octal number. The equi val ent i n CSDB i s
expressed as a hexadeci mal number.
5.6.5.1 ARI NC 429, Octal Label Defi ni ti on
Bi ts 0 through 7 form the octal l abel and are
defi ned as fol l ows:
Label di gi t: LSB 2 MSB
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bi t val ue: 1 2 4 1 2 4 1 2
Exampl e: 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0
I nterp: | <--5-->| | <--1-->| | -0-|
There are three i mportant poi nts here:
1. Noti ce that the MSB i s on the ri ght, de-
fi ned by the l ower ordered bi ts. Thi s i s re-
versed from that of the data fi el d where the
MSB i s defi ned by the hi gher ordered bi ts.
2. Noti ce al so that the most si gni fi cant bi t
(MSB) i s defi ned by onl y two bi ts. Thi s
means that the MSB can have a val ue no
greater than 3 (2 + 1). Thi s al so means that
the numeri cal l y l argest octal code possi bl e i s
377 whi ch i s di spl ayed, bi ts 0 through 7, as
11111111.
3. Noti ce al so that the bi t val ues are re-
versed from the val ues i n the data fi el ds. I n
the data fi el ds, the val ues i ncrease as you
move from ri ght to l eft. Here they val ues
decrease i n val ue, movi ng from ri ght to l eft.
5.6.5.2 CSDB Hexadeci mal Label
Defi ni ti on
I n CSDB the l abel of the word i s a two di gi t
hexadeci mal number and i s defi ned i n the
fi rst 8-bi ts, byte 0, of the CSDB
transmi ssi on. The bi ts are defi ned as fol l ows:
Label di gi t: MSB LSB
Bi t: 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Bi t val ue: 8 4 2 1 8 4 2 1
Exampl e: 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0
I nterp: | ------1-------| | ------E-------|
6/ 15/ 1995 5-154.1
maintenance 523-0775657
Thi s page i s i ntenti onal l y l eft bl ank.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-154.2
maintenance 523-0775657
5.7 GI LLHAM CODE DESCRI PTI ON
wi th ENCODI NG AND DECODI NG
I NSTRUCTI ONS
Thi s paragraph contai ns a descri pti on of the
Gi l l ham (ARI NC 572) al ti tude encodi ng
scheme. The paragraph al so i ncl udes
i nstructi ons for encodi ng and decodi ng. Thi s
can be hel pful i f you encounter an al ti tude
di screpancy duri ng a test or faul t i sol ati on
procedure that i s caused by a faul ty di gi ti zer or
broken wi re i n the al ti tude bus.
Tabl e 5-15 shows the encodi ng matri x for both
the 500-foot i ncrements as wel l as the 100-foot
i ncrements. Fol l owi ng the tabl e are the
encodi ng and decodi ng i nstructi ons.
Table5-15. GillhamAltitude, ARI NC 572, Encoding Scheme
| <--- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- A
4
, B
1
, B
2
, B
4
---- ----- ----- ----- ----- ----- ---- ---- --->|
D
2
,D
4
, A
1
,A
2
0000 0001 0011 0010 0110 0111 0101 0100 1100 1101 1111 1110 1010 1011 1001 1000
0000
0001
0011
0010
0110
0111
0101
0100
1100
1101
1111
1110
1010
1011
1001
1000
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47
63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48
64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79
95 94 93 92 91 90 89 88 87 86 85 84 83 82 81 80
96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111
127 126 125 124 123 122 121 120 119 118 117 116 115 114 113 112
128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143
159 158 157 156 155 154 153 152 151 150 149 148 147 146 145 144
160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167 168 169 170 171 171 173 174 175
191 190 189 188 187 186 185 184 183 182 181 180 179 178 177 176
192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207
223 222 221 220 219 218 217 216 215 214 213 212 211 210 209 208
224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239
255 254 253 252 251 250 249 248 247 246 245 244 243 242 241 240
256 segments, at 500 -ft i nterval s, from -1000 ft to 127,000 ft.
100-ft bi ts 100-ft val ue i f 500-ft segment i s:
C
1
C
2
C
4
odd even
__ __ __ _______ _______
0 0 1 7 (+ 200) 8 (- 200)
0 1 1 6 (+ 100) 9 (- 100)
0 1 0 5 (00) 0 (00)
1 1 0 4 (- 100) 1 (+ 100)
1 0 0 3 (- 200) 2 (+ 200)
I t i s i mportant to note that thi s scheme has no provi si on for C
1
, C
2
, and C
4
bi t patterns 000, 111, or 101.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-155
maintenance 523-0775657
5.7.1 Gi l l ham Code Decodi ng I nstructi ons
Thi s paragraph provi des a method of
transl ati ng a Gi l l ham code pattern i nto
al ti tude.
1. Determi ne the encoded bi ts and wri te them
i nto the fol l owi ng measured bi ts row. I f any of the
bi ts are mi ssi ng or not connected (and thi s i s l i kel y for
bi ts D
2
, and D
4.
) just enter a 1 for that bi t. (A
measured 1 means i t i s not acti ve.)
Bi t names: A
1
A
2
A
4
B
1
B
2
B
4
C
1
C
2
C
4
D
1
* D
2
* D
4
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Measured bi ts: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ _1_ ___ ___
I nverted l ogi c: ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ _0_ ___ ___
2. I nvert each of the bi ts and wri te that
pattern i nto the i nverted l ogi c row.
3. From the i nverted l ogi c row, determi ne the
encoded bi t pattern for bi ts A
4
, B
1
, B
2
, B
4
.
4. Compare that pattern to the l i sti ng of
patterns on Tabl e 5-15 for A
4
, B
1
, B
2
, B
4
and
note the col umn where you found the match.
5. From the i nverted l ogi c row, determi ne the
encoded bi t pattern for bi ts D
2
, D
4
, A
1
, A
2
.
6. Compare that pattern to the l i sti ng of
patterns i n the l eft col umn of Tabl e 5-15 and
note the row where you found the match.
7. Read the segment number from the poi nt
at whi ch your marked col umn and row
i ntersect.
8. Mul ti pl y that segment number by 500 and then
subtract 1000. The resul t i s the al ti tude to the
nearest 500 feet.
9. From the i nverted l ogi c row, determi ne the encoded
bi t pattern for bi ts C
1
, C
2
and C
4
.
10. I f C
1
and C
4
are both 0 then you are fi ni shed.
The resul t of step 8. i s the fi nal resul t. I f C
1
and C
4
are not both 0 then proceed.
11. Fi nd the sequence for C
1
, C
2
and C
4
i n the l ower
part of Tabl e 5-15. Note that row.
12. Dependi ng on whether the segment number from
step 7. above was odd or even, add or subtract ei ther
100 or 200 to or from the 500-ft al ti tude. The resul t i s
the al ti tude to the nearest 100 feet.
Exampl e: Suppose you measure the fol l owi ng l ogi c l evel s on the test panel (1 = hi gh or open, and
0 = l ow)
Test Poi nts: A
1
A
2
A
4
B
1
B
2
B
4
C
1
C
2
C
4
D
1
* D
2
* D
4
___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Measured: 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0
I nvert l ogi c: 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
Col umn data: 1100
Row data: 0101
Referri ng to the matri x i n Tabl e 5-15 above,
thi s i denti fi es segment 104.
Mul ti pl y segment by 500 and subtract 1000:
104 x 500 - 1000 = 51 000.
The C
1
, C
2
, and C
4
bi ts determi ne the 100-ft
al ti tude offset from the rounded 500-ft val ue.
Because the i denti fi ed segment i s an even
number, use the data under the even col umn.
Compari ng the i nverted l ogi c bi t pattern for
C
1
, C
2
, and C
4
(001) to the l i sti ng, we fi nd that i t
corresponds to the fi rst entry. Thi s decl ares that the
hundred foot val ue i s the nearest 800 (or 200 feet l ess
than the rounded 500-ft l evel ). Thus the measured bi t
pattern yi el ds an al ti tude of 50 800 feet.
* D
1
and D
2
are not connected on the test panel . For
purposes of thi s i l l ustrati on, assume an open to be a
l ogi c 1. You wi l l noti ce i n Tabl e 5-15 that D
1
i s not
used, and D
2
i s not acti ve at al ti tudes bel ow 60 000
feet.
6/ 15/ 1995 5-156
maintenance 523-0775657
5.7.2 Gi l l ham Code, Encodi ng
I nstructi ons
Thi s paragraph wi l l descri be a process to
determi ne the code needed for a parti cul ar
al ti tude:
1. Sel ect the desi red al ti tude.
2. Add 1000 to that number.
3. Round that number to the nearest mul ti pl e
of 500. (Save the di fference thus dropped; i t
wi l l be needed to determi ne the 100-foot bi t
pattern i n step 6. bel ow.)
4. Di vi de the rounded number by 500. Thi s
becomes the 500-ft segment number for the
matri x i n Tabl e 5-15 above.
5. Locate the segment number i n the tabl e
and:
a. Read the l ogi c pattern for A
4
, B
1
, B
2
, B
4
from the top of the col umn and enter i t i n
the spaces bel ow.
b. Read the l ogi c pattern for D
2
, D
4
, A
1
, A
2
from
the l eft col umn of the segment row and enter i t i n
the spaces bel ow.
6. I f the absol ute val ue of the saved di fference from 3.
above i s l ess than 50, use the thi rd pattern for C
1
, C
2
,
and C
4
(010). I f the val ue of the saved di fference from
3. above i s 50 or more, round i t to the nearest 100.
Thi s must be ei ther 100 or 200 and ei ther more or l ess
than the 500-ft val ue.
7. I f the 500-ft segment number i s an even number
use the even col umn to determi ne the 100-ft bi t pat-
tern. (Thi s means that the al ti tude rounded to the
nearest 500-ft must be i n the form of XX000.)
8. I f the 500-ft segment number i s an odd number
use the odd col umn to determi ne the 100-ft bi t pat-
tern. (Thi s means that the al ti tude rounded to the
nearest 500-ft must be i n the form of XX500.
Bi t pattern entry:
Al ti tude: A
1
A
2
A
4
B
1
B
2
B
4
C
1
C
2
C
4
D
2
D
4
_______ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___ ___
Exampl e:
Determi ne the bi t pattern for an al ti tude of 11
800 feet.
1. Add 1000: 12 800.
2. Round to nearest mul ti pl e of 500: 13 000,
and save di fference: -200 ( l ess).
3. Di vi de 13 000 by 500: 26.
4. Locate segment number 26 on the matri x
above and:
a. Read the A
4
, B
1
, B
2
, B
4
bi t pattern from the
top of the col umn: 0111. Then enter each bi t
i nto the appropri ate space bel ow.
b. Read the D
2
, D
4
, A
1
, A
2
bi t pattern from the l eft
col umn of the same row. 0001. Then enter each bi t
i nto the appropri ate space bel ow.
5. The saved val ue from step 3. i s -200.
6. The segment number 26 i s an even number,
therefore the C
1
, C
2
, C
4
bi t pattern i s read from the
top entry: 001. You can, of course, al so read thi s on
the basi s of the hundreths di gi t val ue whi ch i n thi s
case i s an 8.
Bi t pattern entry:
Al ti tude: A
1
A
2
A
4
B
1
B
2
B
4
C
1
C
2
C
4
D
2
D
4
_11 800__ _0_ _1_ _0_ _1_ _1_ _1_ _0_ _0_ _1_ _0_ _0_
6/ 15/ 1995 5-157
maintenance 523-0775657
5.8 ACCEPTANCE TEST, TEST PANEL
ASSEMBLY I NSTRUCTI ONS
5.8.1 GENERAL
Thi s paragraph provi des the i nstructi ons and
materi al l i sti ng necessary for assembl y of the ATP
test panel s l i sted i n tabl e 5-1. Several test
equi pment suppl i ers offer a product i tem(s)
equi val ent to these speci fi cati ons. I f you wi sh, you
shoul d feel free to purchase such an i tem.
Otherwi se, i t can be l ocal l y fabri cated usi ng the
data suppl i ed i n thi s paragraph.
I f you fabri cated your fi xture accordi ng to
i nstructi ons suppl i ed an earl i er edi ti on of thi s
manual , you wi l l fi nd modi fi cati on i nstructi ons i n
paragraph 5.8.3 bel ow. Thi s edi ti on, and al l
subsequent edi ti ons that i ntroduce changes to the
Acceptance Test Test Panel wi l l gi ve modi fi cati on
i nstructi ons i n paragraph 5.8.3.
Fi gure 5-2 i s the test setup di agram showi ng how
the vari ous i tems are i nterconnected. Fi gure 5-3
i s a suggested panel l ayout for the enhanced
versi on. Fi gure 5-4 i s a schemati c di agram of the
abbrevi ated test panel .
Fi gure 5-5 i s a schemati c di agram for the enhanced
versi on of test panel . Tabl e 5-16 i s a l i st of the
materi al requi red for the enhanced versi on. Tabl e
5-17 i s a si mi l ar l i sti ng for the abbrevi ated versi on.
Tabl e 5-18 i s a l i sti ng of the manufacturers and
suppl i ers for the vari ous i tems needed to assembl e
the panel s. Equi val ent parts may be obtai ned from
other sources. Paragraph 5.8.2 and fi gures 5-5
through 5-8 descri be the control i nterconnect
cabl es. You may sel ect one or more of these cabl es,
dependi ng on the type of control you pl an to use.
These cabl es are requi red for both test panel
versi ons. However, you wi l l noti ce that the cabl e
for the CTL-92/92A can be di fferent, dependi ng on
the test panel versi on you i ntend to use. The
abbrevi ated versi on has no provi si on for Gi l l ham
code swi tchi ng and a number of other functi ons.
Thus, these connecti ons are not requi red i n the
cabl e i f you are usi ng that versi on test panel .
Table 5-16. Enhanced Version of Test Panel, Parts List
I TEM REF DES QTY MANUFACTURER COLLI NS PART
NUMBER
NAME PN
Toggl e swi tch,
SP, on/off
S1, S5, S7, S8,
S10, S11, S17-
S57, S59
48 C & K Components, I nc 7107SYZWQE 266-5321-150
Toggl e swi tch,
SPDT, on/on
S9 1
Toggl e swi tch,
DPDT, on/on
S2, S3 2 7201SYZQE 266-5321-200
Momentary
swi tch, SP, push-
on
S4, S6 2 8121SHZGE 266-5404-010
5/ 5/ 1993 5-158
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-16. Enhanced Version of Test Panel, Parts List (contd)
I TEM REF DES QTY MANUFACTURER COLLI NS PART
NUMBER
NAME PN
Wafer, swi tch, 2-
pol e, 4-psn
S13 1 Grayhi l l I nc. 44A3001204NF Not avai l abl e from
Col l i ns
Wafer swi tch, 5-
pol e, 2 -psn
S58 1 44A3004202NF
Wafer swi tch, 4-
pol e, 4 -psn
S12 1 44A3002204NF
Wafer swi tch, 6-
pol e, 4 -psn
S16 1 44A3006204NF
Lamp hol der 6 Chi cago Mi ni ature
Lamp, I nc.
LH73/1 i ncl uded i n 262-
2828-0X0
Lamp l en, red LDS 2-3 2 LC12YN2 262-2828-010
Lamp l ens, yel l ow LDS 1,4-6 4 LC12RN2 262-2828-030
Lamp, 28 V DS1-6 6 GE Co. 385 262-2171-010
Fuse hol der XF1 1 Bussman Di v. HKP-H, or FHN-20G Not avai l abl e from
Col l i ns
Fuse, 5A SB F1 1 F02G250V5AS
Banana jack, bl k TP1,3,5 2 E.F.Johnson Co. 360-0241-000
Banana jack, yel TP2,4,6 3 360-0245-000
Phono pl ug, 1/4" J2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9 8 Swi tchcraft I nc. M641/12-1 358-0014-000
Phono jack To mate wi th:
J2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9
See fi gure 5-9
AR PJ-055B Not avai l abl e from
Col l i ns
BNC to TNC
adapter
Needed to
adapt ATC-
601 rf cabl e to
antenna
connectors
2 M/A-COM Omni
Spectra, I nc.
3182-2320-00 Not avai l abl e from
Col l i ns
RF l oad (al so
shown on tabl e 5-1
Needed to
termi nate
unused rf
antenna
connecti on.
1 3101-6100-00
50-pi n D-submi n,
conn (socket)
1 I TT Cannon DDMF-50S-A176 371-0182-000
50-pi n D-submi n,
conn (pl ug)
See fi gures 5-
6, 5-7, 5-8
AR DDM50P-C37-A176 371-0118-000
5/ 5/ 1993 5-159
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-16. Enhanced Version of Test Panel, Parts List (contd)
I TEM REF DES QTY MANUFACTURER COLLI NS PART
NUMBER
NAME PN
TDR-94D
i nstal l ati on ki t
1 Col l i ns General
Avi ati on Di vi si on
628-8660-001
MMT-150
Mounti ng Tray
1 622-9672-003
CTL-92/92A
mati ng connector
See fi gure 5-6 1 359-0305-590, or
371-6110-000
RTU-870A/T
mati ng connector
See fi gure 5-7 1 359-0601-010
TTC-920G mati ng
connectors
See fi gure 5-8 1 of
each
J1:
MD24266R76B24S7
J2:
MS24266R16B24SB
J1: 359-4068-030
J2: 359-4118-240
Res, fi l m, 100k,
1%, 1/4W
R1-11 11 MS RN65D1003F 705-7192-000
Res, fi l m, 825,
1%, 1/2W
R12-22 11 RN65D8250F 705-7092-000
Grommet, 1-i n, i d 1 Atl anti c I ndi a Rubber
Co.
2277 201-0012-000
Chassi s,
8 x 12-i n , box
Or use a 19
rack mounti ng
panel
1 Bud I ndustri es, I nc. AC 424 021-0347-050
Swi tch knobs For wafer
swi tches
5 any wi th 1/4-i nch shaft
di a and setscrew
l ocki ng
N/A
Data bus reader
cabl es
See fi gure 5-9 AR
Chassi s, bottom
panel
Opti onal 1 BPA 1519 Not avai l abl e from
Col l i ns
5/ 5/ 1993 5-160
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-17. Abbreviated Version of Test Panel, Parts List
I TEM REF DES QTY MANUFACTURER COLLI NS PART
NUMBER
NAME PN
BNC to TNC
adapter
Needed to
adapt ATC-
601 rf cabl e to
antenna
connectors
2 M/A-COM Omni
Spectra, I nc.
3182-2320-00 Not avai l abl e from
Col l i ns
RF l oad (al so
shown on tabl e 5-1
Needed to
termi nate
unused rf
antenna
connecti on.
1 3101-6100-00
50-pi n D-submi n,
conn (socket)
1 I TT Cannon DDMF-50S-A176 371-0182-000
50-pi n D-submi n,
conn (pl ug)
See fi gures 5-
6, 5-7, 5-8
AR DDM50P-C37-A176 371-0118-000
TDR-94D
i nstal l ati on ki t
1 Col l i ns General
Avi ati on Di vi si on
628-8660-001
MMT-150
Mounti ng Tray
1 622-9672-003
CTL-92/92A
mati ng connector
See fi gure 5-6 1 359-0305-590, or
371-6110-000
RTU-870A/T
mati ng connector
See fi gure 5-7 1 359-0601-010
TTC-920G mati ng
connectors
See fi gure 5-8 1 of
each
J1:
MD24266R76B24S7
J2:
MS24266R16B24SB
J1: 359-4068-030
J2: 359-4118-240
Chassi s Note: The si ze of chassi s for the abbrevi ated versi on of the test panel i s opti onal . The pri mary
l i mi tati on i s that i t must be l arge enough to accomodate the connectors and other parts. Use of a 50-
pi n D-type connector can al so be seen as opti onal . I f you pl an to use onl y one type of control , such as
the CTL-92/92A, you may want to connect the cabl e di rectl y to the test panel as a pendant cabl e.
Cabl e grommet,
1/2-i n. i d
For pendant
cabl e exi t i f
used.
1 Atl anti c I ndi a 2283 201-0002-006
5/ 5/ 1993 5-161
maintenance 523-0775657
Table 5-14. Equipment and Component Manufacturers and Suppliers
SUPPLI ER ADDRESS PRODUCT
Col l i ns General Avi ati on Di vi si on 400 Col l i ns Road
Cedar Rapi ds I A 52498
TDR-94D I nstal l ati on ki t, MMT-150
Mounti ng Tray, CTL-92/92A mati ng
connector, RTU-870A/T mati ng
connector, TTC-920G mati ng connector
I FR Systems, I nc. 10200, West York Street
Wi chi ta, KS 67215
ATC-601 Ramp Test Set
Atl anti c I nstruments, I nc. P.O. Box 021466
Mel bourne, FL 32902
DataTrac 200/400/400H Databus
Anal yzers
JcAI R 400 I ndustri al Parkway,
I ndustri al Ai rport, KS 66031
Test panel and 429E ARI NC 429 TX/RX
Databus Anal yzer
Avi oni cs Speci al i st, I nc. 3833 Premi er Ave.
Memphi s, TN 38118
Test panel
M/A-COM Omni Spctra, I nc. 21 Conti nental Bl vd
Merri mac, NH 03054-9979
Rf l oad and BNC-to-TNC adapter
C & K Components, I nc. 15-T Ri verdal e Ave.
Newton, l MA 02158
(617) 964-6400
Toggl e swi tches
Grayhi l l I nc. 561 Hi l l grove, P.O.Box 10373
LaGrange I L 60525
(708) 354-1040
Wafer swi tches
Chi cago Mi ni ature Lamp, I nc. 1080-T Johnson Dr.
Buffal o Grove, I L 60089
(908) 459-3400
I ndi cator l amp hol ders and l ens
Bussman Di v., Cooper I ndustri es P.O. Box 14460
St. Loui s, MO 63178
(314) 394-2877
Fuses and fuse hol der
GE Co., Mi ni ature Lamp Dept. Nel a Park
Cl evel and OH 44112
(216) 266-2121
Li ght bul b
E.F. Johnson Co. Mi nneapol i s, MN 55459-0089 Banana jacks
I TT Cannon, Corp. 1851-T E. Deer Ave.
Santa Ana, CA 92705
(714) 557-4700
Connectors
Bud I ndustri es, I nc. P.O. Box 431, 4605 E. 355th St.
Wi l l oughby, OH 44094
(216) 946-3200
Chassi s
Atl anti c I ndi a Rubber Co. 317 W. Doubl as St.
Goshen, I N 46256
Rubber grommet
Swi tchcraft I nc. 5555-T N. El ston Ave.
Chi cago, I L 60630
(312) 792-2700
Phono pl ug and jack
5/ 5/ 1993 5-162
maintenance 523-0775657
Acceptance Test, Test Panel
Panel Layout Diagram
Figure 5-3
5/ 5/ 1993 5-163
maintenance 523-0775657
Acceptance Test, Abbrevi ated Test Panel
Schemati c Di agram
Fi gure 5-4
6/ 15/ 1995 5-164
maintenance 523-0775657
Acceptance Test, Enhanced Test Panel
Schematic Diagram
Figure 5-5 (Sheet 1 of 3)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-165
maintenance 523-0775657
Acceptance Test, Enhanced Test Panel
Schematic Diagram
Figure 5-5 (Sheet 2)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-166
maintenance 523-0775657
Acceptance Test, Enhanced Test Panel
Schematic Diagram
Figure 5-5 (Sheet 3)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-167
maintenance 523-0775657
Test Panel Mati ng Connector, D-submi n, 50-pi n, pl ug
DDM50P-C37-A176, CPN: 371-0118-000
CTL-92/92A Control , Mati ng Connector P1
MS3126 E20-41SY, CPN 359-0305-590, or
MS 3116E20,41SY, CPN: 371-6110-000
Si gnal Name/Descri pti on From
Pi n No.
To
Pi n No.
Wi re Si ze or Type
28 V dc, pri mary power no. 1 (+) 1 G 22 AWG
28 V dc, pri mary power no. 2 (+) 18 t 22 AWG
Pri mary power, ground (-) 17 s 22 AWG
Pri mary power, ground (-) 50 P 22 AWG
CTL data out, 1B 8 S 26 AWG, STP
CTL data out, 1A 41 R 26 AWG, STP
CTL data i n, 1B 31 U 26 AWG, STP
CTL data i n, 1A 10 V 26 AWG, STP
I dent i nput 4 b 26 AWG
Sel f-test (di screte i nput/output) 6 E 26 AWG (thi s wi re was not i ncl uded i n the
ori gi nal versi on of thi s cabl e)
The remai ni ng connecti ons are not requi red when usi ng the Abbrevi ated Versi on of Test Panel
No. 1 transponder i n stby 20 W 26 AWG (thi s wi re was not i ncl uded i n the
ori gi nal versi on of thi s cabl e)
No. 2 transponder i n stby 10 X 26 AWG
No. 1 transponder on/off 11 B 26 AWG
No. 2 transponder on/off 27 C 26 AWG
No. 1 sw 28 V dc out 28 k 26 AWG
No. 2 sw 28 V dc out 43 j 26 AWG
Acceptance Test, Test Panel
CTL-92/ 92A Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagramand Wire List
Figure 5-6 (Sheet 1 of 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-168
maintenance 523-0775657
Test Panel Mati ng Connector, D-submi n, 50-pi n, pl ug
DDM50P-C37-A176, CPN: 371-0118-000
CTL-92/92A Control , Mati ng Connector P1
MS3126 E20-41SY, CPN 359-0305-590, or
MS 3116E20,41SY, CPN: 371-6110-000
Si gnal Name/Descri pti on From
Pi n No.
To
Pi n No.
Wi re Si ze or Type
Al t code, A1 (i nput) 12 c 26 AWG
Al t code, A2 (i nput) 13 e 26 AWG
Al t code, A4 (i nput) 14 d 26 AWG
Al t code, B1 (i nput) 28 i 26 AWG
Al t code, B2 (i nput) 29 h 26 AWG
Al t code, B4 (i nput) 30 f 26 AWG
Al t code, C1 (i nput) 45 J 26 AWG
Al t code, C2 (i nput) 46 H 26 AWG
Al t code, C4 (i nput) 47 F 26 AWG
Al t code, D4 (i nput) 48 p 26 AWG
Al t code, common 5 g 26 AWG
Acceptance Test, Test Panel
CTL-92/ 92A Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagramand Wire List
Figure 5-6 (Sheet 2)
Acceptance Test, Test Panel
RTU-870A Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagramand Wire List
Figure 5-7 (Sheet 1 of 2)
6/ 15/ 1995 5-169
maintenance 523-0775657
Test Panel Mati ng Connector, D-submi n, 50-pi n, pl ug
DDM50P-C37-A176, CPN: 371-0118-000
RTU-870A/T Radi o Tuni ng Uni t, Mati ng Connector P1
MS27473T20F-2S, CPN 359-0601-010,
Strai n rel i ef: MS27506F20-2, CPN: 359-0637-070
Si gnal Name/Descri pti on From
Pi n No.
To
Pi n No.
Wi re Si ze or Type
28 V dc, pri mary power no. 1 (+) 1 1 22 AWG
28 V dc, pri mary power no. 2 (+) 18 7 22 AWG
Pri mary power, ground (-) 17 3 22 AWG
Pri mary power, ground (-) 50 3 22 AWG
RTU data out, 1B (ARI NC 429 data from
RTU to XPDR)
26 45 26 AWG, STP
RTU data out, 1A (ARI NC 429 data from
RTU to XPDR)
25 44 26 AWG, STP
RTU data i n, 1B (ARI NC 429 data i nput to
RTU from XPDR)
31 29 26 AWG, STP
RTU data i n, 1A (ARI NC 429 data i nput to
RTU from XPDR)
10 28 26 AWG, STP
I dent i nput 4 11 26 AWG
Acceptance Test, Test Panel
RTU-870A Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagramand Wire List
Figure 5-7 (Sheet 2)
Acceptance Test, Test Panel
TTC-920G Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagramand Wire List
Figure 5-8 (Sheet 1 of 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-170
maintenance 523-0775657
Test Panel Mati ng Connector, D-submi n, 50-pi n, pl ug
DDM50P-C37-A176, CPN: 371-0118-000
TTC-920G Transponder/TCAS Control , Mati ng Connector1
P1: MD24266R76B24S7, CPN: 359-4068-030
P2: MS24266R16B24S8, CPN: 359-4095-700
Si gnal Name/Descri pti on From
Pi n No.
To
Pi n No.
Wi re Si ze or Type
115 V ac, 400 Hz, pri mary power1 (hi gh)
(external source)
Source
Hi gh
J1-3
J2-3*
22 AWG
115 V ac, 400 Hz, pri mary power (l ow)
(external source)
Source
Low
J1-4
J2-4*
22 AWG
Pri mary power, ground (-) 17 J1-6
J2-6*
22 AWG
Ai r ground (i nput) (strap for normal
operati on)
17 J1-11*
J2-11*
26 AWG
Pri mary power, ground (-) 50 J1-8
J2-8*
22 AWG
ARI NC 429, data out, 1B (TTC-920G
output to XPDR)
25 J1-22 26 AWG, STP
ARI NC 429, data out, 1A (TTC-920G
output to XPDR)
26 J1-23 26 AWG, STP
Ai r ground (i nput) 17* J1-11*
J2-11*
26 AWG
Moni tor l amp power (+28 V dc) 1* J1-18* 26 AWG
Moni tor l amp power (+28 V dc) 1* J1-18* 26 AWG
Li ghti ng power (+28 V dc) 18* J2-1* 26 AWG
Standby/on 20* J1-7 26 AWG
Faul t Moni tor (XPDR output) 12* J1-20*
J2-20*
26 AWG
* These wi res were not shown i n the ori gi nal cabl e wi ri ng l i st.
Acceptance Test, Test Panel
TTC-920G Control Interconnect Cable Assembly Diagramand Wire List
Figure 5-8 (Sheet 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-171
maintenance 523-0775657
5.8.2Mi scel l aneous Cabl es
Fi gure 5-9 shows the addti onal cabl es needed
for the Acceptance Test. The ti p jack cabl es
shown i n the upper secti on of sheet 1 are
needed for dc power i nput to the DataTrac
200 or 400. I f you operate from ac power or
battery power onl y you do not need these.
The DataTrac 400H and JcAI R 429E, as wel l
as some DataTrac 200, have thei r own ac-to-
dc power converter/battery recharge faci l i ty.
I n the l ower secti on of sheet 1, the BNC-to-
si ngl e phono jack cabl es are needed for the
RX functi on of the DataTrac 400, and 400H.
For DataTrac 400 operati on you can
substi tute two of the l ower cabl e for the
upper and then use a separate TX port. For
the DataTrac 400H you must use the upper
cabl e because i t has onl y one TX port and
therefore you must use that port for both the
control and al ti tude functi ons.
Sheet 2 of thi s fi gure shows the cabl es
needed for the DataTrac 200 and the JcAI R
429E, respecti vel y.
I n assembl i ng the BNC-to-phono pl ug cabl es,
be sure to connect the bus A wi res between
the BNC center and the proper phono pl ug
contact. I n assembl i ng the phono pl ug-to-
phono pl ug cabl es, be sure to connect si mi l ar
contacts; i .e., do not reverse the A and B
l i nes. I n assembl i ng the phono pl ug-to-ti p
jack cabl es, be sure the A wi re i s connected to
the jack i denti fi ed as HI . I n al l cases, do not
use the the phono pl ug common as a si gnal
carryi ng contact.
AcceptanceTest, Bus Reader to Test Panel I nterconnecting Cables
Figure5-9 (sheet 1 of 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-172
maintenance 523-0775657
Acceptance Test, Bus Reader to Test Panel Interconnect Cables
Figure 5-9 (sheet 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-173
maintenance 523-0775657
5.8.1Acceptance Test Panel Modi fi cati on
Record.
5.8.1.1Modi fi cati on 1.
At modi fi cati on 1 the fol l owi ng changes are
i ntroduced.
1. An addi ti onal SPDT swi tch, S56, i s added
wi th connecti on to UUT pi n P1-28. Thi s
functi on i s l abel ed AUTO ALT. When thi s
functi on i s enabl ed (EN, ground appl i ed to
P1-28), the uni t automati cal l y swi tches to the
non-sel ected al ti tude port for val i d reporti ng
al ti tude data i f the al ti tude data at the
sel ected source i s i nterrupted or i nval i d.
2. Exi sti ng swi tch, S17, wi th connecti on to
UUT pi n P2-14 i s redefi ned. Thi s swi tch
previ ousl y functi oned as the ALT I NPUT
PORT SEL and swi tched the al ti tude i nput to
ei ther port A or port B. I n -003 uni ts,
al ti tude data i s requi red at both ports
si mul taneousl y therefore thi s swi tchi ng
functi on i s changed (see 3. bel ow). The new
functi on, SOURCE SELECT, CTL/SEL,
functi ons wi th the exi sti ng al ti tude source
sel ect pi ns P2-41 and P2-42 as fol l ows:
SS* AS0 AS1 Al ti tude Type Sel ected
1 0 0 ARI NC 429 on ARI NC ports A and B
1 0 1 CSDB on CSDB ports A and B
1 1 0 ARI NC 575 on ARI NC ports A and B
1 1 1 ARI NC 572 (Gi l l ham) on the Gi l l ham
paral l el port
0 0 0 Port A al ti tude on the sel ected control
bus (ei ther ARI NC 429 or CSDB) and
port B al ti tude type ARI NC 429 on
ARI NC port B.
0 0 1 Port A al ti tude on the sel ected control
bus (ei ther ARI NC 429 or CSBB) and
port B al ti tude type CSDB on CSDB
port B.
0 1 0 Port A al ti tude on the sel ected control
bus (ei ther ARI NC 429 or CSDB) and
port B al ti tude type ARI NC 575 on
ARI NC port B.
0 1 1 Port A al ti tude on the sel ected control
bus (ei ther ARI NC 429 or CSDB) and
port B al ti tude type Gi l l ham on the
Gi l l ham paral l el port.
* CTL = acti ve l ow (ground on P2-48) and
SEL = open.
3. ALTERNATE DI GI TAL ALTI TUDE
SOURCE i nput jack J5 i s added and exi sti ng
swi tch S16 i s expanded to al l ow two al ti tude
sources to be connected si mul taneousl y. S16
al l ows sel ecti on of the appropri ate i nput port
dependi ng on the type of data bei ng suppl i ed.
S16 al so control s the sel ect di scretes P2-41
(AS0) and P2-42 (AS1) (see 2. above). Data
suppl i ed on the ALTERNATE DI GI TAL
ALTI TUDE SOURCE i s swi tched to port B;
ei ther ARI NC or CSDB.
4. Exi sti ng al ti tude i nput jack J4 i s
rel abel ed as PRI MARY DI GI TAL ALTI TUDE
SOURCE. Swi tch S16 control s the
connecti on of thi s i nput to the appropri ate
UUT port A (ei ther ARI NC or CSDB).
5. Swi tch S57, REPORTI NG ALT SEL,
PA/PB, i s added. Thi s swi tch control s the
di screte P2-48 whi ch sel ects the al ti tude port
used for al ti tude reporti ng (Modes C and S).
When P2-48 i s grounded, port B data i s used
for al ti tude reporti ng. When open port A
data i s used.
6. TCAS I N and TCAS OUT i nput jacks, J6
and J7, are added to al l ow moni tori ng of the
TCAS data.
7. DATALI NK I N and DATALI NK OUT
jacks, J8 and J9, are added to al l ow ai rborne
datal i nk bus moni tori ng. Users shoul d see
thi s addi ti on as opti onal at thi s ti me because
the ai rborne datal i nk functi on has not been
i ndustry defi ned and therefore i s not ful l y
i mpl emented. I t i s presented here pri mari l y
so that bui l ders of thi s test panel can al l ow
for the eventual addi ti on of thi s functi on i f
and when i t i s requi red. Part of thi s change
al so i ncl udes the addi ti on of swi tch S58.
Thi s swi tch suppl i es a ground to P2-60 to
enabl e/sel ect the ai rborne datal i nk functi on.
8. That porti on of S12 whi ch suppl i es the
ground to pi ns P2-56, -57, and -58 has been
changed sl i ghtl y. The common was
connected to ground. I t shoul d i nstead be
connected to P2-52 whi ch i s avai l abl e at
swi tch S16.
9. The common for the Gi l l ham code
swi tches shoul d be connected to P1-12.
10. The XFEED I N and OUT l amps, DS3
and DS4, and swi tch S3 posi ti on l abel i ng
was reversed on the 6 January 1992 i ssue of
the test panel schemati c di agram. No wi ri ng
changes are needed.
11. Check the panel l ayout, fi gure 5-3
careful l y. You wi l l fi nd a few mi nor l abel
changes.
5/ 5/ 1993 5-174
maintenance 523-0775657
5.9 FLI GHTLI NE TEST, TEST PANEL
ASSEMBLY I NSTRUCTI ONS
5.9.1 I ntroducti on
Thi s paragraph provi des the i nstructi ons and
materi al l i sti ng necessary to assembl e the
Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel shown i n fi gure 5-10. A
number of test equi pment suppl i ers may offer
a product i tem equi val ent these
speci fi cati ons. I f so, you shoul d feel free to
purchase such an i tem. Otherwi se, i t can be
l ocal l y fabri cated usi ng the data i n thi s
paragraph.
5.9.2 Fl i ghtl i ne Test Panel Assembl y
and Use
Thi s test panel al l ows access to al l i nput and
output si gnal s to and from the appl i cabl e
control ; CTL-92 ATC Control , CTL-92A ATC
Control , CTL-92T ATC and TCAS Control ,
TTC-920G Transponder-TCAS Control , RTU-
870A Radi o Tuni ng Uni t, and RTU-870T
Radi o Tuni ng Uni t (TCAS). Usi ng thi s test
panel on the fl i ghtl i ne, wi th a dvm and a
bus reader, can hel p to i sol ate a probl em to
ei ther the control or the transponder uni t
and thus i ncrease the probabi l i ty of correctl y
removi ng the faul ty uni t i n a mul ti -uni t
system. I t i s i ntended that a ramp tester be
used for ATC ground stati on si mul ati on.
The test panel consi sts of a panel wi th
several test poi nts for i ndi vi dual si gnal
testi ng and phono jacks and swi tchi ng for
data bus moni tori ng and data word i njecti on.
When usi ng the panel , you wi l l sel ect the
proper i nterconnecti ng cabl es and test panel
overl ay, dependi ng on the control present i n
the i nstal l ati on. The respecti ve overl ay
refl ects the test poi nt and other i /o si gnal
i denti fi cati on pecul i ar to that control . The
numbers or l etters under each test poi nt are
the connector pi n numbers of the ATC control
i nvol ved.
Fi gure 5-10 i s the test setup di agram
showi ng the test panel connected between the
ai rpl ane harness control head mati ng
connector and the control head. I n the case
of the CTL-92T, you shoul d be aware that the
ATC control data ori gi nates i n the CTL-
92/92A as CSDB data. Thi s i s suppl i ed to
the CTL-92T where i t i s converted to ARI NC
429 data, TCAS data i s added, and the
composi te data i s then suppl i ed to the
transponder and subsequentl y to the TCAS.
Therefore, the communi cati on between the
CTL-92T and the CTL-92/92A i s i n CSDB,
whi l e the communi cati on between the CTL-
92T and the transponder/TCAS i s i n ARI NC
429.
Fi gure 5-11 i s the suggested panel l ayout of
the components; banana jacks, swi tches,
i ndi cator l amps, etc. I f you deci de to
fabri cate your own panel and wi sh to retai n
the overal l panel versati l i ty, be aware that
the overl ays are i ntended to be sel ectabl e.
The desi gn al l ows the overl ay to rest on top
of the panel and therefore must fi t the
component pl acement rather cl osel y. Fi gure
13 through 19 i s a seri es of di agrams
showi ng the vari ous overl ays; each appl i cabl e
to a gi ven control type. Wi th sui tabl e si ze
adjustment, fi gure 5-11 can be used as a
templ ate. The overl ays must (then) al so be
si ze adjusted.
Four D-type connectors are l ocated on the
edge of the panel ; two on each si de. These
connectors mate wi th the cabl e connectors.
The 25-pi n connectors carry onl y the di gi tal
data l i nes usi ng shi el ded wi ri ng whi l e the 50-
pi n connectors carry al l other i nput/output
functi ons. You may choose to use onl y a
si ngl e connector to carry al l i /o.
Fi gure 5-12 i s the schemati c di agram of the
test panel . Use thi s di agram as the gui de for
wi ri ng the panel . Tabl e 5-19 i s a l i st of the
parts needed to assembl e the test panel . See
paragraph 5.8 for a l i sti ng of suppl i ers.
Fi gures 5-20 through 5-25 show the cabl es
and wi ri ng. Sel ect the cabl es needed
dependi ng on whi ch of the vari ous control s;
CTL-92, CTL-92A, CTL-92T Control s, RTU-
870A, or RTU-870T Radi o Tuni ng Uni ts,
TTC-920G Transponder/TCAS Control , or
Gabl es 429 control .
5/ 5/ 1993 5-175
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Setup Diagram
Figure5-10
5/ 5/ 1993 5-176
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel, Panel Layout Diagram
Figure5-11
5/ 5/ 1993 5-177
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Schematic Diagram
Figure5-12 (Sheet 1 of 5)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-178
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Schematic Diagram
Figure5-12 (Sheet 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-179
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Schematic Diagram
Figure5-12 (Sheet 3)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-180
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Schematic Diagram
Figure5-12 (Sheet 4)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-181
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Schematic Diagram
Figure5-12 (Sheet 5)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-182
maintenance 523-0775657
Table5-19. FlightlineTest Panel Parts List
ITEM REF DES QTY MANUFACTURER COLLINS PART
NUMBER
NAME PN
Lamp Holder DS1,2,5,6, 2 Chicago Miniature
Lamp, Inc.
LH73/1 included in 262-2828-
0X0 CPN
Lamp lens, red LDS5,6 2 GE Co. LC12RN2 262-2828-030
Lamp lens, yellow LDS1,2 2 LC12YN2
Lamp, 28 V DS1-2 2 385 262-2171-010
Lamp, assy, 115
V
DS3-4 2 LeeCraft, SnapLite 262-2852-050
Toggle switch
DPDT, on/on
S3-S10 8 C & K
Components, Inc.
7101SYZQE 266-5321-150
Momentary
switch, SP, Push-
on
S1,S2 2 8121SHZGE 266-5404-010
Stereo Phono
jack, 1/4-inch
J3-J10 8 Switchcraft Inc. PJ-055B Not available from
Collins
Banana jack, 1/4" TP1-45 45 E.F. Johnson Co. blk: 108-0903-001
yel: 108-0907-001
(other colors are optional)
blk: 360-0241-000
yel: 358-0245-000
50-pin D-submin,
conn (socket)
J1A, J2A 2 ITT Cannon DDMF-50S-A176 371-0182-000
25-pin D-submin,
conn (socket)
J1B, J2B 2 DDMF-25S-A176 371-0166-000
Chassis 1 Bud Industries,
Inc.
AC 424 021-0347-050
Chassis, bottom
panel
1 BPA-1519 Not available from
Collins
BNC to TNC
adapter
Needed to
adapt ATC-
601 rf cable to
antenna cable
connector for
direction-
connection
method only.
1 M/A-COM Omni
Spectra, Inc.
3182-2320-00 Not available from
Collins
Control head
cables
Locally fabricated See figures 5-19
through 5-24
Bus reader
cables
Locally fabricated See figure 5-9
Tip jack test
leads
As required
for use with
dvm
Not available from
Collins
5/ 5/ 1993 5-183
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Panel Overlay for CTL-92/ 92A
Figure5-13
5/ 5/ 1993 5-184
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Panel Overlay for CTL-92T
Figure5-14
5/ 5/ 1993 5-185
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Panel Overlay for RTU-870A/ T Testing
Figure5-15
5/ 5/ 1993 5-186
maintenance 523-0775657
FlightlineTest Panel,
Panel Overlay for TTC-920G Testing
Figure5-16
5/ 5/ 1993 5-187
maintenance 523-0775657
Cabl e B: Connector i nformati on:
J1: KPT2E20-41PYDV, CPN: 371-8625-440
P1A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
P1B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Cabl e A: Connector i nformati on:
P1: MS3126E20-41SY, CPN 359-0305-590, or
MS3116E20,41SY, CPN 371-6110-000
P2A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
P2B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1
Wi re si ze/type (both cabl es)
Data bus 1A (from XPDR) V 1 1 V Shi el ded, twi sted pai r
Data bus 1B (from XPDR) U 14 14 U Shi el ded, twi sted pai r
Shi el d for U/V T 25 25 T Shi el d
Data bus 2A (from XPDR) a 2 2 a Shi el ded, twi sted pai r
Data bus 2B (from XPDR) Z 15 15 Z Shi el ded, twi sted pai r
Shi el d for a/Z Y 12 12 Y Shi el d
Data bus 1A (to XPDR) S 3 3 S Shi el ded, twi sted pai r
Data bus 1B (to XPDR) R 16 16 R Shi el ded, twi sted pai r
Shi el d for S/R P 24 24 P Shi el d
Data bus 2A (to XPDR) N 4 4 N Shi el ded, twi sted pai r
Data bus 2B (to XPDR) M 17 17 M Shi el ded, twi sted pai r
Shi el d for N/M L 11 11 L Shi el d
28 V dc pwr no. 1 (+) t 1 1 t 22 AWG
28 V dc pwr no. 2 (+) G 3 3 G 22 AWG
Dc pwr gnd s 50 50 s 22 AWG
Dc pwr gnd s 17 17 s 22 AWG
Chassi s gnd D 33 33 D 22 AWG
5 V l i ghti ng, hi A 7 7 A 26 AWG
28 V l i ghti ng, hi r 40 40 r 26 AWG
Li ghti ng common q 39 39 q 26 AWG
CTL-92/ 92A Control, FlightlineTest Cables, Assembly Diagramand WireList
Figure5-19 (sheet 1 of 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-188
maintenance 523-0775657
CTL-92/92A Cabl e B (contd) CTL-92/92A Cabl e A (contd)
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1
Wi re si ze/type
Di mmi ng bus n 6 6 n 26 AWG
Sel f-test di screte, i nput/output E 38 38 E 26 AWG
I dent di screte i nput b 5 5 b 26 AWG
Remote tuni ng sel ect, di screte
i nput
K 21 21 K 26 AWG
No. 1 XPDR i n stby, di screte
output
W 42 42 W 26 AWG
No. 2 XPDR i n stby, di screte
output
X 10 10 X 26 AWG
28 V dc, sw output, no. 1 k 28 28 k 26 AWG
28 V dc, sw output, no. 2 j 43 43 j 26 AWG
Dual sel ect (CTL -002 onl y) m 8 8 m 26 AWG
No. 1 XPDR off, di screte output B 11 11 B 26 AWG
No. 2 XPDR off, di screte output C 27 27 C 26 AWG
Al t code A1 c 29 29 c 26 AWG
Al t code A2 e 30 30 e 26 AWG
Al t code A4 d 45 45 d 26 AWG
Al t code B1 i 46 46 i 26 AWG
Al t code B2 h 14 14 h 26 AWG
Al t code B4 f 15 15 f 26 AWG
Al t code C1 J 31 31 H 26 AWG
Al t code C2 H 32 32 H 26 AWG
Al t code C4 F 47 47 F 26 AWG
Al t code D4 p 4 4 p 26 AWG
Al t code common g 37 37 g 26 AWG
CTL-92/ 92A Control, FlightlineTest Cables, Assembly Diagramand WireList
Figure5-19 (sheet 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-189
maintenance 523-0775657
Cabl e B: Connector i nformati on:
J1: 27508E20B2PA, CPN 859-0004-010
P1A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
P1B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Cabl e A: Connector i nformati on:
P1: KJ6F20BSA, CPN: 350-0601-020
Strai n rel i ef: MS27506F20-2, CPN 359-0637-070
P2A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
P2B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1
Wi re si ze/type (both cabl es)
CSDB data i n, 1A (from CTL) 23 1 1 23 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
CSDB data i n, 1B (from CTL) 22 14 14 22 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 23/22 25 25 Shi el d for 23/22
ARI NC 429 i n, 1A (from ARI NC
CTL)
15 2 2 15 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429 i n, 1B (from ARI NC
CTL)
14 15 15 14 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 15/14 12 12 Shi el d for 15/14
CSDB data out, 1A (to CTL) 16 3 3 16 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
CSDB data out, 1B (to CTL) 17 16 16 17 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 16/17 24 24 Shi el d for 16/17
ARI NC 429 out, 1A (to ARI NC
CTL)
8 4 4 8 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429 out, 1B (to ARI NC
CTL)
9 17 17 9 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 8/9 11 11 Shi el d for 8/9
ARI NC 429 i n, 1A (from XPDR) 11 5 5 11 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429 i n, 1B (from XPDR) 10 18 18 10 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 11/10 23 23 Shi el d for 11/10
ARI NC 429 i n, 2A (from XPDR) 13 6 6 13 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429 i n, 2B (from XPDR) 12 19 19 12 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 13/12 10 10 Shi el d for 13/12
CTL-92T Control, FlightlineTest Cables, Assembly Diagramand WireList
Figure5-20 (sheet 1 of 3)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-190
maintenance 523-0775657
CTL-92T Cabl e B (contd) CTL-92T Cabl e A (contd)
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1
Wi re si ze/type
ARI NC 429 out, 1A (to XPDR) 5 7 7 5 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429 out, 1B (to XPDR) 4 20 20 4 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 5/4 22 22 Shi el d for 5/4
ARI NC 429 out, 2A (to XPDR) 6 8 8 13 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429 out, 2B (to XPDR) 7 21 21 12 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 6/7 9 9 Shi el d for 6/7
28 V dc pwr i nput no. 1 (+) 1 1 1 1 22 AWG
28 V dc pwr i nput no. 1 (+) 2 2 2 2 22 AWG
28 V dc pwr i nput no. 2 (+) 3 19 19 3 22 AWG
28 V dc pwr i nput no. 2 (+) 28 3 3 28 22 AWG
Pwr gnd 59 50 50 59 22 AWG
Pwr gnd 60 20 20 60 22 AWG
Pwr gnd 32 17 17 32 22 AWG
Sel f-test i nput 46 38 38 46 26 AWG
I dent i nput 21 5 5 21 26 AWG
28 V l i ghti ng i nput, hi 48 40 40 48 26 AWG
5 V l i ghti ng i nput, hi 50 7 7 50 26 AWG
Li ghti ng common 62 39 39 62 26 AWG
Strap no. 1 53 8 8 53 26 AWG
Strap no. 2 49 21 21 49 26 AWG
Strap no. 3 52 9 9 52 26 AWG
Strap no. 4 51 22 22 51 26 AWG
Strap no. 5 47 23 23 47 26 AWG
Strap no. 6 24 24 24 24 26 AWG
Strap common 27 41 41 27 26 AWG
ATC no. 1 sel ect, i nput 19 42 42 19 26 AWG
ATC no. 2 sel ect, i nput 18 10 10 18 26 AWG
28 V swi tched output 25 11 11 25 26 AWG
CTL-92T Control , Fl i ghtl i ne Test Cabl es, Assembl y Di agram and Wi re Li st
Fi gure 5-20 (sheet 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-191
maintenance 523-0775657
CTL-92T Cabl e B (contd) CTL-92T Cabl e A (contd)
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1
Wi re si ze/type
Repl y l amp output (+) 33 28 28 33 26 AWG
Repl y l amp output (-) 41 43 43 41 26 AWG
Al ti tude reporti ng i nput 20 44 44 20 26 AWG
ATC code A1 44 29 29 44 26 AWG
ATC code A2 26 30 30 26 26 AWG
ATC code A4 45 45 45 45 26 AWG
ATC code B1 56 46 46 56 26 AWG
ATC code B2 55 14 14 55 26 AWG
ATC code B4 57 15 15 57 26 AWG
ATC code C1 39 31 31 39 26 AWG
ATC code C2 42 32 32 42 26 AWG
ATC code C4 54 47 47 54 26 AWG
ATC code D1 61 48 48 61 26 AWG
ATC code D2 37 49 49 37 26 AWG
ATC code D4 63 4 4 63 26 AWG
ATC code common 64 37 37 64 26 AWG
CTL-92T Control , Fl i ghtl i ne Test Cabl es, Assembl y Di agram and Wi re Li st
Fi gure 5-20 (sheet 3)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-192
maintenance 523-0775657
Cabl e B: Connector i nformati on:
J1: MS27508E20F-2P, CPN: 359-0667-280
P1A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
P1B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Cabl e A: Connector i nformati on:
P1: MS27493T20f-2S, CPN 359-0601-020
Strai n rel i ef: MS27506F20-2, CPN 359-0637-070
P2A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
P2B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1
Wi re si ze/type (both cabl es)
ARI NC 429, Data I nput, A, A 28 1 1 28 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429, Data I nput, A, B 29 14 14 29 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d 30 25 25 30 Shi el d
ARI NC 429, Data I nput, B, A 31 2 2 31 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429, Data I nput, B, B 32 15 15 32 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d 33 12 12 33 Shi el d
ARI NC 429, Data I nput, C, A 34 5 5 34 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429, Data I nput, C, B 35 18 18 5 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d 36 23 23 36 Shi el d
ARI NC 429, Data Output, A, A 44 4 4 44 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429, Data Output, A, B 45 17 17 45 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d 46 11 11 46 Shi el d
ARI NC 429, Data Output, B, A 47 7 7 47 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429, Data Output, B, B 48 20 20 48 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d 49 22 22 49 Shi el d
ARI NC 429, Data Output, C, A 50 8 8 50 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429, Data Output, C, B 51 21 21 51 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d 52 9 9 52 Shi el d
28 V dc pwr i nput, No. 1 (+) 1 1 1 1 22 AWG
28 V dc pwr i nput, No. 2 (+) 7 3 3 7 22 AWG
RTU-870A/ T Radio Tuning Unit, FlightlineTest Cables, Assembly Diagramand WireList
Figure5-21 (sheet 1 of 3)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-193
maintenance 523-0775657
RTU-870A/T Cabl e B (contd) RTU-870A/T Cabl e A (contd)
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1
Wi re si ze/type
Power ground 3 50 50 3 22 AWG
Ground (connect to P1-A 50) 17 17 22 AWG
Strap common 53 23 23 53 22 AWG
(common - connect to P1-A 23) 13 13 22 AWG (connect to J1-A 23)
(common - connect to P1-A 23) 37 37 22 AWG (connect to J1-A 23)
115 V ac l i ghti ng, hi 5 36 36 5 26 AWG
Li ghti ng common 4 16 16 4 26 AWG
Di mmi ng i nput (+28 V dc) 8 6 6 8 26 AWG
Di m common 10 39 39 10 26 AWG
Remote i dent i nput 11 5 5 11 26 AWG
Cross-si de RTU di sabl e 63 8 8 63 26 AWG
Reversi onary data di spl ay enabl e 39 21 21 39 26 AWG
MB sense enabl e 61 9 9 61 26 AWG
ATC 1 sel ect 13 22 22 13 26 AWG
RTU si de 2 sel ect 64 23 23 64 26 AWG
Remote tune enabl e 12 24 24 12 26 AWG
RTU on/off 9 25 25 9 26 AWG
L Eng data no. 1, A 37 42 42 37 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
L Eng data no. 1, B 38 10 10 38 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 37/38 40 2 2 40 Shi el d for 37/38
R Eng data no. 2, A 41 11 11 41 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
R Eng data no. 2, B 42 27 27 42 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for 41/42 43 19 19 43 Shi el d for 41/42
RTU test mode enabl e 60 28 28 60 26 AWG
RTU-870A/ T Radio Tuning Unit, FlightlineTest Cables, Assembly Diagramand WireList
Figure5-21 (sheet 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-194
maintenance 523-0775657
RTU-870A/T Cabl e B (contd) RTU-870A/T Cabl e A (contd)
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1
Wi re si ze/type
Nav radi o test i nhi bi t 58 43 43 58 26 AWG
MLS no. 1 sel ect 16 44 44 16 26 AWG
MLS no. 2 sel ect 62 12 12 62 26 AWG
DME no. 2 desel ect 59 29 29 59 26 AWG
ADF no. 2 desel ect 57 30 30 57 26 AWG
UHF no. 1 sel ect 17 45 45 17 26 AWG
UHF no. 2 sel ect 18 46 46 18 26 AWG
TACAN no. 1 sel ect 19 14 14 37 26 AWG
TACAN no. 2 sel ect 20 15 15 20 26 AWG
TCAS on board sel ect 21 31 31 21 26 AWG
ADF TC-X sel ect 23 32 32 23 26 AWG
I nv TACAN i nhi bi t sel ect 24 47 47 24 26 AWG
Comm extended freq sel ect 54 48 48 54 26 AWG
Nav extended freq sel ect 55 49 49 55 26 AWG
ADF extended freq sel ect 56 4 4 56 26 AWG
RTU-870A/ T Radio Tuning Unit, FlightlineTest Cables, Assembly Diagramand WireList
Figure5-21 (sheet 3)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-195
maintenance 523-0775657
Cabl e B: Connector i nformati on:
J1: MI L-C-26500, CPN 359-4118-240
J2: MI L-C-26500, CPN 359-4118-250
P1A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
P1B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Cabl e A: Connector i nformati on:
P1: MD24266R76B24S7, CPN 359-4068-030
P2: MS24266R16B24S8, CPN 359-4095-700
Strai n rel i ef: MS27506F20-2, CPN 359-0637-070
P2A: DD 50P C37, CPN 371-0118-000;
Hood: CPN 371-0187-000
P2B: M243083-3, CPN 371-0170-000
Hood: CPN 371-0815-000
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1/J2
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1/P2
Wi re si ze/type (both cabl es)
ARI NC 429 to XPDR no. 1, 2A J1-22 7 7 P1-22 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429 to XPDR no. 1, 2B J1-23 20 20 P1-23 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for J1-22/23 22 22 Shi el d for P1-22/23
ARI NC 429 to XPDR no. 2, 2A J2-22 8 8 P2-22 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
ARI NC 429 to XPDR no. 2, 2B J2-23 21 21 P2-22 Shi el ded twi sted pai r
Shi el d for J2-22/23 9 9 Shi el d for P2-22/23
115 V ac pwr no. 1, Hi J1-3 34 34 P1-3 22 AWG
115 V ac pwr no. 1, Lo J1-4 18 18 P1-4 22 AWG
115 V ac pwr no. 2, Hi J2-3 36 36 P2-3 22 AWG
115 V ac pwr no. 2, Lo J2-4 16 16 P2-4 22 AWG
Sel f-test i nput J1-9 38 38 P1-9 26 AWG
Moni tor l amp test i nput J1-21 5 5 P1-21 26 AWG
28 V l i ghti ng, Hi J2-1 40 40 P2-1 26 AWG
28 V l i ghti ng, Lo J2-2 39 39 P2-2 26 AWG
5 V l i ghti ng, Hi J1-1 7 7 P2-1 26 AWG
5 V l i ghti ng, Lo J1-2 6 6 P1-2 26 AWG
Antenna sel ect, no. 1 J1-5 8 8 P1-5 26 AWG
Antenna transfer common J2-10 21 21 P2-10 26 AWG
Antenna sel ect, no. 2 J2-5 9 9 P2-5 26 AWG
TTC-920G TCAS/ Transponder Control, FlightlineTest Cables, Assembly Diagramand WireList
Figure5-22 (sheet 1 of 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-196
maintenance 523-0775657
TTC-920G Cabl e B (contd) TTC-920G Cabl e A (contd)
Si gnal name
/descri pti on
From
J1/J2
To
P1-A
To
P1-B
From
P2-A
From
P2-B
To
P1/P2
Wi re si ze/type
Ai r/gnd no. 1, i nput J1-24 22 22 P1-24 26 AWG
Ai r/gnd no. 1, output J1-15 23 23 P1-15 26 AWG
Ai r/gnd no. 2, i nput J2-24 24 24 P2-24 26 AWG
Ai r/gnd no. 2, output J2-15 25 25 P2-15 26 AWG
Moni tor l amp pwr, i nput 12/28 V J1-18 26 26 P1-18 26 AWG
Si gnal common, no. 1 J1-6 41 41 P1-6 26 AWG
Si gnal common, no. 2 J2-6 13 13 P2-6 26 AWG
XPDR fai l warn, no. 1 J1-12 42 42 P1-12 26 AWG
XPDR fai l warn, no. 2 J2-12 11 11 P2-12 26 AWG
XPDR fai l warn output J1-10 10 10 P2-10 26 AWG
XPDR i n stby, no. 1 J1-7 27 27 P1-7 26 AWG
XPDR i n stby, no. 2 J2-7 28 28 P2-7 26 AWG
Al ternate AD sel ect, no. 1 J1-16 43 43 P1-16 26 AWG
Al ternate AD sel ect, no. 2 J2-16 44 44 P2-16 26 AWG
Chassi s gnd, no. 1 J1-8 4 4 P1-8 26 AWG
Chassi s gnd, no. 2 J2-8 37 37 P2-8 26 AWG
Ai r/gnd no. 1, output J1-11 29 29 P1-11 26 AWG
Ai r/gnd no. 2, output J2-11 30 30 P2-11 26 AWG
XPDR fai l , di screte no. 1 J1-20 45 45 P1-20 26 AWG
XPDR fai l , di screte no. 2 J2-20 46 46 P2-20 26 AWG
TTC-920G TCAS/Transponder Control , Fl i ghtl i ne Test Cabl es, Assembl y Di agram and Wi re Li st
Fi gure 5-22 (sheet 2)
5/ 5/ 1993 5-197




523-0775652
Copyright 2007, Rockwell Collins, Inc.,
All Rights Reserved, Printed in USA

You might also like